Guide to configuring and integrating ForgeRock® Identity Management software into identity management solutions. This software offers flexible services for automating management of the identity life cycle.
Preface
ForgeRock Identity Platform™ serves as the basis for our simple and comprehensive Identity and Access Management solution. We help our customers deepen their relationships with their customers, and improve the productivity and connectivity of their employees and partners. For more information about ForgeRock and about the platform, see https://www.forgerock.com.
1. About This Guide
In this guide you will learn how to integrate ForgeRock Identity Management (IDM) software as part of a complete identity management solution.
This guide is written for systems integrators building solutions based on ForgeRock Identity Management services. This guide describes the product functionality, and shows you how to set up and configure IDM software as part of your overall identity management solution.
2. Accessing Documentation Online
ForgeRock publishes comprehensive documentation online:
The ForgeRock Knowledge Base offers a large and increasing number of up-to-date, practical articles that help you deploy and manage ForgeRock software.
While many articles are visible to community members, ForgeRock customers have access to much more, including advanced information for customers using ForgeRock software in a mission-critical capacity.
ForgeRock product documentation, such as this document, aims to be technically accurate and complete with respect to the software documented. It is visible to everyone and covers all product features and examples of how to use them.
3. Using the ForgeRock.org Site
The ForgeRock.org site has links to source code for ForgeRock open source software, as well as links to the ForgeRock forums and technical blogs.
If you are a ForgeRock customer, raise a support ticket instead of using the forums. ForgeRock support professionals will get in touch to help you.
Chapter 1. Architectural Overview
This chapter introduces the IDM architecture, and describes component modules and services.
In this chapter you will learn:
How IDM uses the OSGi framework as a basis for its modular architecture
How the infrastructure modules provide the features required for IDM's core services
What those core services are and how they fit in to the overall architecture
How IDM provides access to the resources it manages
1.1. Modular Framework
IDM implements infrastructure modules that run in an OSGi framework. It exposes core services through RESTful APIs to client applications.
The following figure provides an overview of the architecture. Specific components are described in more detail in subsequent sections of this chapter.
The IDM framework is based on OSGi:
- OSGi
OSGi is a module system and service platform for the Java programming language that implements a complete and dynamic component model. For more information, see What is OSGi? IDM runs in Apache Felix, an implementation of the OSGi Framework and Service Platform.
- Servlet
The Servlet layer provides RESTful HTTP access to the managed objects and services. IDM embeds the Jetty Servlet Container, which can be configured for either HTTP or HTTPS access.
1.2. Infrastructure Modules
The infrastructure modules provide the underlying features needed for core services:
- BPMN 2.0 Workflow Engine
The embedded workflow and business process engine is based on Activiti and the Business Process Model and Notation (BPMN) 2.0 standard.
For more information, see "Integrating Business Processes and Workflows".
- Task Scanner
The task-scanning mechanism performs a batch scan for a specified property, on a scheduled interval. The task scanner executes a task when the value of that property matches a specified value.
For more information, see "Scanning Data to Trigger Tasks".
- Scheduler
The scheduler supports Quartz cron triggers and simple triggers. Use the scheduler to trigger regular reconciliations, liveSync, and scripts, to collect and run reports, to trigger workflows, and to perform custom logging.
For more information, see "Scheduling Tasks and Events".
- Script Engine
The script engine is a pluggable module that provides the triggers and plugin points for IDM. JavaScript and Groovy are supported.
- Policy Service
An extensible policy service applies validation requirements to objects and properties, when they are created or updated.
For more information, see "Using Policies to Validate Data".
- Audit Logging
Auditing logs all relevant system activity to the configured log stores. This includes the data from reconciliation as a basis for reporting, as well as detailed activity logs to capture operations on the internal (managed) and external (system) objects.
For more information, see "Setting Up Audit Logging".
- Repository
The repository provides a common abstraction for a pluggable persistence layer. IDM supports reconciliation and synchronization with several major external data stores in production, including relational databases, LDAP servers, and even flat CSV and XML files.
The repository API uses a JSON-based object model with RESTful principles consistent with the other IDM services. To facilitate testing, IDM includes an embedded instance of ForgeRock Directory Services (DS). In production, you must use a supported repository, as described in "Selecting a Repository" in the Installation Guide.
1.3. Core Services
The core services are the heart of the resource-oriented unified object model and architecture:
- Object Model
Artifacts handled by IDM are Java object representations of the JavaScript object model as defined by JSON. The object model supports interoperability and potential integration with many applications, services, and programming languages.
IDM can serialize and deserialize these structures to and from JSON as required. IDM also exposes a set of triggers and functions that you can define, in either JavaScript or Groovy, which can natively read and modify these JSON-based object model structures.
- Managed Objects
A managed object is an object that represents the identity-related data managed by IDM. Managed objects are configurable, JSON-based data structures that IDM stores in its pluggable repository. The default managed object configuration includes users and roles, but you can define any kind of managed object, for example, groups or devices.
You can access managed objects over the REST interface with a query similar to the following:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/..."
- System Objects
System objects are pluggable representations of objects on external systems. For example, a user entry that is stored in an external LDAP directory is represented as a system object in IDM.
System objects follow the same RESTful resource-based design principles as managed objects. They can be accessed over the REST interface with a query similar to the following:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/system/..."
There is a default implementation for the ICF framework, that allows any connector object to be represented as a system object.
- Mappings
Mappings define policies between source and target objects and their attributes during synchronization and reconciliation. Mappings can also define triggers for validation, customization, filtering, and transformation of source and target objects.
For more information, see "Synchronizing Data Between Resources".
- Synchronization and Reconciliation
Reconciliation enables on-demand and scheduled resource comparisons between the managed object repository and the source or target systems. Comparisons can result in different actions, depending on the mappings defined between the systems.
Synchronization enables creating, updating, and deleting resources from a source to a target system, either on demand or according to a schedule.
For more information, see "Synchronizing Data Between Resources".
1.4. Secure Commons REST Commands
Representational State Transfer (REST) is a software architecture style for exposing resources, using the technologies and protocols of the World Wide Web. For more information on the ForgeRock REST API, see "REST API Reference".
REST interfaces are commonly tested with a curl command. Many of these commands are used in this document. They work with the standard ports associated with Java EE communications, 8080 and 8443.
To run curl over the secure port, 8443, you must include
either the --insecure option, or follow the instructions
shown in "Restricting REST Access to the HTTPS Port". You can use those
instructions with the self-signed certificate generated when IDM
starts, or with a *.crt
file provided by a
certificate authority.
1.5. Access Layer
The access layer provides the user interfaces and public APIs for accessing and managing the repository and its functions:
- RESTful Interfaces
IDM provides REST APIs for CRUD operations, for invoking synchronization and reconciliation, and to access several other services.
For more information, see "REST API Reference".
- User Interfaces
User interfaces provide access to most of the functionality available over the REST API.
Chapter 2. Starting, Stopping, and Running the Server
This chapter covers the scripts provided for starting and stopping IDM, and describes how to verify the health of a system, that is, that all requirements are met for a successful system startup.
2.1. To Start and Stop the Server
By default, you start and stop IDM in interactive mode.
To start the server interactively, open a terminal or command window, change
to the openidm
directory, and run the startup script:
startup.sh (UNIX)
startup.bat (Windows)
The startup script starts the server, and opens an OSGi console with a
->
prompt where you can issue console commands.
The default hostname and ports for IDM are set in the
resolver/boot.properties
file found in the
openidm/
directory. IDM is initially
configured to run on http
on port 8080
,
https
on port 8443
, with a hostname
of localhost
. For more information about changing ports
and hostnames, see "Host and Port Information".
To stop the server interactively in the OSGi console, run the shutdown command:
-> shutdown
You can also start IDM as a background process on UNIX and Linux systems. Follow these steps, preferable before you start IDM for the first time:
If you have already started the server, shut it down and remove the Felix cache files under
openidm/felix-cache/
:-> shutdown ... $ rm -rf felix-cache/*
Start the server in the background. The nohup survives a logout and the 2>&1& redirects standard output and standard error to the noted
console.out
file:$ nohup ./startup.sh > logs/console.out 2>&1& [1] 2343
To stop the server running as a background process, use the shutdown.sh script:
$ ./shutdown.sh ./shutdown.sh Stopping OpenIDM (2343)
Note
Although installations on OS X systems are not supported in production, you might want to run IDM on OS X in a demo or test environment. To run IDM in the background on an OS X system, take the following additional steps:
Remove the
org.apache.felix.shell.tui-*.jar
bundle from theopenidm/bundle
directory.Disable
ConsoleHandler
logging, as described in "Disable Logs".
2.2. Specifying the Startup Configuration
By default, IDM starts with the configuration, script, and binary
files in the openidm/conf
,
openidm/script
, and openidm/bin
directories. You can launch IDM with a different set of
configuration, script, and binary files for test purposes, to manage
different projects, or to run one of the included samples.
The startup.sh script specifies the following elements of a running instance:
-
-p | --project-location {/path/to/project/directory}
The project location specifies the directory that contains the configuration and script files that IDM will use.
All configuration objects and any artifacts that are not in the bundled defaults (such as custom scripts) must be included in the project location. These objects include all files otherwise included in the
openidm/conf
andopenidm/script
directories.For example, the following command starts the server with the configuration of the
sync-with-csv
sample (located in/path/to/openidm/samples/sync-with-csv
):$ ./startup.sh -p /path/to/openidm/samples/sync-with-csv
If you do not provide an absolute path, the project location path is relative to the system property,
user.dir
. IDM setsidm.instance.dir
to that relative directory path. Alternatively, if you start the server without the -p option, IDM setsidm.instance.dir
to/path/to/openidm
.Note
In this documentation, "your project" refers to the value of
idm.instance.dir
.-w |--working-location {/path/to/working/directory}
The working location specifies the directory in which the embedded DS instance is installed, and the directory to which IDM writes its database cache, audit logs, and felix cache. The working location includes everything that is in the default
db/
,audit/
, andfelix-cache/
subdirectories.The following command specifies that IDM writes its database cache and audit data to
/Users/admin/openidm/storage
:$ ./startup.sh -w /Users/admin/openidm/storage
If you do not provide an absolute path, the path is relative to the system property,
user.dir
. IDM setsidm.data.dir
to that relative directory path. If you do not specify a working location, IDM setsidm.data.dir
to/path/to/openidm
. This means the default working location data is located in theopenidm/db
,openidm/felix-cache
andopenidm/audit
directories.Note that this property does not affect the location of the IDM system logs. To change the location of these logs, edit the
conf/logging.properties
file.You can also change the location of the Felix cache, by editing the
conf/config.properties
file, or by starting the server with the-s
option, described later in this section.-c | --config {/path/to/config/file}
A customizable startup configuration file (named
launcher.json
) lets you specify how the OSGi Framework is started.Unless you are working with a highly customized deployment, you should not modify the default framework configuration. This option is therefore described in more detail in "Advanced Configuration".
-P {property=value}
Any properties passed to the startup script with the
-P
option are used when the server loads thelauncher.json
startup configuration file.Options specified here have the lowest order of precedence when the configuration is loaded. If the same property is defined in any other configuration source, the value specified here is ignored.
-s | --storage {/path/to/storage/directory}
Specifies the OSGi storage location of the cached configuration files.
You can use this option to redirect output if you are installing on a read-only filesystem volume. For more information, see "Installing on a Read-Only Volume" in the Installation Guide. This option is also useful when you are testing different configurations. Sometimes when you start the server with two different sample configurations, one after the other, the cached configurations are merged and cause problems. Specifying a storage location creates a separate
felix-cache
directory in that location, and the cached configuration files remain completely separate.
Additionally, IDM sets the system property
idm.install.dir
to the location IDM is
installed in. For example, if IDM was installed in
/Users/admin/openidm/
, that is what
idm.install.dir
will be set to.
For information about changing the startup configuration by substituting property values, see "Using Property Value Substitution".
2.3. Monitoring Server Health
Because IDM is highly modular and configurable, it is often difficult to assess whether a system has started up successfully, or whether the system is ready and stable after dynamic configuration changes have been made.
The health check service allows you to monitor the status of internal resources.
To monitor the status of external resources such as LDAP servers and external databases, use the commands described in "Checking the Status of External Systems Over REST".
2.3.1. Basic Health Checks
The health check service reports on the state of the server and outputs this state to the OSGi console and to the log files. The server can be in one of the following states:
STARTING
- the server is starting upACTIVE_READY
- all of the specified requirements have been met to consider the server readyACTIVE_NOT_READY
- one or more of the specified requirements have not been met and the server is not considered readySTOPPING
- the server is shutting down
To verify the current server state, use the following REST call:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/info/ping" { "_id": "", "_rev": "", "shortDesc": "OpenIDM ready", "state": "ACTIVE_READY" }
2.3.2. Obtaining Session Information
To obtain information about the current IDM session, beyond basic health checks, use the following REST call:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/info/login" { "_id": "login", "authenticationId": "openidm-admin", "authorization": { "component": "internal/user", "authLogin": false, "roles": [ "internal/role/openidm-admin", "internal/role/openidm-authorized" ], "ipAddress": "0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1", "id": "openidm-admin", "moduleId": "INTERNAL_USER" } }
Note
You can also increment the loginCount
with a related
endpoint described in "Authenticating Internal and Managed Users".
2.3.3. Monitoring Tuning and Health Parameters
The openidm/health
endpoint provides more detailed
monitoring information on the following areas:
Operating System
on theopenidm/health/os
endpointMemory
on theopenidm/health/memory
endpointReconciliation
, on theopenidm/health/recon
endpoint.
For information on controlling access to these endpoints, see
"Understanding the Access Configuration Script (access.js
)".
2.3.3.1. Operating System Health Check
With the following REST call, you can get basic information about the host operating system:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/health/os" { "_id" : "", "_rev" : "", "availableProcessors" : 1, "systemLoadAverage" : 0.06, "operatingSystemArchitecture" : "amd64", "operatingSystemName" : "Linux", "operatingSystemVersion" : "2.6.32-504.30.3.el6.x86_64" }
From the output, you can see that this particular system has one 64-bit
CPU, with a load average of 6 percent, on a Linux system with the noted
kernel operatingSystemVersion
number.
2.3.3.2. Memory Health Check
With the following REST call, you can get basic information about overall JVM memory use:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/health/memory" { "_id" : "", "_rev" : "", "objectPendingFinalization" : 0, "heapMemoryUsage" : { "init" : 1073741824, "used" : 88538392, "committed" : 1037959168, "max" : 1037959168 }, "nonHeapMemoryUsage" : { "init" : 24313856, "used" : 69255024, "committed" : 69664768, "max" : 224395264 } }
The output includes information on JVM Heap and Non-Heap memory, in bytes. Briefly:
JVM Heap memory is used to store Java objects.
JVM Non-Heap Memory is used by Java to store loaded classes and related meta-data.
2.3.3.3. Reconciliation Health Check
With the following REST call, you can get basic information about the system demands related to reconciliation:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/health/recon" { "_id" : "", "_rev" : "", "activeThreads" : 1, "corePoolSize" : 10, "largestPoolSize" : 1, "maximumPoolSize" : 10, "currentPoolSize" : 1 }
From the output, you can review the number of active threads used by the reconciliation, as well as the available thread pool.
2.3.4. Verifying the State of Health Check Service Modules
The configurable health check service verifies the status of the modules and services required for an operational system. During system startup, IDM checks that these modules and services are available and reports on any requirements that have not been met. If dynamic configuration changes are made, IDM rechecks that the required modules and services are functioning, to allow ongoing monitoring of system operation.
IDM checks all required modules. Examples of those modules are shown here:
"org.forgerock.openicf.framework.connector-framework" "org.forgerock.openicf.framework.connector-framework-internal" "org.forgerock.openicf.framework.connector-framework-osgi" "org.forgerock.openidm.audit" "org.forgerock.openidm.core" "org.forgerock.openidm.enhanced-config" "org.forgerock.openidm.external-email" ... "org.forgerock.openidm.system" "org.forgerock.openidm.ui" "org.forgerock.openidm.util" "org.forgerock.commons.org.forgerock.json.resource" "org.forgerock.commons.org.forgerock.util" "org.forgerock.openidm.security-jetty" "org.forgerock.openidm.jetty-fragment" "org.forgerock.openidm.quartz-fragment" "org.ops4j.pax.web.pax-web-extender-whiteboard" "org.forgerock.openidm.scheduler" "org.ops4j.pax.web.pax-web-jetty-bundle" "org.forgerock.openidm.repo-jdbc" "org.forgerock.openidm.repo-ds" "org.forgerock.openidm.config" "org.forgerock.openidm.crypto"
IDM checks all required services. Examples of those services are shown here:
"org.forgerock.openidm.config" "org.forgerock.openidm.provisioner" "org.forgerock.openidm.provisioner.openicf.connectorinfoprovider" "org.forgerock.openidm.external.rest" "org.forgerock.openidm.audit" "org.forgerock.openidm.policy" "org.forgerock.openidm.managed" "org.forgerock.openidm.script" "org.forgerock.openidm.crypto" "org.forgerock.openidm.recon" "org.forgerock.openidm.info" "org.forgerock.openidm.router" "org.forgerock.openidm.scheduler" "org.forgerock.openidm.scope" "org.forgerock.openidm.taskscanner"
You can replace the list of required modules and services, or add to it, by
adding the following lines to your
resolver/boot.properties
file. Bundles and services
are specified as a list of symbolic names, separated by commas:
openidm.healthservice.reqbundles
- overrides the default required bundles.openidm.healthservice.reqservices
- overrides the default required services.openidm.healthservice.additionalreqbundles
- specifies required bundles (in addition to the default list).openidm.healthservice.additionalreqservices
- specifies required services (in addition to the default list).
By default, the server is given 15 seconds to start up all the required
bundles and services before system readiness is assessed. Note that this
is not the total start time, but the time required to complete the service
startup after the framework has started. You can change this default by
setting the value of the servicestartmax
property (in
milliseconds) in your resolver/boot.properties
file.
This example sets the startup time to five seconds:
openidm.healthservice.servicestartmax=5000
2.4. Displaying Information About Installed Modules
On a running instance, you can list the installed modules and their states by typing the following command in the OSGi console. (The output will vary by configuration):
-> scr list BundleId Component Name Default State Component Id State PIDs (Factory PID) [ 5] org.forgerock.openidm.config.enhanced.starter enabled [ 1] [active ] org.forgerock.openidm.config.enhanced.starter [ 5] org.forgerock.openidm.config.manage enabled [ 0] [active ] org.forgerock.openidm.config.manage [ 10] org.forgerock.openidm.datasource.jdbc enabled [ 10] org.forgerock.openidm.repo.jdbc enabled [ 11] org.forgerock.openidm.repo.ds enabled [ 35] [active ] org.forgerock.openidm.repo.ds [ 16] org.forgerock.openidm.cluster enabled [ 18] [active ] org.forgerock.openidm.cluster [ 17] org.forgerock.openidm.http.context enabled [ 2] [active ] org.forgerock.openidm.http.context [ 123] org.forgerock.openidm.api-servlet enabled [ 5] [active ] org.forgerock.openidm.api-servlet [ 123] org.forgerock.openidm.error-servlet enabled [ 3] [active ] org.forgerock.openidm.error-servlet [ 123] org.forgerock.openidm.router.servlet enabled [ 4] [active ] org.forgerock.openidm.router.servlet [ 124] org.forgerock.openidm.audit enabled [ 24] [active ] org.forgerock.openidm.audit [ 124] org.forgerock.openidm.audit.filter enabled [ 6] [active ] org.forgerock.openidm.audit.filter ->
To display additional information about a particular module or service, run
the following command, substituting the Component Id
from
the preceding list:
-> scr info Id
The following example displays additional information about the router service:
-> scr info 4 *** Bundle: org.forgerock.openidm.api-servlet (123) Component Description: Name: org.forgerock.openidm.router.servlet Implementation Class: org.forgerock.openidm.servlet.internal.ServletConnectionFactory Default State: enabled Activation: immediate Configuration Policy: ignore Activate Method: activate Deactivate Method: deactivate Modified Method: - Configuration Pid: [org.forgerock.openidm.router.servlet] Services: org.forgerock.json.resource.ConnectionFactory org.forgerock.openidm.router.RouterFilterRegistration Service Scope: singleton Reference: requestHandler Interface Name: org.forgerock.json.resource.RequestHandler Target Filter: (org.forgerock.openidm.router=*) Cardinality: 1..1 Policy: static Policy option: reluctant Reference Scope: bundle ... ->
2.5. Querying Enabled Features
"Displaying Information About Installed Modules" showed how to list installed modules and their states on a running IDM instance. An alternative method of assessing the state of a server configuration is to query the enabled features over REST.
The feature availability service determines the set of possible features from the active bundles, and provides the following information:
The name and
_id
of the featureWhether the feature is enabled
If the feature is enabled, the REST endpoint on which that feature can be accessed
You can query the available features on the
info/features
endpoint, for example:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/info/features?_queryFilter=true" { "result": [ { "_id": "retrieveUsername", "name": "retrieveUsername", "enabled": false, "endpoints": [] }, { "_id": "identityProviders", "name": "identityProviders", "enabled": true, "endpoints": [ "identityProviders" ] }, { "_id": "workflow", "name": "workflow", "enabled": true, "endpoints": [ "workflow*" ] }, { "_id": "passwordReset", "name": "passwordReset", "enabled": false, "endpoints": [] }, { "_id": "registration", "name": "registration", "enabled": true, "endpoints": [ "selfservice/registration" ] }, { "_id": "email", "name": "email", "enabled": false, "endpoints": [] } ], ... }
2.6. Starting in Debug Mode
To debug custom libraries, you can start the server with the option to use the Java Platform Debugger Architecture (JPDA):
Start IDM with the
jpda
option:$ cd /path/to/openidm $ ./startup.sh jpda Executing ./startup.sh... Using OPENIDM_HOME: /path/to/openidm Using OPENIDM_OPTS: -Xmx1024m -Xms1024m -Djava.compiler=NONE -Xnoagent -Xdebug -Xrunjdwp:transport=dt_socket,address=5005,server=y,suspend=n Using LOGGING_CONFIG: -Djava.util.logging.config.file=/path/to/openidm/conf/logging.properties Listening for transport dt_socket at address: 5005 Using boot properties at /path/to/openidm/resolver/boot.properties -> OpenIDM version "6.5.2.0" (revision: xxxx) OpenIDM ready
The relevant JPDA options are outlined in the startup script (
startup.sh
).In your IDE, attach a Java debugger to the JVM via socket, on port 5005.
Caution
This interface is internal and subject to change. If you depend on this interface, contact ForgeRock support.
2.7. Troubleshooting a Server Instance
For information about troubleshooting various issues in IDM, including collecting useful troubleshooting information such as logs, heap dumps and stack traces, see the corresponding Knowledge Base article.
Chapter 3. Command-Line Interface
This chapter describes the basic command-line interface (CLI). The CLI includes a number of utilities for managing an IDM instance.
All of the utilities are subcommands of the cli.sh
(UNIX) or cli.bat
(Windows) scripts. To use the utilities,
you can either run them as subcommands, or launch the cli
script first, and then run the utility. For example, to run the
encrypt utility on a UNIX system:
$ cd /path/to/openidm $ ./cli.sh Using boot properties at /path/to/openidm/resolver/boot.properties openidm# encrypt ....
or
$ cd /path/to/openidm $ ./cli.sh encrypt ...
By default, the command-line utilities run with the properties defined in your
resolver/boot.properties
file.
If you run the cli.sh command by itself, it opens an IDM-specific shell prompt:
openidm#
The startup and shutdown scripts are not discussed in this chapter. For information about these scripts, see "Starting, Stopping, and Running the Server".
The following sections describe the subcommands and their use. Examples assume that you are running the commands on a UNIX system. For Windows systems, use cli.bat instead of cli.sh.
For a list of subcommands available from the openidm#
prompt, run the cli.sh help command. The
help and exit options shown below are
self-explanatory. The other subcommands are explained in the subsections
that follow:
local:secureHash Hash the input string. local:keytool Export or import a SecretKeyEntry. The Java Keytool does not allow for exporting or importing SecretKeyEntries. local:encrypt Encrypt the input string. local:validate Validates all json configuration files in the configuration (default: /conf) folder. basic:help Displays available commands. basic:exit Exit from the console. remote:configureconnector Generate connector configuration. remote:configexport Exports all configurations. remote:update Update the system with the provided update file. remote:configimport Imports the configuration set from local file/directory.
The following options are common to the configexport, configimport, and configureconnector subcommands:
- -u or --user USER[:PASSWORD]
Allows you to specify the server user and password. Specifying a username is mandatory. If you do not specify a username, the following error is output to the OSGi console:
Remote operation failed: Unauthorized
. If you do not specify a password, you are prompted for one. This option is used by all three subcommands.- --url URL
The URL of the REST service. The default URL is
http://localhost:8080/openidm/
. This can be used to import configuration files from a remote running IDM instance. This option is used by all three subcommands.- -P or --port PORT
The port number associated with the REST service. If specified, this option overrides any port number specified with the --url option. The default port is 8080. This option is used by all three subcommands.
3.1. Using the configexport Subcommand
The configexport subcommand exports all configuration objects to a specified location, enabling you to reuse a system configuration in another environment. For example, you can test a configuration in a development environment, then export it and import it into a production environment. This subcommand also lets you inspect the active configuration of an IDM instance.
OpenIDM must be running when you execute this command.
Usage is as follows:
$ ./cli.sh configexport --user username:password export-location
For example:
$ ./cli.sh configexport --user openidm-admin:openidm-admin /tmp/conf
On Windows systems, the export-location must be provided in quotation marks, for example:
C:\openidm\cli.bat configexport --user openidm-admin:openidm-admin "C:\temp\openidm"
Configuration objects are exported as .json
files to the
specified directory. The command creates the directory if needed.
Configuration files that are present in this directory are renamed as backup
files, with a timestamp, for example,
audit.json.2014-02-19T12-00-28.bkp
, and are not
overwritten. The following configuration objects are exported:
The internal repository table configuration (
repo.ds.json
orrepo.jdbc.json
) and the datasource connection configuration, for JDBC repositories (datasource.jdbc-default.json
)The script configuration (
script.json
)The log configuration (
audit.json
)The authentication configuration (
authentication.json
)The cluster configuration (
cluster.json
)The configuration of a connected SMTP email server (
external.email.json)
Custom configuration information (
info-name.json
)The managed object configuration (
managed.json
)The connector configuration (
provisioner.openicf-*.json
)The router service configuration (
router.json
)The scheduler service configuration (
scheduler.json
)Any configured schedules (
schedule-*.json
)Standard security questions (
selfservice.kba.json)
The synchronization mapping configuration (
sync.json
)If workflows are defined, the configuration of the workflow engine (
workflow.json
) and the workflow access configuration (process-access.json
)Any configuration files related to the user interface (
ui-*.json
)The configuration of any custom endpoints (
endpoint-*.json
)The configuration of servlet filters (
servletfilter-*.json
)The policy configuration (
policy.json
)
3.2. Using the configimport Subcommand
The configimport subcommand imports configuration objects from the specified directory, enabling you to reuse a system configuration from another environment. For example, you can test a configuration in a development environment, then export it and import it into a production environment.
The command updates the existing configuration from the import-location over the REST interface. By default, if configuration objects are present in the import-location and not in the existing configuration, these objects are added. If configuration objects are present in the existing location but not in the import-location, these objects are left untouched in the existing configuration.
The subcommand takes the following options:
-r
,--replaceall
,--replaceAll
Replaces the entire list of configuration files with the files in the specified import location.
Note that this option wipes out the existing configuration and replaces it with the configuration in the import-location. Objects in the existing configuration that are not present in the import-location are deleted.
--retries
(integer)This option specifies the number of times the command should attempt to update the configuration if the server is not ready.
Default value : 10
--retryDelay
(integer)This option specifies the delay (in milliseconds) between configuration update retries if the server is not ready.
Default value : 500
Usage is as follows:
$ ./cli.sh configimport --user username:password [--replaceAll] [--retries integer] [--retryDelay integer] import-location
For example:
$ ./cli.sh configimport --user openidm-admin:openidm-admin --retries 5 --retryDelay 250 --replaceAll /tmp/conf
On Windows systems, the import-location must be provided in quotation marks, for example:
C:\openidm\cli.bat configimport --user openidm-admin:openidm-admin --replaceAll "C:\temp\openidm"
Configuration objects are imported as .json
files from the
specified directory to the conf
directory. The
configuration objects that are imported are the same as those for the
export command, described in the previous section.
3.3. Using the configureconnector Subcommand
The configureconnector subcommand generates a configuration for an ICF connector.
Usage is as follows:
$ ./cli.sh configureconnector --user username:password --name connector-name
Select the type of connector that you want to configure. The following example configures a new CSV connector:
$ ./cli.sh configureconnector --user openidm-admin:openidm-admin --name myCsvConnector Executing ./cli.sh... Starting shell in /path/to/openidm Mar 22, 2018 09:50:01 AM org.forgerock.openidm.core.FilePropertyAccessor loadProps 0. Workday Connector version 1.5.20.8 1. SSH Connector version 1.5.20.8 2. ServiceNow Connector version 1.5.20.8 3. Scripted SQL Connector version 1.5.20.8 4. Scripted REST Connector version 1.5.20.8 5. Scim Connector version 1.5.20.8 6. Salesforce Connector version 1.5.20.8 7. MongoDB Connector version 1.5.20.8 8. Marketo Connector version 1.5.20.8 9. LDAP Connector version 1.5.20.8 10. Kerberos Connector version 1.5.20.8 11. Scripted Poolable Groovy Connector version 1.5.20.8 12. Scripted Groovy Connector version 1.5.20.8 13. GoogleApps Connector version 1.5.20.8 14. Database Table Connector version 1.5.20.8 15. CSV File Connector version 1.5.20.8 16. Adobe Marketing Cloud Connector version 1.5.20.8 17. Exit Select [0..17]: 15 Edit the configuration file and run the command again. The configuration was saved to /path/to/openidm/temp/provisioner.openicf-myCsvConnector.json
The basic configuration is saved in a file named
/openidm/temp/provisioner.openicf-connector-name.json
.
Edit at least the configurationProperties
parameter in
this file to complete the connector configuration. For example, for a CSV
connector:
"configurationProperties" : { "headerPassword" : "password", "csvFile" : "&{idm.instance.dir}/data/csvConnectorData.csv", "newlineString" : "\n", "headerUid" : "uid", "quoteCharacter" : "\"", "fieldDelimiter" : ",", "syncFileRetentionCount" : 3 },
For more information about the connector configuration properties, see "Configuring Connectors".
When you have modified the file, run the configureconnector command again so that IDM can pick up the new connector configuration:
$ ./cli.sh configureconnector --user openidm-admin:openidm-admin --name myCsvConnector Executing ./cli.sh... Starting shell in /path/to/openidm Using boot properties at /path/to/openidm/resolver/boot.properties Configuration was found and read from: /path/to/openidm/temp/provisioner.openicf-myCsvConnector.json
You can now copy the new
provisioner.openicf-myCsvConnector.json
file to your
project's conf/
subdirectory.
You can also configure connectors over the REST interface, or through the Admin UI. For more information, see "Configuring Connectors".
3.4. Using the encrypt Subcommand
The encrypt subcommand encrypts an input string, or JSON object, provided at the command line. This subcommand can be used to encrypt passwords, or other sensitive data, to be stored in the repository. The encrypted value is output to standard output and provides details of the cryptography key that is used to encrypt the data.
Usage is as follows:
$ ./cli.sh encrypt [-j] string
If you do not enter the string as part of the command, the command prompts for the string to be encrypted. If you enter the string as part of the command, any special characters, for example quotation marks, must be escaped.
The -j
option indicates that the string to be encrypted is
a JSON object, and validates the object. If the object is malformed JSON and
you use the -j
option, the command throws an error. It is
easier to input JSON objects in interactive mode. If you input the JSON
object on the command-line, the object must be surrounded by quotes and any
special characters, including curly braces, must be escaped. The rules for
escaping these characters are fairly complex. For more information, see the
OSGi specification.
For example:
$ ./cli.sh encrypt -j '\{\"password\":\"myPassw0rd\"\}'
The following example encrypts a normal string value:
$ ./cli.sh encrypt mypassword Executing ./cli.sh...x Starting shell in /path/to/openidm -----BEGIN ENCRYPTED VALUE----- { "$crypto" : { "type" : "x-simple-encryption", "value" : { "cipher" : "AES/CBC/PKCS5Padding", "stableId" : "openidm-sym-default", "salt" : "vdz6bUztiT6QsExNrZQAEA==", "data" : "RgMLRbX0guxF80nwrtaZkkoFFGqSQdNWF7Ve0zS+N1I=", "keySize" : 16, "purpose" : "idm.config.encryption", "iv" : "R9w1TcWfbd9FPmOjfvMhZQ==", "mac" : "9pXtSKAt9+dO3Mu0NlrJsQ==" } } } ------END ENCRYPTED VALUE------
The following example prompts for a JSON object to be encrypted:
$ ./cli.sh encrypt -j Using boot properties at /path/to/openidm/resolver/boot.properties Enter the Json value > Press ctrl-D to finish input Start data input: {"password":"myPassw0rd"} ^D -----BEGIN ENCRYPTED VALUE----- { "$crypto" : { "type" : "x-simple-encryption", "value" : { "cipher" : "AES/CBC/PKCS5Padding", "stableId" : "openidm-sym-default", "salt" : "vdz6bUztiT6QsExNrZQAEA==", "data" : "RgMLRbX0guxF80nwrtaZkkoFFGqSQdNWF7Ve0zS+N1I=", "keySize" : 16, "purpose" : "idm.config.encryption", "iv" : "R9w1TcWfbd9FPmOjfvMhZQ==", "mac" : "9pXtSKAt9+dO3Mu0NlrJsQ==" } } } ------END ENCRYPTED VALUE------
3.5. Using the secureHash Subcommand
The secureHash subcommand hashes an input string, or JSON object, using the specified hash algorithm. This subcommand can be used to hash password values, or other sensitive data, to be stored in the repository. The hashed value is output to standard output and provides details of the algorithm that was used to hash the data.
Usage is as follows:
$ ./cli.sh secureHash --algorithm [-j] string
The -a
or --algorithm
option specifies the
hash algorithm to use. For a list of supported hash algorithms, see
"Encoding Attribute Values by Using Salted Hash Algorithms".
If you do not enter the string as part of the command, the command prompts for the string to be hashed. If you enter the string as part of the command, any special characters, for example quotation marks, must be escaped.
The -j
option indicates that the string to be hashed is
a JSON object, and validates the object. If the object is malformed JSON and
you use the -j
option, the command throws an error. It is
easier to input JSON objects in interactive mode. If you input the JSON
object on the command-line, the object must be surrounded by quotes and any
special characters, including curly braces, must be escaped. The rules for
escaping these characters are fairly complex. For more information, see the
OSGi specification.
For example:
$ ./cli.sh secureHash --algorithm SHA-384 '\{\"password\":\"myPassw0rd\"\}'
The following example hashes a password value (mypassword
)
using the SHA-384
algorithm:
$ ./cli.sh secureHash --algorithm SHA-384 mypassword Executing ./cli.sh... Starting shell in /path/to/openidm Nov 14, 2017 1:19:49 PM org.forgerock.openidm.core.FilePropertyAccessor loadProps INFO: Using properties at /path/to/openidm/resolver/boot.properties -----BEGIN HASHED VALUE----- { "$crypto" : { "value" : { "algorithm" : "SHA-384", "data" : "1bgOyADyXRFt4lNA80NOM0MeqWyBmAITFnB4742QdSTaLZkCw0kITPOCUhnSaeM8vKMG/W3jRN7slpcrc9jjqg==" }, "type" : "salted-hash" } } ------END HASHED VALUE------
The following example prompts for a JSON object to be hashed:
$ ./cli.sh secureHash --algorithm SHA-384 -j Executing ./cli.sh... Executing ./cli.sh... Starting shell in /path/to/openidm Nov 14, 2017 1:24:26 PM org.forgerock.openidm.core.FilePropertyAccessor loadProps INFO: Using properties at /path/to/openidm/resolver/boot.properties Enter the Json value > Press ctrl-D to finish input Start data input: {"password":"myPassw0rd"} ^D -----BEGIN HASHED VALUE----- { "$crypto" : { "value" : { "algorithm" : "SHA-384", "data" : "7Caabx7d+vOZ7d3VMwdQObQJdTQ3uGOItsX5AwR4ViygUfARR/XuxRIBQt1LRq58ZOQXFwuw+3rvzK7Kld8pSg==" }, "type" : "salted-hash" } } ------END HASHED VALUE------
3.6. Using the keytool Subcommand
The keytool subcommand exports or imports secret key values.
The Java keytool command lets you export and import public keys and certificates, but not secret or symmetric keys. The IDM keytool subcommand provides this functionality.
Usage is as follows:
$ ./cli.sh keytool [--export, --import] alias
For example, to export the default IDM symmetric key, run the following command:
$ ./cli.sh keytool --export openidm-sym-default Executing ./cli.sh... Starting shell in /home/idm/openidm Use KeyStore from: /openidm/security/keystore.jceks Please enter the password: [OK] Secret key entry with algorithm AES AES:606d80ae316be58e94439f91ad8ce1c0
The default keystore password is changeit
. For security
reasons, you must change this password in a production
environment. For information about changing the keystore password, see
"To Change the Default Keystore Password".
To import a new secret key named my-new-key, run the following command:
$ ./cli.sh keytool --import my-new-key Using boot properties at /openidm/resolver/boot.properties Use KeyStore from: /openidm/security/keystore.jceks Please enter the password: Enter the key: AES:606d80ae316be58e94439f91ad8ce1c0
If a secret key with that name already exists, IDM returns the following error:
"KeyStore contains a key with this alias"
3.7. Using the validate Subcommand
The validate subcommand validates all .json configuration
files in your project's conf/
directory.
Usage is as follows:
$ ./cli.sh validate Executing ./cli.sh Starting shell in /path/to/openidm Using boot properties at /path/to/openidm/resolver/boot.properties ................................................................... [Validating] Load JSON configuration files from: [Validating] /path/to/openidm/conf [Validating] audit.json .................................. SUCCESS [Validating] authentication.json ......................... SUCCESS ... [Validating] sync.json ................................... SUCCESS [Validating] ui-configuration.json ....................... SUCCESS [Validating] ui-countries.json ........................... SUCCESS [Validating] workflow.json ............................... SUCCESS
3.8. Using the update Subcommand
The update subcommand supports updates for patches and migrations. For an example of this process, see "Updating Servers" in the Installation Guide.
Chapter 4. Using the Browser-Based UI
IDM provides a customizable, browser-based user interface. The functionality is subdivided into Administrative and Self-Service User Interfaces.
If you are configuring or administering IDM, navigate to the
Administrative User Interface (Admin UI). If IDM is installed on
the local system, you can get to the Admin UI at the following URL:
https://localhost:8443/admin
. In the Admin UI, you can
configure connectors, customize managed objects, set up attribute
mappings, manage accounts, and more.
The End User UI provides role-based access to tasks based on BPMN2 workflows,
and allows users to manage certain aspects of their own accounts, including
configurable self-service registration. When IDM starts, you can
access the End User UI at https://localhost:8443/
. For more
information, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
All users, including openidm-admin
, can change their
password through the End User UI.
Warning
The default password for the administrative user,
openidm-admin
, is openidm-admin
. To
protect your deployment in production, change the default administrative
password, as described in
"To Change the Default Administrator Password".
4.1. Configuring the Server from the Admin UI
The Admin UI provides a graphical interface for most aspects of the IDM configuration.
Use the Quick Start cards and the Configure and Manage drop-down menus to configure the server.
In the following sections, you will examine the default Admin UI dashboard, and learn how to set up custom Admin UI dashboards.
Caution
If your browser uses an AdBlock extension, it might inadvertently block
some UI functionality, particularly if your configuration includes
strings such as ad
. For example, a connection to an
Active Directory server might be configured at the endpoint
system/ad
. To avoid problems related to blocked UI
functionality, either remove the AdBlock extension, or set up a suitable
white list to ensure that none of the targeted endpoints are blocked.
4.1.1. Default Admin UI Dashboards
The Admin UI includes multiple default dashboards. You can create additional dashboards, or add and remove widgets from the existing dashboards. For more information, see "Managing Dashboards".
When you log into the Admin UI the Quick Start dashboard loads by default.
The Admin UI includes a fixed top menu bar. As you navigate around the Admin UI, you should see the same menu bar throughout.
To display all configured dashboards, select Dashboards > Manage Dashboards. In addition to the Quick Start dashboard, three dashboards are provided by default: System Monitoring, Resource Report and Business Report. The default dashboards cover the following functionality:
- Quick Start Dashboard
Quick Start cards support one-click access to common administrative tasks. For more information, see "Quick Start Cards".
- System Monitoring Dashboard
Audit Events include information on audit data, segregated by date. For more information on these events, see "Setting Up Audit Logging".
System Health includes data on current CPU and memory usage.
Last Reconciliation includes data from the most recent reconciliation between data stores.
- Resource Report
The Resources Report includes widgets that show the number of active users, configured roles, and active connectors.
The Resources widget shows all configured connectors, mappings, and managed object types.
- Business Report
The Business Report includes widgets related to login and registration activity.
4.1.1.1. Quick Start Cards
The Quick Start
cards allow quick access to the
following configuration options:
Add Connector
Use the Admin UI to connect to external resources. For more information, see "Creating Connector Configurations With the Admin UI".
Create Mapping
Configure synchronization mappings to map objects between resources. For more information, see "Mapping Source Objects to Target Objects".
Manage Roles
Set up managed provisioning or authorization roles. For more information, see "Working With Managed Roles".
Add Device
Use the Admin UI to set up managed objects, including users, groups, roles, or even Internet of Things (IoT) devices. For more information, see "Managing Accounts".
Configure Registration
Configure user Self-Registration. You can set up the End User UI login screen, with a link that allows new users to start a verified account registration process. For more information, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
Configure Password Reset
Configure user self-service Password Reset. You can configure the ability for users to reset forgotten passwords. For more information, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
Manage Users
Allows management of users in the repository. For more information, see "Working with Managed Users".
Configure System Preferences
Configure the following aspects of the server:
Audit, as described in "Setting Up Audit Logging".
End User UI, as described in "Changing the UI Path".
Privacy & Consent, as described in "Configuring Privacy & Consent".
Workflows, as described in "Integrating Business Processes and Workflows".
4.1.2. Managing Dashboards
You can set up additional dashboards for customized views of the Admin UI, and you can embed external dashboards such as Kibana or Grafana, or other monitoring boards.
To create a new dashboard, select Dashboards > New Dashboard. Enter a dashboard name and select whether this dashboard should be the default board that is displayed when you load the Admin UI.
For a customized view of the Admin UI, select Widgets as the Dashboard Type, then select Create Dashboard and add the widgets that you want exposed in that view.
You can also customize the view by starting with an existing dashboard. In the upper-right corner of the UI, next to the Add Widget button, click the vertical ellipses () then select Rename or Duplicate.
To embed an external dashboard, select Embedded URL as the Dashboard Type, then enter the URL of the dashboard that you want to embed and select Create Dashboard.
To add a widget to a dashboard, click Add Widget and select the widget type. Widgets are grouped in logical categories, so scroll down to the category that fits the widget you want to add.
To modify the position of a widget in a dashboard, click and drag the move icon for the widget ().
If you add a new Quick Start widget, select the vertical ellipsis () icon in the upper right corner of the widget, and click Settings.
You can configure an Admin UI sub-widget to embed in the Quick Start widget.
If you are linking to a specific page in the Admin UI, the destination URL can be the part of the address after the main page for the Admin UI, such as
https://localhost:8443/<someURI>
For example, to create a quick start link to the Audit configuration tab, at
https://localhost:8443/admin/#settings/audit/
, enter#settings/audit
in the destination URL text box.
IDM writes the changes you make to the
ui-dashboard.json
file for your project.
For example, if you add two widgets (Last Reconciliation and System Health)
to a new dashboard named Test, you'll see the following excerpt in your
ui-dashboard.json
file:
{ "name" : "test", "isDefault" : false, "widgets" : [ { "type" : "lastRecon", "size" : "large", "barchart" : "false" }, { "type" : "systemHealthFull", "size" : "large" } ], "embeddedDashboard" : false }
For more information on each property, see the following table:
ui-dashboard.json
Property | Options | Description |
---|---|---|
name | User entry | Dashboard name |
isDefault | true or false | Default dashboard; can set one default |
widgets | Different options for type | Code blocks that define a widget |
type | lifeCycleMemoryHeap , lifeCycleMemoryNonHeap ,
systemHealthFull , cpuUsage ,
lastRecon , resourceList ,
quickStart , frame ,
userRelationship
| Widget name |
size | x-small , small ,
medium , or large | Width of widget, based on a 12-column grid system, where x-small=4, small=6, medium=8, and large=12; for more information, see Bootstrap CSS |
height | Height, in units such as cm , mm ,
px , and in | Height; applies only to Embed Web Page widget |
frameUrl | URL | Web page to embed; applies only to Embed Web Page widget |
title | User entry | Label shown in the UI; applies only to Embed Web Page widget |
barchart | true or false | Reconciliation bar chart; applies only to Last Reconciliation widget |
When complete, you can select the name of the new dashboard under the Dashboards menu or from the Manage Dashboards panel.
You can modify the options for each dashboard and widget. Select the vertical ellipsis in the upper right corner of the object, and make desired choices from the pop-up menu.
The following tables display an alphabetical list of the available widgets, by category:
Name | Description |
---|---|
Audit Events | Graphical display of audit events; also see "Viewing Audit Events in the Admin UI". |
Count Widget | A reporting widget that provides an instant display of the number of specific objects, for example active managed users, enabled social providers, and so on. For more information, see "Reporting, Monitoring, and Notifications". |
Dropwizard Table With Graph | Does not appear in the list of widgets unless metrics are active, per "Metrics and Monitoring". |
Graph Widget | Provides a graphical view of a specific managed resource, for example managed users, based on some metric. |
Last Reconciliation | Shows statistics from the most recent reconciliation, shown in System Monitoring dashboard; also see "Obtaining the Details of a Reconciliation" |
New Registrations | The number of users that have self-registered that week. To display data using this widget, user self-registration must be enabled (see "User Self-Registration"). |
Password Resets | The number of password resets that week. To display data using this widget, password reset must be enabled (see "User Password Reset"). |
Resources | Connectors, mappings, managed objects; shown in Administration dashboard |
Sign-Ins | The number of managed users that have signed in to the service that week. |
Name | Description |
---|---|
Daily Social Logins | Graphical display of logins via social identity providers; for related information see "Configuring Social Identity Providers" |
Social Registration (year) | Graphical display of registrations over the past year; for related information, see "Configuring Social Identity Providers" |
Name | Description |
---|---|
Cluster Node Status | Lists the instances in a cluster, with their status. For more information, see "Managing Nodes Through the Admin UI". |
CPU Usage | Also part of System Health widget |
Memory Usage (JVM Heap) | Graphs available JVM Heap memory (ref "Memory Health Check" |
Memory Usage (JVM NonHeap) | Graphs available JVM Non-Heap memory (ref "Memory Health Check" |
System Health | Shown in System Monitoring dashboard; includes CPU Usage, Memory Usage (JVM Heap), and Memory Usage (JVM NonHeap) |
Name | Description |
---|---|
Embed Web Page | Supports embedding of external content; for more information, see Embed Web Page Widget Requirements |
Identity Relationships | Graphical display of relationships between identities; also see "Viewing Relationships in Graph Form" |
Managed Objects Relationship Diagram | Graphical diagram with connections between managed object properties; also see "Viewing the Relationship Configuration in the UI" |
Quick Start | Links to common tasks; shown in Administration dashboard |
Embed Web Page Widget Requirements
To use the Embed Web Page applet, you'll need a web site that supports
appropriate x-frame-options
. For example, Google has a
Maps Embed API for that purpose.
4.2. Managing Accounts
Only administrative users (with the role openidm-admin
)
can add, modify, and delete accounts from the Admin UI. Regular users
can modify certain aspects of their own accounts from the End User UI.
4.2.1. Account Configuration
In the Admin UI, you can manage most details associated with an account. Create a user if needed, and then select Manage > User > Username. In the screen that appears, you can configure the following elements of a user account:
- Details
The Details tab includes basic identifying data for each user, based on attributes configured in your project's
managed.json
file.- Password
As an administrator, you can create new passwords for users in the managed user repository.
- Provisioning Roles
Used to specify how objects are provisioned to an external system. For more information, see "Working With Managed Roles".
- Authorization Roles
Used to specify the authorization rights of a managed user within IDM. For more information, see "Working With Managed Roles".
- Direct Reports
Users who are listed as managers of others have graphical entries linked to those users under the Direct Reports tab.
- Linked Systems
Used to display account information reconciled from external systems.
4.2.2. Procedures for Managing Accounts
With the following procedures, you can use the Admin UI to add, update, and delete accounts for managed objects such as users. To make these changes using REST, see "Working with Managed Users".
The managed object does not have to be a user. It can be a role, a group, or even a physical item such as an IoT device. The basic process for adding, modifying, deactivating, and deleting other objects is the same as it is with accounts. However, the details may vary; for example, many IoT devices do not have telephone numbers.
Log in to the Admin UI at
https://localhost:8443/admin
.Click Manage > User.
Click New User.
Complete the fields on the New User page.
By default, the New User page displays only the
password
and the fields that are configured asrequired
in the schema, as shown in this excerpt frommanaged.json
"required" : [ "userName", "givenName", "sn", "mail" ]
To display additional properties on the New User page, add the desired property to this list of required attributes.
The fields on this page are subject to policy validation, as described in "Using Policies to Validate Data". So, for example, the email address must be a valid email address, and the password must comply with the configured password policy.
In a similar way, you can create accounts for other managed objects.
You can review new managed object settings in the managed.json
file of your project-dir/conf
directory.
In the following procedures, you learn how:
Log in to the Admin UI at
https://localhost:8443/admin
as an administrative user.Click Manage > User.
Click the Username of the user that you want to update.
On the profile page for the user, modify the fields you want to change and click Update.
The user account is updated in the repository.
Log in to the Admin UI at
https://localhost:8443/admin
as an administrative user.Click Manage > User.
Select the checkbox next to the desired Username.
Click the Delete Selected button.
Click OK to confirm the deletion.
The user is deleted from the internal repository.
The Admin UI displays the details of the account in the repository (managed/user). When a mapping has been configured between the repository and one or more external resources, you can view details of that account in any external system to which it is linked. As this view is read-only, you cannot update a user record in a linked system from within the Self-Service UI.
By default, implicit synchronization is enabled for
mappings from the managed/user
repository to any external resource. This means that
when you update a managed object, any mappings defined in the
sync.json
file that have the managed object as the
source are automatically executed to update the target system. You can see
these changes in the Linked Systems section of a user's profile.
To view a user's linked accounts:
Log in to the Admin UI at
https://localhost:8443/admin
.Click Manage User > Username > Linked Systems.
The Linked Systems panel indicates the external mapped resource or resources.
Select the resource in which you want to view the account, from the Linked Resource list.
The user record in the linked resource is displayed.
4.3. Customizing the Admin UI
You can customize the Admin UI for your specific deployment. When you install
IDM, you will find the default Admin UI configuration files in
the following directory: openidm/ui/admin/default
.
In most cases, we recommend that you copy this directory to
openidm/ui/admin/extension
with commands such as:
$ cd /path/to/openidm/ui/admin $ cp -r default/. extension
You can then set up custom files in the extension/
subdirectory.
The Admin UI templates in the
openidm/ui/admin/default/templates
directory might help
you get started.
If you want to customize workflows in the UI, see "Managing User Access to Workflows".
4.3.1. Customizing the Admin UI, by Functionality
You may want to customize parts of the Admin UI. You've set up an
openidm/ui/admin/extension
directory
as described in "Customizing the Admin UI". In that directory, you
can find a series of subdirectories. The following table is intended to help
you search for the right file(s) to customize:
Subdirectory | Description |
---|---|
config | Top-level configuration directory of JavaScript files. Customizable
subdirectories include errorhandlers/ with HTTP
error messages and messages/ with info and error
messages. For actual messages, see the
translation.json file in the
locales/en/ subdirectory. |
css/ and libs/ | If you use a different bootstrap theme, you can replace the files in this and related subdirectories. For more information, see "UI Themes and Bootstrap". |
fonts/ | The font files in this directory are based on the Font Awesome CSS toolkit described in "Changing the UI Theme". |
images/ and img/ | IDM uses the image files in these directories, which you can choose to replace with your own. |
locales/ |
Includes the associated translation.json file, by
default in the en/ subdirectory.
|
org/ | Source files for the End User UI |
partials/ | Includes partial components of HTML pages in the End User UI, for assignments, authentication, connectors, dashboards, email, basic forms, login buttons, etc. |
templates/ |
The files in the templates/ subdirectory are in
actual use. For an example of how you can customize such files in the
Admin UI, see "Customizing the End User UI".
|
To see an example of how this works, review "Customizing the End User UI". It includes examples of how you can customize parts of the End User UI. You can use the same technique to customize parts of the Admin UI.
Tip
The above table is not a complete list. To see a visual representation of customizable Admin UI files, from the Linux command line, run the following commands:
$ cd /path/to/openidm/ui/admin/extension $ tree
4.4. Changing the UI Theme
You can customize the theme of the user interface. The default UI uses the Bootstrap framework and the Font Awesome CSS toolkit. You can download and customize the UI with the Bootstrap themes of your choice.
Note
If you use Brand Icons from the Font Awesome CSS Toolkit, be aware of the following statement:
All brand icons are trademarks of their respective owners. The use of these trademarks does not indicate endorsement of the trademark holder by ForgeRock, nor vice versa.
4.4.1. UI Themes and Bootstrap
You can configure a few features of the UI in the
ui-themeconfig.json
file in your project's
conf/
subdirectory. However, to change most
theme-related features of the UI, you must copy target files to the
appropriate extension
subdirectory, and then modify
them as discussed in "Customizing the Admin UI".
By default the UI reads the stylesheets and images from the respective
openidm/ui/function/default
directories. Do not modify the files in this directory. Your changes may be
overwritten the next time you update or even patch your system.
The default Admin UI configuration files are located in openidm/ui/admin/default
.
To customize the UI, copy this directory to openidm/ui/admin/extension
:
You may also need to update the "stylesheets"
listing in
the ui-themeconfig.json
file for your project, in the
project-dir/conf
directory.
"stylesheets" : [ "css/bootstrap-3.4.1-custom.css", "css/structure.css", "css/theme.css" ],
You can find these stylesheets
in the
/css
subdirectory.
bootstrap-3.4.1-custom.css
: Includes custom settings that you can get from various Bootstrap configuration sites, such as the Bootstrap Customize and Download website.You may find the ForgeRock version of this in the
config.json
file in theui/admin/default/css/common/structure/
directory.structure.css
: Supports configuration of structural elements of the UI.theme.css
: Includes customizable options for UI themes such as colors, buttons, and navigation bars.
If you want to set up custom versions of these files, copy them to the
extension/css
subdirectories.
4.4.2. Changing the Default Logo
The default UI logo is in openidm/ui/admin/default/images
. To change the
logo, place your custom image in the openidm/ui/admin/extension/images
directory. You should see the changes after refreshing your browser.
To specify a different file name, or to control the size, and other properties of the logo image
file, adjust the logo
property in the UI theme configuration file for your
project (conf/ui-themeconfig.json)
.
The following change to the UI theme configuration file points to an image file named
example-logo.png
, in the openidm/ui/admin/extension/images
directory:
... "loginLogo" : { "src" : "images/example-logo.png", "title" : "Example.com", "alt" : "Example.com", "height" : "104px", "width" : "210px" }, ...
Refresh your browser window for the new logo to appear.
You can configure a few features of the UI in the ui-themeconfig.json
file
in your project's conf
directory. However, to change most theme-related
features of the UI, you must copy target files to the appropriate extension
subdirectory, and then modify them as discussed in "Customizing the Admin UI".
By default the UI reads the stylesheets and images from the
openidm/ui/admin/default
directory. Do not modify the files in this
directory. Your changes may be overwritten the next time you update or even patch your system.
To customize your UI, first set up matching subdirectories in
(openidm/ui/admin/extension
). For example,
openidm/ui/admin/extension/libs
and openidm/ui/admin/extension/css
.
You might also need to update the "stylesheets"
listing in the
ui-themeconfig.json
file for your project, in the
project-dir/conf
directory.
"stylesheets" : [ "css/bootstrap-3.4.1-custom.css", "css/structure.css", "css/theme.css" ],
The default stylesheets have the following function:
bootstrap-3.4.1-custom.css
: Includes custom settings that you can get from various Bootstrap configuration sites, such as the Bootstrap Customize and Download site. This site lets you upload aconfig.json
file that makes it easier to create a customized Bootstrap file. The ForgeRock version of this file is inui/admin/default/css/common/structure/
. You can use this file as a starting point for your customization.structure.css
: For configuring structural elements of the UI.theme.css
: Includes customizable options for UI themes such as colors, buttons, and navigation bars.
To set up custom versions of these files, copy them to the extension/css
subdirectories.
4.4.4. Custom Response Headers
You can specify custom response headers for your UI by using the
responseHeaders
property in UI context configuration
files such as conf/ui.context-selfservice.json
. For
example, the X-Frame-Options
header is a security
measure used to prevent a web page from being embedded within the frame of
another page. For more information about response headers, see
the MDN page on HTTP Headers.
Since the responseHeaders
property is specified in the
configuration file for each UI context, you can set different custom headers
depending on the needs of that part of IDM. For example, you
may want different security headers included for the Admin and End User UIs.
4.5. Resetting User Passwords
When working with end users, administrators frequently have to reset their passwords. You can do so directly, through the Admin UI. Alternatively, you can configure an external system for that purpose, or set up password reset, as described in "User Password Reset".
4.5.1. Changing a User Password Through the Admin UI
From the Admin UI, you can change the passwords of accounts in the internal Managed User data store; to do so, take the following steps in the Admin UI:
Select Manage > User. Choose a specific user from the list that appears.
Select the Password tab for that user; you should be able to change that user's password there.
4.5.2. Using an External System for Password Reset
By default, the Password Reset mechanism is handled within IDM. You can reroute Password Reset in the event that a user has forgotten their password, by specifying an external URL to which Password Reset requests are sent. Note that this URL applies to the Password Reset link on the login page only, not to the security data change facility that is available after a user has logged in.
To set an external URL to handle Password Reset, set the
passwordResetLink
parameter in the UI configuration file
(conf/ui-configuration.json
) file. The following example
sets the passwordResetLink
to
https://accounts.example.com/account/reset-password
:
passwordResetLink: "https://accounts.example.com/reset-password"
The passwordResetLink
parameter takes either an empty
string as a value (which indicates that no external link is used) or a full
URL to the external system that handles Password Reset requests.
Note
External Password Reset and security questions for internal Password Reset
are mutually exclusive. Therefore, if you set a value for the
passwordResetLink
parameter, users will not be prompted
with any security questions, regardless of the setting of the
securityQuestions
parameter.
4.6. Providing a Logout URL to External Applications
By default, a UI session is invalidated when a user clicks on the Log out link. In certain situations your external applications might require a distinct logout URL to which users can be routed, to terminate their UI session.
The logout URL is #logout
, appended to the UI URL, for
example, https://localhost:8443/#logout/
.
The logout URL effectively performs the same action as clicking on the Log out link of the UI.
4.7. Changing the UI Path
By default, the End User UI is registered at the root context and is
accessible at the URL https://localhost:8443
. To specify
a different URL, edit the
project-dir/conf/ui.context-selfservice.json
file, setting the urlContextRoot
property to the new URL.
For example, to change the URL of the End User UI to
https://localhost:8443/exampleui
, edit
the file as follows:
"urlContextRoot" : "/exampleui",
Alternatively, to change the End User UI URL in the Admin UI, follow these steps:
Log in to the Admin UI.
Select Configure > System Preferences, and select the Self-Service UI tab.
Specify the new context route in the Relative URL field.
4.8. API Explorer
IDM includes an API Explorer, an implementation of the OpenAPI Initiative Specification, also known popularly as Swagger.
To access the API Explorer, log into the Admin UI, select the question mark in the upper right corner, and choose API Explorer from the drop-down menu.
Note
If the API Explorer does not appear, you may need to enable it in your
resolver/boot.properties
file, specifically with the
openidm.apidescriptor.enabled
property. For more
information see, "Disabling the API Explorer".
The API Explorer covers most of the endpoints provided with a default IDM installation.
Each endpoint lists supported HTTP methods such as POST and GET. When custom
actions are available, the API Explorer lists them as
HTTP Method
/path/to/endpoint?_action=something
.
To see how this works, navigate to the User
endpoint, select List Operations, and choose the GET option associated
with the /managed/user#_query_id_query-all
endpoint.
In this case, the defaults are set, and all you need to do is select
the Try it out!
button. The output you see includes:
The REST call, in the form of the curl command.
The request URL, which specifies the endpoint and associated parameters.
The response body, which contains the data that you requested.
The HTTP response code; if everything works, this should be
200
.Response headers.
Tip
If you see a 401
Access Denied
code
in the response body, your session may have timed out, and you'll have to
log into the Admin UI again.
For details on common ForgeRock REST parameters, see "About ForgeRock Common REST".
You'll see examples of REST calls throughout this documentation set. You can try these calls with the API Explorer.
You can also generate an OpenAPI-compliant descriptor of the REST API to
provide API reference documentation specific to your deployment. The following
command saves the API descriptor of the managed/user endpoint to a file named
my-openidm-api.json
:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ --output "my-openidm-api.json" \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_api"
For information about publishing reference documentation using the API descriptor, see "To Publish OpenAPI Documentation".
4.9. Disabling the UI
The UI is packaged as a separate bundle that can be disabled in the
configuration before server startup. To disable the registration of the UI
servlet, edit the
project-dir/conf/ui.context-selfservice.json
file, setting the enabled
property to false:
"enabled" : false,
Chapter 5. Configuring User Self-Service
ForgeRock Identity Management (IDM) allows you to configure a number of features of user self-service, including user self-registration, password reset, username retrieval, custom email notifications, Privacy & Consent, progressive profile completion, Terms & Conditions, and more, as described in the following sections:
Each of these sections are designed to help you as an IDM deployer, customize the End User UI. To that end, these sections discuss:
Required and supplementary configuration files, along with available functionality for each file.
REST endpoints, sometimes including REST calls to identify and change the configuration of each End User UI function.
When appropriate, this chapter includes the steps that you'd take to verify functionality from an end user point of view.
Note
Some of the options described in this chapter can be used to help support compliance with the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR).
5.1. User Self-Registration
IDM supports user self-registration. When enabled, users can log into the IDM End User UI, and create their own accounts on your system, with customizable criteria. Once enabled, administrators no longer need to create user accounts manually.
In the following sections, you'll examine:
5.1.1. Basic Setup: User Self-Registration Configuration Files
To set up basic user self-registration, you'll need at least the following configuration files:
selfservice-registration.json
You can find a template version of this file in the following directory:
openidm/samples/example-configurations/self-service
.ui-configuration.json
You can find this file in the default IDM project configuration directory,
openidm/conf
.
Note
Depending on how you configure User Self-Registration, you may need to set up additional configuration files, as discussed in "Configuring the User Self-Registration Form".
To enable self-service registration in the UI, enable the following
boolean in ui-configuration.json
:
"selfRegistration" : true,
You can include several features with user self-registration, as shown in
the following excerpts of the selfservice-registration.json
file:
The
allInOneRegistration
property determines whether IDM collects all user registration information in one or multiple pages. By default, it's set to true:"allInOneRegistration" : true,
The
idmUserDetails
code block includes the IDM property for email addresses (mail
), whether or not registration with social identity providers is enabled, along with data required from new users, as described in "Configuring the User Self-Registration Form".The
registrationPreferences
code block includes preferences as defined in themanaged.json
file. For more information, see "Configuring End User Preferences".If you've set up Terms & Conditions, users who self-register will have to accept them, based on criteria you create, as discussed in "Adding Terms & Conditions". If you've included Terms & Conditions with user self-registration, you'll see the following code block:
{ "name" : "termsAndConditions" },
If you've configured Privacy & Consent, you'll see a code block with the
consent
name. The following code block includes template Privacy & Consent terms in English (en
) and French (fr
):{ "name" : "consent", "consentTranslations" : { "en" : "Please consent to sharing your data with whomever we like.", "fr" : "Veuillez accepter le partage de vos données avec les services de notre choix." } },
Note
Substitute Privacy & Consent content that meet the requirements of your legal authorities.
New users will have to manually accept these conditions before they complete the self-registration process. For more information, see "Configuring Privacy & Consent".
If you've activated Google reCAPTCHA for user self-service registration, you'll see the following code block:
{ "name" : "captcha", "recaptchaSiteKey" : "<siteKey>", "recaptchaSecretKey" : "<secretKey>", "recaptchaUri" : "https://www.google.com/recaptcha/api/siteverify" },
As suggested by the code, you'd substitute the actual
siteKey
andsecretKey
assigned by Google for your domain. For more information, see "Configuring Google reCAPTCHA".If you've included email verification, be sure to configure an outgoing email server per "Configuring Outbound Email". For a discussion of the code block to add to
selfservice-registration.json
, see "Configuring Emails for Self-Service Registration".If you've configured security questions, users who self-register will have to create them during registration, and as needed, answer them during the password reset process. If so configured, users who've been reconciled from external data stores will also be prompted to add security questions. The relevant code block is shown here, which includes security questions as a stage in the user self-registration process. For related configuration options, see "Configuring Security Questions".
{ "name" : "kbaSecurityAnswerDefinitionStage", "kbaConfig" : null },
For audit activity data related to user self-registration, see "Querying the Activity Audit Log".
5.1.2. Managing User Self-Registration Over REST
You can review the current user self-registration configuration over REST:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/selfservice/registration"
Unless you've disabled file writes per
"Disabling Automatic Configuration Updates", the output will match the
contents of your project's selfservice-registration.json
file.
If needed, you can update this configuration by including the desired contents of the file:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request PUT \ --data '{ <Insert file contents here> }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/selfservice/registration"
5.1.3. Configuring the User Self-Registration Form
During user self-registration, IDM lists the attributes that
users see in the user registration form, as defined in the
selfservice-registration.json
file. You can modify
the properties shown to users in the
registrationProperties
code block:
"registrationProperties" : [ "userName", "givenName", "sn", "mail" ],
If you add a managed user property to the
registrationProperties
code block, IDM
includes it in the user self-registration screen.
Alternatively, you can add a managed user property in the Admin UI. Select Configure > User Registration, and add a property under the Registration Form tab. This action also adds a managed user property to the noted code block.
In either case, you can change the order of properties; IDM shows the order you configure in the user self-registration screen.
You can also set up user self-registration via configuration files, as described in the following table:
File Name | Description |
---|---|
external.email.json | If you want to enable email validation, you'll need to configure this file, as discussed in "Configuring Outbound Email". |
managed.json | You can customize user self-registration based on entries in
this file. To change the labels seen by end users, change the
associated title . |
policy.json | For more information, see "Adding Custom Policies for Self-Registration and Password Reset". |
selfservice.kba.json | See "Configuring Security Questions". |
selfservice-registration.json | See "User Self-Registration". |
ui-configuration.json | See "User Self-Registration". |
consent.json | Specifies whether Privacy & Consent is enabled; however, you'll need to set up additional configuration files, as described in "Configuring Privacy & Consent". |
5.1.4. User Self-Registration: Social
Before you can activate Social Registration under the User Registration, Social tab, you'll need to configure registration with social identity providers. To review the process, see "Configuring Social Identity Providers".
When you've configured one or more social identity providers, you can activate the Social Registration option. This action adds:
The following setting to the
selfservice-registration.json
configuration file:"socialRegistrationEnabled" : true,
The following configuration file:
selfservice-socialUserClaim.json
, discussed in "Account Claiming: Links Between Accounts and Social Identity Providers".
Under the Social tab, you'll see a list of property mappings as defined
in the selfservice.propertymap.json
file.
One or more source
properties in this file takes
information from a social identity provider. When a user registers with
their social identity account, that information is reconciled to the
matching target
property for IDM. For
example, the email
property from a social identity
provider is normally reconciled to the IDM managed user
mail
property.
You can also find property mappings in the sync.json
for your project. For details of these synchronization mappings, see
"Mapping Source Objects to Target Objects".
5.1.5. Configuring User Self-Registration From the Admin UI
To configure user self-registration from the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration and select Enable User Registration in the page that appears.
You'll see a pop-up window that specifies User Registration Settings, including the following:
Identity Resource, typically
managed/user
Identity Email Field, typically
mail
oremail
Success URL for the End User UI; users who successfully log in are redirected to that URL. By default, the success URL is
http://localhost:8080/#dashboard/
.Preferences, which set up default marketing preferences for new users. New users can change these preferences during registration, or from the End User UI.
Advanced Options, Snapshot Token, typically a JSON Web Token (JWT)
Advanced Options, Token Lifetime, with a default of 300 seconds
You can also add these settings to the following configuration file:
selfservice-registration.json
. When you modify
these settings in the Admin UI, IDM creates the file for you.
Once active, you'll see three tabs under User Registration in the Admin UI:
Registration Form, as described in "Configuring the User Self-Registration Form"
Social, as described in "User Self-Registration: Social"
Options, as described in "Common Steps: User Self-Registration, Password Reset, Forgotten Username"
5.1.6. Verifying Self-Registration in the End User UI
After configuring user self-registration, test the result from the end
user's point of view. Navigate to the End User UI at
http://localhost:8080
, and select
Create an account
. You'll see a single-page Sign Up
screen with configured text boxes and required security questions.
If included in your configuration files, you'll also see marketing
preferences such as "Send me news and updates".
If you've configured Terms & Conditions, you'll see a link to those terms:
By clicking "Sign Up" you agree to our Terms & Conditions.
Tip
To modify the Terms & Conditions, use the Admin UI or edit the
selfservice.terms.json
file, as described in
"Adding Terms & Conditions".
If you've activated the reCAPTCHA option as described in
"Configuring Google reCAPTCHA", you'll need to satisfy the requirements
before you can select the SAVE
button to create your
new user account.
If you've activated the Privacy & Consent option, you'll see a
Privacy Notice pop-up. By default, users who try to register aren't allowed
to select the Give Consent
button, until they actually
consent to sharing their information.
Tip
To activate and configure the wording for Privacy & Consent, use the
Admin UI or edit the selfservice-registration.json
file, as described in "Configuring Privacy & Consent".
Once the new user is created, you should be able to verify the account in the following ways:
Log into the End User UI as the new user.
Find the
userName
of the new user over REST; one method is shown in "Working with Managed Users".Log into the Admin UI, and select Manage > User. You should see that new user in the list.
5.1.7. Configuring Multiple User Self-Registration Flows
You can set up multiple self-registration flows, with features limited only by the capabilities listed in "User Self-Registration".
Note
Multiple self-registration flows, and customization of the End User UI beyond what is described in this document (and the noted public Git repository), are not supported.
For additional information on customizing the End User UI, see the following ForgeRock Git repository: ForgeRock/end-user-ui: Identity Management (End User).
For example, you may want to set up different portals for regular employees and contractors. You'd configure each portal with different self-registration flows, managed by the same IDM backend. Each portal would use the appropriate registration API.
To prepare for this section, you'll need a
selfservice-registration.json
file. You can find a copy
in the following directory:
/path/to/openidm/samples/example-configurations/self-service
.
To avoid errors when using this file, you should either:
Copy the following files from the same directory:
selfservice.terms.json
selfservice-termsAndConditions.json
Delete the
termsAndConditions
code block from the respectiveselfservice-registration*.json
files.
User self-registration is normally coded in the
selfservice-registration.json
file. In preparation,
copy this file to the selfservice-registration*.json
to the names shown in the following list:
Employee Portal
Configuration file:
selfservice-registrationEmployee.json
URL:
https://localhost:8443/openidm/selfservice/registrationEmployee
verificationLink
:https://localhost:8443/#/registrationEmployee
Contractor Portal
Configuration file:
selfservice-registrationContractor.json
URL:
https://localhost:8443/openidm/selfservice/registrationContractor
verificationLink
:https://localhost:8443/#/registrationContractor
Edit the configuration file for each portal.
Modify the
verificationLink
URL associated with each portal as described.Edit the
access.js
file. You can find it in thescript/
subdirectory for your project.Add endpoint information for each new self-service registration file to the
access.js
, after theselfservice/registration
code block. For example, the following code excerpt would apply to theregistrationEmployee
andregistrationContractor
endpoints.{ "pattern" : "selfservice/registrationEmployee", "roles" : "*", "methods" : "read,action", "actions" : "submitRequirements" }, { "pattern" : "selfservice/registrationContractor", "roles" : "*", "methods" : "read,action", "actions" : "submitRequirements" },
Modify the functionality of each selfservice-registration*.json file as desired. For guidance, see the sections noted in the following table:
Configuringselfservice-registration*.json
Files for Different PortalsFeature Code Block Link Social Registration "socialRegistrationEnabled" : true,
"User Self-Registration: Social" Properties requested during self-registration "registrationProperties" : [ "userName", "givenName", "sn", "mail" ],
"Configuring the User Self-Registration Form" Terms & Conditions { "name" : "termsAndConditions" }
"Adding Terms & Conditions" Privacy & Consent { "name" : "consent", "consentTranslations" : { "en" : "substitute appropriate Privacy & Consent wording", "fr" : "substitute appropriate Privacy & Consent wording, in French" } },
reCAPTCHA { "name" : "captcha", "recaptchaSiteKey" : "<siteKey>", "recaptchaSecretKey" : "<secretKey>", "recaptchaUri" : "https://www.google.com/recaptcha/api/siteverify" }
"Configuring Google reCAPTCHA" Email Validation "Configuring Emails for Self-Service Registration" Security Questions { "name" : "kbaSecurityAnswerDefinitionStage", "kbaConfig" : null },
"Configuring Security Questions" If you leave out the code blocks associated with the feature, you won't see that feature in the self-service registration flow. In that way, you can set up different self-service registration flows for the Employee and Contractor portals.
Once you've configured both portals, you can make REST calls to both URLs:
https://localhost:8443/openidm/selfservice/registrationEmployee |
https://localhost:8443/openidm/selfservice/registrationContractor |
For more advice on how you can create custom registration flows, see the following public ForgeRock Git repository: Identity Management (End User) - UI.
Note
The changes described in this section require changes to the End User UI
source code as described in the noted public Git repository. Pay
particular attention to the instructions associated with the
Registration.vue
file.
5.2. User Password Reset
IDM supports self-service user password reset. When enabled, users who forget their passwords can log into the IDM End User UI, and can verify their identities with options such as email validation and security questions.
In the following sections, you'll examine:
IDM includes the ability to set up random passwords, as described in "Generating Random Passwords".
5.2.1. Basic Setup: User Password Reset Configuration Files
To set up basic user password reset features, you'll need at least the following configuration files:
selfservice-reset.json
You can find a template version of this file in the following directory:
openidm/samples/example-configurations/self-service
.ui-configuration.json
You can find this file in the default IDM project configuration directory,
openidm/conf
.
To set up self-service user password reset registration, enable the
following boolean in ui-configuration.json
:
"passwordReset" : true,
You can include several features with user password reset, as shown in
the following excerpts of the selfservice-reset.json
file:
If you've activated Google reCAPTCHA for user self-service registration, you'll see the following code block:
{ "name" : "captcha", "recaptchaSiteKey" : "<siteKey>", "recaptchaSecretKey" : "<secretKey>", "recaptchaUri" : "https://www.google.com/recaptcha/api/siteverify" },
As suggested by the code, you'd substitute the actual
siteKey
andsecretKey
assigned by Google for your domain. For more information, see "Configuring Google reCAPTCHA".For password reset, IDM needs to verify user identities. To ensure that password reset links are sent to the right user, include the following code block:
{ "name" : "userQuery", "validQueryFields" : [ "userName", "mail", "givenName", "sn" ], "identityIdField" : "_id", "identityEmailField" : "mail", "identityUsernameField" : "userName", "identityServiceUrl" : "managed/user" },
This code allows IDM to verify user identities by their username, email address, first name (
givenName
), or last name (sn
, short for surname).If you've included email verification, be sure to configure an outgoing email server per "Configuring Outbound Email". For a discussion of the code block to add to
selfservice-registration.json
, see "Configuring Emails for Password Reset".If you've configured security questions, users who self-register will have to create questions and answers during the self-registration process.
If the feature is enabled, users who've been reconciled from external data stores will also be prompted, once, upon their next login, to add security questions and answers. The relevant code block is shown here, which points IDM to other configuration files as discussed in links from this section.
{ "name" : "kbaSecurityAnswerDefinitionStage", "kbaConfig" : null },
5.2.2. Managing User Password Reset Over REST
You can review the current user password reset configuration over REST:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/selfservice/reset"
Unless you've disabled file writes per
"Disabling Automatic Configuration Updates", the output should match the
contents of your project's selfservice-reset.json
file.
If needed, you can update this configuration by including the desired contents of the file:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request PUT \ --data '{ <Insert file contents here> }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/selfservice/reset"
5.2.3. Configuring Password Reset From the Admin UI
To configure Password Reset from the Admin UI, select Configure >
Password Reset. When you select Enable Password Reset, you'll see a
Configure Password Reset Form
that allows you to
specify the:
Identity Resource, typically
managed/user
Advanced Options, Snapshot Token, typically a JSON Web Token (JWT)
Advanced Options, Token Lifetime, with a default of 300 seconds
You can also add these settings to the following configuration file:
selfservice-reset.json
. When you modify these
settings in the Admin UI, IDM creates the file for you.
5.2.4. Verifying Password Reset in the End User UI
After configuring password reset in "User Password Reset",
you can test the result from the end user's point of view. Navigate to the
End User UI at http://localhost:8080
, select the
Profile icon () > Account Security > Password >
Reset your password
.
You should see a Reset Your Password page with pre-configured queries. After providing an answer, IDM should send a password reset link to the email associated with the target user account.
5.3. Forgotten Username
You can set up IDM to allow users to recover forgotten usernames. You can require that users enter email addresses, or first and last names. Depending on your choices, IDM then will either display that username on the screen, and/or email such information to that user.
In the following sections, you'll examine:
5.3.1. Basic Setup: Forgotten Username Configuration Files
To set up basic forgotten username configuration, you'll need at least the following configuration files:
selfservice-username.json
You can find a template version of this file in the following directory:
openidm/samples/example-configurations/self-service
.ui-configuration.json
You can find this file in the default IDM project configuration directory,
openidm/conf
.
To set up forgotten username retrieval, enable the following boolean in
ui-configuration.json
:
"forgotUsername" : true,
You can include several features with forgotten username retrieval, as shown
in the following excerpts of the selfservice-reset.json
file:
If you've activated Google reCAPTCHA for forgotten username retrieval, you'll see the following code block:
{ "name" : "captcha", "recaptchaSiteKey" : "<siteKey>", "recaptchaSecretKey" : "<secretKey>", "recaptchaUri" : "https://www.google.com/recaptcha/api/siteverify" },
As suggested by the code, you'd substitute actual
siteKey
andsecretKey
assigned by Google for your domain. For more information, see "Configuring Google reCAPTCHA".For forgotten username retrieval, IDM needs to verify user identities. To ensure that usernames are sent to the right user, include the following code block:
{ "name" : "userQuery", "validQueryFields" : [ "mail", "givenName", "sn" ], "identityIdField" : "_id", "identityEmailField" : "mail", "identityUsernameField" : "userName", "identityServiceUrl" : "managed/user" },
This code allows IDM to verify user identities by their username, email address, first name (
givenName
), or last name (sn
, short for surname).If you've included email verification, you must also configure an outgoing email server per "Configuring Outbound Email". For a discussion of the code block to add to
selfservice-username.json
, see "Configuring Emails for Forgotten Username".The following code block, after confirming user identity, allows IDM to display the username:
{ "name" : "retrieveUsername" }
5.3.2. Managing Forgotten Username Retrieval Over REST
You can review the current forgotten username configuration over REST:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/selfservice/username"
Unless you've disabled file writes per
"Disabling Automatic Configuration Updates", the output will match the
contents of your project's selfservice-username.json
file.
If needed, you can update this configuration by including the desired contents of the file:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request PUT \ --data '{ <Insert file contents here> }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/selfservice/username"
5.3.3. Configuring Forgotten Username Retrieval From the Admin UI
To configure forgotten username retrieval from the Admin UI, select Configure > Forgotten Username. When you select Enable Forgotten Username Retrieval, you'll see a Configure Forgotten Username Form that allows you to specify the:
Identity Resource, typically
managed/user
Advanced Options, Snapshot Token, typically a JSON Web Token (JWT).
Advanced Options, Token Lifetime, with a default of 300 seconds
You can also add these settings to the following configuration file:
selfservice-username.json
. When you modify these
settings in the Admin UI, IDM creates the file for you.
5.3.4. Verifying Access to a Forgotten Username in the End User UI
After configuring forgotten username retrieval, you can test the result
from the end user's point of view. Navigate to the End User UI at
http://localhost:8080
, and select
Forgot Username?
.
You should see a Retrieve Your Username page with pre-configured queries. After providing an answer, IDM should either display your username in the local browser, or send that username to the associated email address.
5.4. Common Steps: User Self-Registration, Password Reset, Forgotten Username
For each of the titled Self-Service features, you can configure several
steps in the main configuration file for each feature:
selfservice-registration.json
,
selfservice-reset.json
, and
selfservice-username.json
. For more information, see
the following sections:
5.4.1. Configuring Google reCAPTCHA
Google reCAPTCHA helps prevent bots from registering users or resetting passwords on your system. For Google documentation on this feature, see Google reCAPTCHA. IDM works with Google reCAPTCHA v2.
To use Google reCAPTCHA, you will need a Google account and your domain
name (RFC 2606-compliant URLs such as localhost
and
example.com
are acceptable for test purposes). Google
then provides a Site key and a Secret key that you can include in the
self-service function configuration.
For example, you can set up reCAPTCHA by adding the following code
block to the configuration file for user self-registration
selfservice-registration.json
, password reset,
selfservice-reset.json
and forgotten username
selfservice-username.json
functionality.
{ "name" : "captcha", "recaptchaSiteKey" : "< Insert Site Key Here >", "recaptchaSecretKey" : "< Insert Secret Key Here >", "recaptchaUri" : "https://www.google.com/recaptcha/api/siteverify" },
You may also add the reCAPTCHA keys through the UI for each of these self-service features.
5.4.2. Configuring Self-Service Email Validation / Username
When a user requests a new account, a password reset, or a reminder of their username, you can configure IDM to confirm the request by sending an email message to that user.
Before you can configure email validation, you must first configure an outgoing email service. To do so, select Configure > Email Settings. For more information, read "Configuring Outbound Email".
To activate Email Validation, you'll need to include an appropriate code block, depending on whether you're setting up self-registration, password reset, or forgotten username functionality, in the corresponding configuration file.
Alternatively, in the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration or Password Reset or Forgotten Username. Enable the feature. Under the Options tab, enable the Email option.
To configure the email message that informs the user of the new account, see "Configuring Notification Emails".
The following sections include the code blocks that are added to each configuration file:
5.4.2.1. Configuring Emails for Self-Service Registration
To configure emails for self-service registration, you can add the
following code block to the
selfservice-registration.json
file:
{ "name" : "emailValidation", "identityEmailField" : "mail", "emailServiceUrl" : "external/email", "emailServiceParameters" : { "waitForCompletion" : false }, "from" : "info@example.com", "subject" : "Register new account", "mimeType" : "text/html", "subjectTranslations" : { "en" : "Register new account", "fr" : "Créer un nouveau compte" }, "messageTranslations" : { "en" : "<h3>This is your registration email.</h3><h4><a href=\"%link%\">Email verification link</a></h4>", "fr" : "<h3>Ceci est votre mail d'inscription.</h3><h4><a href=\"%link%\">Lien de vérification email</a></h4>" }, "verificationLinkToken" : "%link%", "verificationLink" : "https://localhost:8443/#/registration/" },
As suggested by the code block, it includes default registration email
messages in English (en
) and French
(fr
). The verificationLink
sent
with the email takes users to the IDM self-registration URL.
As noted in "Managing User Self-Registration Over REST", you can make
these changes over the following endpoint URI:
/openidm/config/selfservice/registration
If desired, you can also configure self-service registration emails through the Admin UI. Select Configure > User Registration. If needed, activate the Enable User Registration Option. Under the Options tab, in the Email Validation box, select the icon. The Configure Validation Email pop-up should appear.
When you use the Admin UI to customize self-registration emails, you
can review the changes in the
selfservice-registration.json
file.
5.4.2.2. Configuring Emails for Password Reset
To configure emails for password reset, you can add the
following code block to the selfservice-reset.json
file:
{ "name" : "emailValidation", "identityEmailField" : "mail", "emailServiceUrl" : "external/email", "emailServiceParameters" : { "waitForCompletion" : false }, "from" : "info@example.com", "subject" : "Reset password email", "mimeType" : "text/html", "subjectTranslations" : { "en" : "Reset your password", "fr" : "Réinitialisez votre mot de passe" }, "messageTranslations" : { "en" : "<h3>Click to reset your password</h3><h4><a href=\"%link%\">Password reset link</a></h4>", "fr" : "<h3>Cliquez pour réinitialiser votre mot de passe</h3><h4><a href=\"%link%\">Mot de passe lien de réinitialisation</a></h4>" }, "verificationLinkToken" : "%link%", "verificationLink" : "https://localhost:8443/#/passwordreset/" },
As suggested by the code block, it includes default password reset email
messages in English (en
) and French
(fr
). The verificationLink
sent
with the email takes users to the IDM password reset URL.
As noted in "Managing User Password Reset Over REST", you can make
these changes over the following endpoint URI:
/openidm/config/selfservice/reset
If desired, you can also configure self-service password reset emails through the Admin UI. Select Configure > Password Reset. If needed, activate the Enable Password Reset option, and in the Email Validation box, select the icon. The Configure Validation Email pop-up should appear.
When you use the Admin UI to customize password reset emails, you can
review the changes in the
selfservice-reset.json
file.
5.4.2.3. Configuring Emails for Forgotten Username
To configure emails for forgotten username functionality, you
can add the following code block to the
selfservice-username.json
file:
{ "name" : "emailUsername", "emailServiceUrl" : "external/email", "emailServiceParameters" : { "waitForCompletion" : false }, "from" : "info@example.com", "mimeType" : "text/html", "subjectTranslations" : { "en" : "Account Information - username" }, "messageTranslations" : { "en" : "<h3>Username is:</h3><br />%username%" }, "usernameToken" : "%username%" },
As suggested by the code block, it includes default email
messages in English (en
), with a
usernameToken
that includes the actual username in
the message.
As noted in "Managing Forgotten Username Retrieval Over REST", you can make
these changes over the following endpoint URI:
/openidm/config/selfservice/username
If desired, you can also configure forgotten username retrieval emails through the Admin UI. Select Configure > Forgotten Username. If needed, activate the Enable Forgotten Username Retrieval option, and in the Email Username box, select the icon. The Configure Email Username pop-up should appear.
When you use the Admin UI to customize forgotten username
retrieval emails, you can review the changes in the
selfservice-username.json
file.
5.4.3. Configuring Security Questions
IDM uses security questions to enable users to verify their
identities. Security questions are sometimes referred to as Knowledge-Based
Authentication (KBA). When an administrator has configured security
questions, self-service users can choose from the questions set in the
selfservice.kba.json
file, as described in
"Security Questions and Self-Registration".
You can prompt users to update their security questions. As these questions
may be subject to risks, you can set up IDM to prompt the user to
update and/or add security questions, courtesy of the
selfservice-kbaUpdate.json
file. For more information,
see "Prompting to Update Security Questions".
5.4.3.1. Security Questions and Self-Registration
The user is prompted to enter answers to pre-configured or custom security questions, during the self-registration process. These questions are used to help verify an identity when a user requests a password reset. These questions do not apply for users who need username retrieval.
The template version of the selfservice.kba.json
file
is straightforward; it includes minimumAnswersToDefine
,
which requires a user to define at least that many security questions and
answers, along with minimumAnswersToVerify
, which
requires a user to answer (in this case) at least one of those questions
when asking for a password reset.
{ "kbaPropertyName" : "kbaInfo", "minimumAnswersToDefine": 2, "minimumAnswersToVerify": 1, "questions" : { "1" : { "en" : "What's your favorite color?", "en_GB" : "What is your favourite colour?", "fr" : "Quelle est votre couleur préférée?" }, "2" : { "en" : "Who was your first employer?" } } }
To configure account lockout based on the security questions, add the
following lines to your selfservice.kba.json
file:
"numberOfAttemptsAllowed" : 2, "kbaAttemptsPropertyName" : "lockoutproperty"
With this configuration, users who make more than two mistakes in answering
security questions are prevented from using the password reset facility
until the kbaAttemptsPropertyName
field is removed or
the number is set to a value lower than the
numberOfAttemptsAllowed
. The number of mistakes is
recorded in whatever property you assign to
kbaAttemptsPropertyName
(lockoutproperty
in this example).
If you are using an explicit mapping for managed user objects, you must add
this lockoutproperty to your database schema
and to the objectToColumn
mapping
in your repository configuration file.
For example, the previous configuration would require the following
addition to your conf/repo.jdbc.json
file:
"explicitMapping" : { "managed/user": { "table" : "managed_user", "objectToColumn": { ... "lockoutproperty" : "lockoutproperty", ... }
You would also need to create a lockoutproperty
column in the openidm.managed_user
table, with datatype
VARCHAR
. For example:
mysql> show columns from managed_user; +----------------------+--------------+------+-----+---------+-------+ | Field | Type | Null | Key | Default | Extra | +----------------------+--------------+------+-----+---------+-------+ | objectid | varchar(38) | NO | PRI | NULL | | | rev | varchar(38) | NO | | NULL | | | username | varchar(255) | YES | UNI | NULL | | | password | varchar(511) | YES | | NULL | | | accountstatus | varchar(255) | YES | MUL | NULL | | | postalcode | varchar(255) | YES | | NULL | | | lockoutproperty | varchar(255) | YES | | NULL | | ...
Warning
Once you deploy these IDM self-service features, you should never remove or change existing security questions, as users may have included those questions during the user self-registration process.
You may change or add the questions of your choice, in JSON format. If you're configuring user self-registration, you can also edit these questions through the Admin UI. In fact, the Admin UI allows you to localize these questions in different languages.
In the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration. Enable User Registration, select Options > Security Questions and select the edit icon to add, edit, or delete these questions.
Any change you make to the security questions under User Registration also applies to Password Reset. To confirm, select Configure > Password Reset. Enable Password Reset, and edit the Security Questions. You'll see the same questions there.
In addition, individual users can configure their own questions and answers, in two ways:
During the user self-registration process
From the End User UI, in the user's Profile section (), under Account Security > Security Questions
Important
A managed user's security questions can only be changed through the
selfservice/userupdate
endpoint, or when the user is
created through selfservice/registration
and provides
their own questions. You cannot manipulate a user's kbaInfo
property directly through the managed/user
endpoint.
When the answers to security questions are hashed, they are converted to
lowercase. If you intend to pre-populate answers with a mapping, the
openidm.hash
function or the secureHash
mechanism, you must provide the string in lowercase to match the value of
the answer.
5.4.3.2. Prompting to Update Security Questions
IDM supports a requirement for users to update their security
questions, in the selfservice-kbaUpdate.json
file.
You can find this file in the following directory:
/path/to/openidm/samples/example-configurations/self-service
.
Alternatively, if you set up security questions from the Admin UI, you
can navigate to Configure > Security Questions > Update Form, and select
Enable Update. This action adds a selfservice-kbaUpdate.json
file to your project's conf/
subdirectory.
For more information on this configuration file, see "Conditional User Stage" in the Self-Service REST API Reference.
5.4.4. Adding Custom Policies for Self-Registration and Password Reset
IDM has specific policies for usernames and passwords, in
the policy.js
file in the
openidm/bin/defaults/script
directory. To enforce
these policies for user self-registration and password reset, add the
following objects to your conf/policy.json
file, under
resources
:
{ "resource" : "selfservice/registration", "calculatedProperties" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "source" : "require('selfServicePolicies').getRegistrationProperties()" } }, { "resource" : "selfservice/reset", "calculatedProperties" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "source" : "require('selfServicePolicies').getResetProperties()" } },
For more information on IDM policies, see "Using Policies to Validate Data".
5.5. Configuring Notification Emails
When you configure the outbound email service as described in "Configuring Outbound Email", IDM may use that service to notify users of significant events, primarily related to user self-service. For specifics, see the following table for related notification emails:
Situation | Configuration File | Details |
---|---|---|
When a user is successfully registered | emailTemplate-welcome.json | See "User Self-Registration Email Template" |
When a user asks for their forgotten username | selfservice-username.json | See "Configuring Emails for Forgotten Username" |
When a user registers using self-service and needs to verify their email address | selfservice-registration.json | See "Configuring Emails for Self-Service Registration" |
When a user asks for a password reset | selfservice-reset.json | See "Configuring Emails for Password Reset" |
Each email template can specify an email address to use in the From
field. If this field is left blank, IDM will default to the
address specified in Email Settings.
Note
Email templates utilize Handlebar expressions to reference object data dynamically. For example, to reference the userName
of an object:
{{object.userName}}
Note
Some email providers, such as Google, will override the From
address you specify in the templates, and instead use the address used to
authenticate with the SMTP server. The email address specified in the
template may still be present, but in an email header hidden from most users, such as
X-Google-Original-From
.
5.5.1. User Self-Registration Email Template
When a new user registers through the IDM self-registration
interface, and if you've configured email per
"Configuring Outbound Email", that user will get a welcome email as
configured in the emailTemplate-welcome.json
file:
{ "enabled" : true, "from" : "", "subject" : { "en" : "Your account has been created" }, "message" : { "en" : "<html><body><p>Welcome to OpenIDM. Your username is '{{object.userName}}'.</p></body></html>" }, "defaultLocale" : "en" }
You may want to make the following changes:
Add an email address to the
from
property, perhaps an email address for your organization's systems administrator.Set up appropriate locale(s).
Modify the subject line as needed.
Include a welcome
message
appropriate to your organization.
5.5.2. Managing Email Templates from the Admin UI
The Admin UI includes tools that can help you customize email messages related to two administrative tasks: creating users and resetting passwords.
To configure these messages from the Admin UI, select Configure > Email Settings > Templates, where you'll see the following option:
Welcome: To configure emails that notify a user of a newly created account, as defined in
emailTemplate-welcome.json
.Note
IDM sends the same welcome email to users created with a REST call. For an example of user creation over REST, see "Working with Managed Users".
5.6. Configuring Privacy & Consent
IDM supports Privacy & Consent for users who register via IDM directly or via a social identity provider. For more information on the registration process, see "User Self-Registration" and "Configuring Social Identity Providers".
As configured for IDM, if you set up Privacy & Consent, users have to accept sharing their data before they get registered accounts.
To set up Privacy & Consent, edit the following configuration files:
In
selfservice-registration.json
, you'll need to specify privacy notices in theconsentTranslations
code block:{ "name" : "consent", "consentTranslations" : { "en" : "<Substitute appropriate Privacy & Consent wording>", "fr" : "<Substitute appropriate Privacy & Consent wording, in French>" } },
You can also set this up on the following endpoint:
/openidm/config/selfservice/registration
In
consent.json
, make sure it'senabled
:{ "enabled" : true }
You can also set this up on the following endpoint:
/openidm/config/consent
In the
sync.json
file, for the required mapping, include:"consentRequired" : true,
You can also set this up on the following endpoint:
/openidm/config/sync
Alternatively, you can set up Privacy & Consent in the Admin UI by enabling the following:
In the Admin UI, select Configure > System Preferences. In the Privacy & Consent tab, activate the Enable toggle, and select Save.
Configure Privacy & Consent in the desired mapping. To review available mappings, select Configure > Mappings.
Note
IDM activates Privacy & Consent only for mappings from a Managed Object source. In other words, end users give their consent for transferring some or all of their data only to external systems, such as DS. Then, IDM includes a Privacy & Consent option in the End User UI for regular users.
Conversely, in a mapping to a Managed Object target, the IDM Admin UI seems to allow you to activate Privacy & Consent mappings. As users in your Managed Object store presumably have given their consent to share their information, IDM does not implement those changes in the End User UI.
Select Configure > User Registration. Select Enable User Registration if it isn't already enabled, and then enable Privacy & Consent.
To see how this works for a newly registered user, see "Verifying Self-Registration in the End User UI".
5.8. Customizing the End User UI
For information on customizing the IDM End User UI, see the following ForgeRock Git repository: ForgeRock/end-user-ui: Identity Management (End User).
5.9. Setting Up User-Managed Access (UMA), Trusted Devices, and Privacy
In the following sections, you'll refer to AM documentation to set up User-Managed Access (UMA), Trusted Devices, and Privacy for your end users. These options require IDM working with AM. For a working implementation of both products, see "Integrating IDM With the ForgeRock Identity Platform" in the Samples Guide.
Tip
If you want to configure both UMA and Trusted Devices in AM, configure these features in the following order, as described in the sections that follow:
Set up UMA
Use AM to configure UMA-based resources
Configure Trusted Devices
If you have to reconfigure UMA at a later date, you'll have to first disable Trusted Devices. You can enable Trusted Devices, once again, afterwards.
5.9.1. User Managed Access in IDM
When you integrate IDM with ForgeRock Access Management (AM) you can take advantage of AM's abilities to work with User-Managed Access (UMA) workflows. AM and IDM use a common installation of ForgeRock Directory Services (DS) to store user data.
For instructions on how to set up this integration, see "Integrating IDM With the ForgeRock Identity Platform" in the Samples Guide. Be sure to set up DS as the AM user data store. Once you've set up integration through that sample, you can configure AM to work with UMA. For more information, see the AM User-Managed Access (UMA) Guide. From that guide, you need to know how to:
Set up AM as an authorization server.
Register resource sets and client agents in AM.
Help users manage access to their protected resources through AM.
Pay close attention to the AM documentation on configuring an OAuth 2.0 UMA Client and UMA Server. You may need to add specific grant types to each OAuth 2.0 application.
If you follow AM documentation to set up UMA, you'll see instructions on setting up users as resource owners and requesting parties. If you set up users in AM, be sure to include the following information for each user:
First Name
Last Name
Email Address
AM writes this information to the common DS user data store. You can then synchronize these users to the IDM Managed User data store, with a command such as:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request POST \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/recon?_action=recon&mapping=systemLdapAccounts_managedUser"
After your users have shared UMA resources from the AM Self-Service UI, they can view what they've done and shared in the IDM End User UI, by selecting the Sharing icon ().
5.9.2. Configuring Trusted Devices on IDM
You can configure Trusted Devices through AM, using the following sections of the AM Authentication and Single Sign-On Guide: Configuring Authentication Chains and Device ID (Match) Authentication Module. You can use the techniques described in these sections to set up different authentication chains for administrators and regular users.
You can create an AM authentication chain with the following modules and criteria:
Module | Criteria |
---|---|
Data Store | Requisite |
Device Id (Match) | Sufficient |
Device Id (Save) | Required |
This is different from the authentication chain described in the following section of the AM Authentication and Single Sign-On Guide: Device ID (Match) Authentication Module, as it does not include the HOTP Authentication Module
When trusted devices are enabled, users are presented with a prompt on a
screen with the following question "Add to Trusted Devices?". If the user
selects Yes
, that user is prompted for the name of the
Trusted Device.
Note
In default configurations, trusted devices are not saved for the
AM amadmin
account. However, you can set up
different AM administrative users as described in the following
section of the AM Setup and Maintenance Guide:
Delegating Realm Administration Privileges.
You can set up different authentication chains for regular and administrative users, as described in the AM Authentication and Single Sign-On Guide.
5.10. Privacy: My Account Information in the End User UI
While end users can find their information in the End User UI, you can use REST calls and audit logs to find the same information. However, some of the information in this section, such as Trusted Devices and UMA-based sharing, may require integration with ForgeRock Directory Services (DS) or ForgeRock Access Management (AM), as described in "Integrating IDM With the ForgeRock Identity Platform" in the Samples Guide.
What the enduser sees upon log into the End User UI depends on which features are configured.
When you log into the End User UI, you'll be taken to the IDM Profile page (), with at least the following information under settings:
Account Security
Preferences
Account Controls
You'll see at least a Dashboard () and a Profile icon () in the left hand pane. If you've configured UMA as described in "Setting Up User-Managed Access (UMA), Trusted Devices, and Privacy", you'll also see a Sharing icon (). To see descriptions with each icon, select the Menu icon ():
When you add features described earlier in this chapter, you'll see additional options in the profile page, as described in the following table:
Information in the End User Profile PageTitle Description Section Account Security Password and Security Questions, default "Configuring Security Questions" Social Sign-in Links to Social Identity Provider Accounts "Configuring Social Identity Providers" Authorized Applications Applications that can access an account "Authorized Applications" Trusted Devices Based on system and browser "Configuring Trusted Devices on IDM" Preferences Default "Configuring End User Preferences" Personal Data Sharing Provides control "Personal Data Sharing" Account Controls Includes collected account data (Default) "Account Controls"
5.10.1. Personal Information
End users can find their account details in the End User UI, by selecting the Profile icon () > Edit Personal Info. By default, user information includes at least the following properties: Username, First Name, Last Name, and Email Address.
Each user can modify this information as needed, as long as
"userEditable" : true
for the property in your project's
managed.json
file. For more information, see
"Creating and Modifying Managed Object Types".
5.10.2. Sign-In & Security
Under this tab, end users can change their passwords. They can also add, delete, or modify security questions, and link or unlink supported social identity accounts. For more information, see "Configuring Security Questions" and "Configuring Social Identity Providers".
5.10.3. Preferences
The preferences tab allows end users to modify marketing preferences, as
defined in the managed.json
file, and the Managed Object
User property Preferences tab. For more information, see
"Configuring End User Preferences".
End users can toggle marketing preferences. When IDM includes a mapping to a marketing database, these preferences are sent to that database. This can help administrators use IDM to target marketing campaigns and identify potential leads.
5.10.4. Trusted Devices
A trusted device uses AM's Device ID (Match) and Device ID (Save) authentication modules, as described in the AM Authentication and Single Sign-On Guide. When such modules are configured (see "Configuring Trusted Devices on IDM"), end users can add such devices the first time they log in from a new location.
During the login process, when an end user selects Log In, that user is prompted for a Trusted Device Name. Users see their added devices under the Trusted Devices tab.
A trusted device entry is paired with a specific browser on a specific system. The next time the same end user logs in from the same browser and system, in the same location, that user should not be prompted to enter a trusted device again.
End users can remove their trusted devices from the tab.
5.10.5. Authorized Applications
The Authorized Applications section is specific to end users as OAuth 2 clients. and reflects the corresponding section of the AM Self-Service dashboard, as described in the following section of the AM OAuth 2.0 Guide on: User Consent Management.
Note
The one exception is when IDM is configured to work with
AM as described in
"Integrating IDM With the ForgeRock Identity Platform" in the Samples Guide. You'll see
an "Authorized Application" in this case, with a name such as
openidm
. While end users can select Remove
,
to try to delete something like openidm
as an
"Authorized Application", openidm
will reappear the next
time the user logs into the End User UI, in the "full stack" configuration.
5.10.6. Personal Data Sharing
This section assumes that as an administrator, you've followed the instructions in "Configuring Privacy & Consent" to enable Privacy & Consent.
End users who see a Personal Data Sharing section have control of whether personal data is shared with an external database, such as one that might contain marketing leads.
The managed object record for end users who consent to sharing such data is
shown in REST output and the audit activity log as one
consentedMappings
object:
"consentedMappings" : [ { "mapping" : "managedUser_systemLdapAccounts", "consentDate" : "2017-08-25T18:13:08.358Z" }
If enabled, end users will see a Personal Data Sharing section in their profiles. If they select the Allow link, they can see the data properties that would be shared with the external database.
This option supports the right to restrict processing of user personal data.
5.10.7. Account Controls
The Account Controls section allows end users to download their account data (in JSON format), and to delete their accounts from IDM.
Important
When end users delete their accounts, the change is propagated to external systems by implicit sync. However, it is then up to the administrator of the external system to make sure that any additional user information is purged from that system.
To modify the message associated with the Delete Your Account
option, refer to the following section of the public ForgeRock Identity
Management (End User) Git repository on
Translations. You'll find content GitHub
"Customizing the End User UI", find the
translation.json
file, search for the
deleteAccount
code block, and edit text information
as desired.
The options shown in this section can help meet requirements related to data portability, as well as the right to be forgotten.
5.11. Progressive Profile Completion
Progressive profile completion can help you build relationships with end users. Once users have established a history in their accounts, you can collect more information based on customizable criteria. Ideally, you should be able to use that information to create better experiences for those end users.
After activating "User Self-Registration", users need only the following information to register:
User name
First name
Last name
Email address
Progressive profile completion allows you to collect additional information,
limited by the attributes defined in the managed.json
file for your project.
In the following sections, you'll examine how you use progressive profile
completion to ask or require more information from users. You're limited
only by the properties defined in your project's
managed.json
file.
For more information, see "Setting Up a Progressive Profile Completion Form With
selfservice-profile.json
".
5.11.1. Setting Up a Progressive Profile Completion Form With
selfservice-profile.json
If you're testing progressive profile completion, you can start from the
selfservice-profile.json
file in the following
directory:
openidm/samples/example-configurations/self-service/
Copy this file to your project's conf/
subdirectory
and start IDM. After the conditions shown in this
configuration file are met, end users will see a form prompting them to
add a telephone number.
{ "stageConfigs" : [ { "name" : "conditionaluser", "identityServiceUrl" : "managed/user", "condition" : { "type" : "loginCount", "interval" : "at", "amount" : 25 }, "evaluateConditionOnField" : "user", "onConditionTrue" : { "name" : "attributecollection", "identityServiceUrl" : "managed/user", "uiConfig" : { "displayName" : "Add your telephone number", "purpose" : "Help us verify your identity", "buttonText" : "Save" }, "attributes" : [ { "name" : "telephoneNumber", "isRequired" : true } ] } } ] }
The following table includes a detailed list of each property shown in this file:
selfservice-profile.json
FileProperty | Description |
---|---|
stageConfigs | Progressive profile completion is a stage user self-service |
name | conditionaluser sets up conditions for
end users |
identityServiceUrl | managed/user specifies IDM
Managed Users |
condition | Condition when to display the form |
type | Type of condition ; for a list of conditions,
see "Standard Progressive Profile Completion Conditions" |
evaluateConditionOnField | IDM evaluates the condition, per
user |
onConditionTrue | Present the form with the following properties |
name | Data that you collect with the form is an
attributeCollection |
uiConfig | Labels to include the in the form seen by the end user |
displayName | Form title |
purpose | Form explanation |
buttonText | Customizable |
attributes | Attribute name from managed.json |
isRequired | If an end user has to enter data to complete a connection to IDM |
5.11.1.1. Standard Progressive Profile Completion Conditions
You can set up a number of different conditions for when users are prompted to add information to their profiles. IDM includes the following pre-defined criteria:
loginCount
May specify
at
orevery
number of logins, as defined by the following value:amount
.Note
End users can bypass progressive profile completion screens, when configured with a
loginCount
. Every time they see such a request, they can open a new browser window to bypass that request, and log into the End User UI. They won't have to provide the information requested, even if you've set the attribute as Required under the Attributes tab.timeSince
May specify a time since the user was created, the
createDate
, inyears
,months
,weeks
,days
,hours
, andminutes
.profileCompleteness
Based on the number of items completed by the user from
managed.json
, in percent, as defined bypercentLessThan
; for more information, see "Defining Overall Profile Completion".propertyValue
Based on the value of a specific user entry, such as
postalAddress
, which can be defined by "Presence Expressions".
5.11.1.2. Custom Progressive Profile Conditions
You can also set up custom conditions with query filters and scripts. These criteria may deviate from standard query filters described in "Constructing Queries" and standard scripted conditions described in "Adding Conditional Policy Definitions".
A query filter (
queryFilter
), as defined in "Defining and Calling Queries". For example, the following query filter checks user information for users who live in the city of Portland:"condition" : { "type" : "queryFilter", "filter" : "/city eq \"Portland\"" },
In addition, you can also reference metadata, as described in "Tracking Metadata For Managed Objects". For example, the following query filter searches for users with:
A
loginCount
greater than or equal to fiveDoes not have a telephone number
"filter" : "(/_meta/loginCount ge 5 and !(/telephoneNumber pr))"
Warning
If you include
_meta
in query filters, the Admin UI will not work for the subject progressive profiling form.While it's technically possible to include a number like
5
in the Admin UI with the query filter, IDM would write the number as a string to theselfservice-profile.json
file. You'd still have to change that number directly in the noted file.An inline script (
scripted
), or a reference to a script file; IDM works with scripts written in either JavaScript or Groovy. For example, you could set up a script here:"condition" : { "type" : "scripted", "script" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "globals" : { }, "source" : "<some script code>" },
Alternatively, you could point to some JavaScript or Groovy file:
"condition" : { "type" : "scripted", "script" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "globals" : { }, "file" : "path/to/someScript.js" },
For the script code, you'll need to reference fields directly, and not by
object.field
. For example, the following code would test for the presence of a telephone number:typeof telephoneNumber === 'undefined' || telephoneNumber === ''
While you can also reference metadata for scripts, you can't check for all available fields, as there is no outer
object
field. However, you can refer to fields that are part of the user object.
5.11.1.3. Defining Overall Profile Completion
A user profile is based on every item in managed.json
where both viewable
and userEditable
are set to true
. Every qualifying item has equal weight.
So if there are 20 qualifying items in managed.json
,
a user who has entries for 10 items has a Profile completion
percentage of 50.
5.11.2. The auth.profile.json
File
In some circumstances, you may wish to create a temporary role for users who are in the middle of progressive profile completion, such as if you wish to enable access to an endpoint, while prohibiting access to other parts of the End User UI (as well as the rest of IDM).
To do this, you may optionally define an authenticationRole
in auth.profile.json
, which you can use as a role
assignment in access.js
or elsewhere.
For example, if you wished to assign access to a custom endpoint for users
who have incomplete profiles, you could modify auth.profile.json
to include a custom authenticationRole
called
incomplete-profile
:
{ "profileEnhancementProcesses": [ "selfservice/termsAndConditions", "selfservice/kbaUpdate", "selfservice/profile" ], "authenticationRole": "incomplete-profile", "authorizationRole": "internal/role/openidm-authorized" }
You could then give access to this role to your custom endpoint in
access.js
:
{ "pattern" : "endpoint/extra-steps", "roles" : "incomplete-profile", "methods" : "read", ... },
Access for these and other roles is governed by the access.js
script. For more information, see "Understanding the Access Configuration Script (access.js
)".
The role specified in authenticationRole
can be an
existing role, or it can be a placeholder string. If it is a placeholder,
it will not function as a real role, but can still be used for access in
access.js
, and will appear in access and
authentication log files in the openidim/audit
directory.
5.11.3. Progressive Profile Completion and Metadata
Progressive profile completion requires that you track object metadata, as described in "Tracking Metadata For Managed Objects". Read that section to configure tracking of the following data:
createDate
: The date the user was created; used in theonCreateUser.js
script in theopenidm/bin/defaults/script
directory.loginCount
: The number of logins, by user.stagesCompleted
: Used to track progressive profile forms, and whether they've been completed, by user.
User acceptance of Terms & Conditions is tracked by default (see "Adding Terms & Conditions").
5.11.4. Configuring Progressive Profile Completion over REST
You can manage the progressive profile completion configuration through the
following endpoint: openidm/config/selfservice/profile
. To
review your current configuration, run the following command:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/selfservice/profile"
Unless you've disabled file writes per "Disabling Automatic Configuration Updates",
the output will match the contents of your project's
selfservice-profile.json
file.
In a similar fashion, you can update this configuration by including the desired contents of the file:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request PUT \ --data '{ "stageConfigs" : [ { "name" : "conditionaluser", "identityServiceUrl" : "managed/user", "condition" : { "type" : "loginCount", "interval" : "at", "amount" : 25 }, "evaluateConditionOnField" : "user", "onConditionTrue" : { "name" : "attributecollection", "identityServiceUrl" : "managed/user", "uiConfig" : { "displayName" : "Add your telephone number", "purpose" : "Help us verify your identity", "buttonText" : "Save" }, "attributes" : [ { "name" : "telephoneNumber", "isRequired" : true } ] } } ] }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/selfservice/profile"
5.11.5. Configuring Progressive Profile Completion Through the Admin UI
The UI is straightforward; in the Admin UI, when you select Configure > Progressive Profile, you'll add a New Form, with:
Attributes defined in
managed.json
Conditions that may be based on a query filter, a script, or pre-defined criteria such as number of logins.
What you configure in the Admin UI is written to the
selfservice-profile.json
file. The information under
the following Admin UI Progressive Profile Completion page tabs is
written to the following code blocks in that file:
Details:
uiConfig
Display Condition:
condition
Attributes:
attributes
Warning
When you use the UI, you must specify a property
under the Attributes tab. Otherwise, IDM won't display a
Progressive Profile form. To specify a property, select Configure >
Progressive Profile. Select a Progressive Profile form > Attributes tab >
Add a Property. Be sure to select an Attribute Name based on user
properties configured in the managed.json
file.
5.12. Adding Terms & Conditions
Many organizations require their users to accept Terms & Conditions. When you activate this option for user self-registration, IDM includes a link to Terms & Conditions as part of the self-registration process.
You can also force existing IDM users to accept new Terms &
Conditions when they log into the End User UI through the
selfservice-termsAndConditions.json
file described in
"Terms & Conditions Configuration Files".
5.12.1. Terms & Conditions Configuration Files
If you want to try the IDM implementation of Terms &
Conditions, look at these files from the
openidm/samples/example-configurations/self-service
directory:
selfservice.terms.json
selfservice-termsAndConditions.json
Copy these files to your project directory and start IDM. To see how these Terms & Conditions appear to end users, create a regular user. Log into the End User UI as that user. You will be prompted to accept default Terms & Conditions.
The Terms & Conditions that you see in the End User UI come from
the selfservice.terms.json
file:
{ "versions": [ { "version": "2.0", "termsTranslations": { "en": "Some 2.0 fake terms", "fr": "More 2.0 fake terms" }, "createDate": "2017-12-19T03:54:16.865Z" }, { "version": "1.5", "termsTranslations": { "en": "Some 1.5 fake terms", "fr": "More 1.5 fake terms" }, "createDate": "2017-11-20T04:20:11.320Z" } ], "active": "1.5", "uiConfig" : { "displayName" : "We've updated our terms", "purpose" : "You must accept the updated terms in order to proceed.", "buttonText" : "Accept" } }
Note
IDM does not support <form> elements or <script> tags in Terms & Conditions text.
Substitute Terms & Conditions content that meet the requirements of your legal authorities.
As suggested by this file, you can set up different versions of Terms
& Conditions in multiple languages. What is seen by end users is
driven by the active
version.
For details, see the following table:
selfservice.terms.json
FileProperty | Description |
---|---|
version | Specifies a version number |
termsTranslations | Supports Terms & Conditions in different languages |
createDate | Creation date |
active | Specifies the version of Terms & Conditions shown to
users; must match an existing version |
displayName | The title of the Terms & Conditions page, as seen by end users |
purpose | Help text shown below the displayName |
buttonText | Button text shown to the end user for acceptance |
The other Terms & Conditions configuration file is
selfservice-termsAndConditions.json
. If it exists,
end users must accept the specified Terms & Conditions before logging
into IDM. As shown here, this applies Terms & Conditions
to the managed/user
store.
{ "stageConfigs" : [ { "name" : "conditionaluser", "identityServiceUrl" : "managed/user", "condition" : { "type" : "terms" }, "evaluateConditionOnField" : "user", "onConditionTrue" : { "name" : "termsAndConditions" } }, { "name" : "patchObject", "identityServiceUrl" : "managed/user" } ] }
When a user accepts Terms & Conditions, IDM records relevant
information in the _meta
data for that user, as
described in "Identifying When a User Accepts Terms & Conditions".
You can set up user self-registration to require acceptance of Terms & Conditions as described in "User Self-Registration".
Note
If you've set up Terms & Conditions in multiple languages, what your end users see depends on the default language set in the browser, based on ISO-639 language codes:
First, IDM looks for the active version, as defined in the
selfservice.terms.json
file.
If the default language in the browser matches one of the Terms & Conditions languages that you've configured, that's what the end user will see.
If the default language in the browser does not match any Terms & Conditions locales, IDM looks for:
The
en
locale.If there is no
en
locale, IDM uses the first locale shown for the active version.
5.12.2. Updating Terms & Conditions over REST
You can manage the configuration for Terms & Conditions over the following endpoints:
openidm/config/selfservice.terms
openidm/config/selfservice/termsAndConditions
For example, the following command would replace the value of
buttonText
:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request PATCH \ --data '[ { "operation" : "replace", "field" : "uiConfig/buttonText", "value" : "OK" } ]' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/selfservice.terms"
5.12.3. Identifying When a User Accepts Terms & Conditions
You can identify when a user accepts Terms & Conditions, as well as the associated version. To do so, take the following steps:
If needed, find identifying information for all managed users:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryId=query-all"
Pick a desired user, and use REST to get that user's information. This example illustrates how a user with a
userName
ofkvaughan
has already accepted a specific version of Terms & Conditions:$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=userName+eq+'kvaughan'&_fields=*,/_meta/*" { "result": [ { ... "userName": "kvaughan", ... "termsAccepted": { "acceptDate": "2018-04-12T22:55:33.370Z", "termsVersion": "2.0" }, "createDate": "2018-04-12T22:55:33.395Z", "lastChanged": { "date": "2018-04-12T22:55:33.395Z" }, "loginCount": 1, "_rev": "00000000776f8be1", "_id": "69124007-05ec-46e1-a8a8-ecc3d94db124" } } ], ... }
5.12.4. Configuring Terms & Conditions in the Admin UI
From the Admin UI, select Configure > Terms & Conditions. You can then create a new version, which prompts you to configure the following:
Version number (must be unique).
If there are existing Terms & Conditions, you'll see a Make active switch for the new Terms & Conditions.
Locale, in ISO-639 format.
Terms & Conditions, in the specified language locales. You can set up Terms & Conditions in text and/or basic HTML.
Once you've added Terms & Conditions in all desired locales, select
Save to save them in the selfservice.terms.json
file.
Note
The Admin UI does not allow you to delete existing Terms & Conditions.
Once you have at least one set of Terms & Conditions, you should see a Settings tab, where you can:
Require acceptance; the next time any end user logs into IDM, that user will see a copy of your Terms & Conditions, with the Header, Description, and Button Text.
To make sure new users have to accept these Terms & Conditions, select Configure > User Registration in the Admin UI. Enable Terms & Conditions under the Options tab. For more information, see "User Self-Registration". Users who self-register will see the following message, with a link to those Terms & Conditions:
By creating an account, you agree to the Terms & Conditions
These changes are recorded in _meta
data for each user
and can be retrieved through REST calls described in "Identifying When a User Accepts Terms & Conditions".
5.13. Localizing the End User UI
The End User UI is configured in US English. For more information on how to localize and modify the messages in the End User UI, see the following section of the ForgeRock Identity Management (End User) repository on Translations and Text.
5.14. Tokens and User Self-Service
Many processes within user self-service involve multiple stages, such as user self-registration, password reset, and forgotten username. As the user transitions from one stage to another, IDM uses JWT tokens to represent the current state of the process. As each stage is completed, IDM returns a new token. Each request that follows includes that latest token.
For example, users who use these features to recover their usernames and passwords get two tokens in the following scenario:
The user goes through the forgotten username process, gets a JWT Token with a lifetime (default = 300 seconds) that allows that user to get to the next step in the process.
With username in hand, that user may then start the password reset process. That user gets a second JWT token, with the token lifetime configured for that process.
Note
The default IDM JWT token is encrypted and stateless.
However, if you need a token that can be included in a link that works in
all email clients, change the snapshotToken
type
in the appropriate configuration file to
uuid
.
5.15. End User UI Notifications
Whenever there are changes related to individual users, IDM sends notifications to the affected user. When such users log into the End User UI, they can find their notifications by selecting the bell () icon.
Notifications are configured in notification-*.json
files,
as described in "Notification Configuration Files".
IDM includes a notifications
endpoint, which can
help you identify all notifications:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/internal/notification?_queryFilter=true"
You can isolate notifications by user. As noted elsewhere, you can identify user IDs with the following command:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryId=query-all-ids"
You can then isolate the notifications by user ID, with the
_notifications
field.
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/e3a9385b-733f-4a1c-891b-c89292b30d70?_fields=_notifications/*"
For other _queryFilter
options, see "Defining and Calling Queries".
You can filter notifications with any of the properties shown in the following table:
Property | Description |
---|---|
createDate | Creation date |
notificationType | Message type: limited to info, warning, or error |
message | Message seen by the end user |
You can get additional information from the activity audit log, in the
audit/activity.audit.json
file. including the
following:
The
userId
who made the change.The
runAs
name of the user who made the change.If configured in "Specifying Fields to Monitor", any watched fields that have changed.
If the password was changed, as indicated by the
passwordChanged
property.
Chapter 6. Managing the Repository
IDM stores managed objects, internal users, and configuration objects in a repository. By default, the server uses an embedded ForgeRock Directory Services (DS) instance as its repository. In production, you must replace this embedded instance with an external DS instance, or with a JDBC repository, as described in "Selecting a Repository" in the Installation Guide.
This chapter describes the repository configuration, the use of mappings in the repository, and how to configure a connection to the repository over SSL. It also describes how to interact with the repository over the REST interface.
6.1. Understanding the Repository Configuration Files
IDM provides configuration files for all supported repositories.
These configuration files are located in the
/path/to/openidm/db/database/conf
directory. For JDBC repositories, the configuration is defined in two files:
datasource.jdbc-default.json
, which specifies the connection details to the repository.repo.jdbc.json
, which specifies the mapping between IDM resources and the tables in the repository, and includes a number of predefined queries.repo.init.json
, which specifies IDM's initial internal roles and users. The file is used when first launching IDM, and can be used to create additional roles and users, but ignores roles and users that have already been created. For more information about internal roles, see "Authorization".
For a DS repository, the repo.ds.json
file specifies the resource mapping and, in the case of an external
repository, the connection details to the LDAP server.
Copy the configuration files for your specific database type to your
project's conf/
directory.
6.1.1. Understanding the JDBC Connection Configuration File
The default database connection configuration file for a MySQL database follows:
{ "driverClass" : "com.mysql.jdbc.Driver", "jdbcUrl" : "jdbc:mysql://&{openidm.repo.host}:&{openidm.repo.port}/openidm?allowMultiQueries=true&characterEncoding=utf8", "databaseName" : "openidm", "username" : "openidm", "password" : "openidm", "connectionTimeout" : 30000, "connectionPool" : { "type" : "hikari", "minimumIdle" : 20, "maximumPoolSize" : 50 } }
The configuration file includes the following properties:
driverClass
"driverClass" : string
To use the JDBC driver manager to acquire a data source, set this property, as well as
"jdbcUrl"
,"username"
, and"password"
. The driver class must be the fully qualified class name of the database driver to use for your database.Using the JDBC driver manager to acquire a data source is the most likely option, and the only one supported "out of the box". The remaining options in the sample repository configuration file assume that you are using a JDBC driver manager.
Example:
"driverClass" : "com.mysql.jdbc.Driver"
jdbcUrl
The connection URL to the JDBC database. The URL should include all of the parameters required by your database. For example, to specify the encoding in MySQL use
'characterEncoding=utf8'
.Specify the values for
openidm.repo.host
andopenidm.repo.port
in one of the following ways:Set the values in
resolver/boot.properties
or your project'sconf/system.properties
file, for example:openidm.repo.host = localhost openidm.repo.port = 3306
Set the properties in the
OPENIDM_OPTS
environment variable and export that variable before startup. You must include the JVM memory options when you set this variable. For example:$ export OPENIDM_OPTS="-Xmx1024m -Xms1024m -Dopenidm.repo.host=localhost -Dopenidm.repo.port=3306" $ ./startup.sh Executing ./startup.sh... Using OPENIDM_HOME: /path/to/openidm Using PROJECT_HOME: /path/to/openidm Using OPENIDM_OPTS: -Xmx1024m -Xms1024m -Dopenidm.repo.host=localhost -Dopenidm.repo.port=3306 Using LOGGING_CONFIG: -Djava.util.logging.config.file=/path/to/openidm/conf/logging.properties Using boot properties at /path/to/openidm/resolver/boot.properties -> OpenIDM version "6.5.2.0" OpenIDM ready
databaseName
The name of the database to which IDM connects. By default, this is
openidm
.username
The username with which to access the JDBC database.
password
The password with which to access the JDBC database. IDM automatically encrypts clear string passwords. To replace an existing encrypted value, replace the whole
crypto-object
value, including the brackets, with a string of the new password.connectionTimeout
The period of time, in milliseconds, after which IDM should consider an attempted connection to the database to have failed. The default period is 30000 milliseconds (30 seconds).
connectionPool
Database connection pooling configuration. The default connection pool library is HikariCP:
"connectionPool" : { "type" : "hikari" }
IDM uses the default HikariCP configuration, except for the following parameters. You might need to adjust these parameters, according to your database workload:
minimumIdle
This property controls the minimum number of idle connections that HikariCP maintains in the connection pool. If the number of idle connections drops below this value, HikariCP attempts to add additional connections.
By default, HikariCP runs as a fixed-sized connection pool, that is, this property is not set. The connection configuration files provided with IDM set the minimum number of idle connections to
20
.maximumPoolSize
This property controls the maximum number of connections to the database, including idle connections and connections that are being used.
By default, HikariCP sets the maximum number of connections to
10
. The connection configuration files provided with IDM set the maximum number of connections to50
.
For information about the HikariCP configuration parameters, see the HikariCPCP Project Page.
6.1.2. Understanding the JDBC Database Table Configuration
An excerpt of a MySQL database table configuration file follows:
{ "dbType" : "MYSQL", "useDataSource" : "default", "maxBatchSize" : 100, "maxTxRetry" : 5, "queries" : {...}, "commands" : {...}, "resourceMapping" : {...} }
The configuration file includes the following properties:
dbType
: string, optionalThe type of database. The database type might affect the queries used and other optimizations. Supported database types include the following:
DB2
SQLSERVER
(for Microsoft SQL Server)MYSQL
ORACLE
POSTGRESQL
useDataSource
: string, optionalThis option refers to the connection details that are defined in the configuration file, described previously. The default configuration file is named
datasource.jdbc-default.json
. This is the file that is used by default (and the value of the"useDataSource"
is therefore"default"
). You might want to specify a different connection configuration file, instead of overwriting the details in the default file. In this case, set your connection configuration filedatasource.jdbc-name.json
and set the value of"useDataSource"
to whatever name you have used.maxBatchSize
The maximum number of SQL statements that will be batched together. This parameter allows you to optimize the time taken to execute multiple queries. Certain databases do not support batching, or limit how many statements can be batched. A value of
1
disables batching.maxTxRetry
The maximum number of times that a specific transaction should be attempted before that transaction is aborted.
queries
Predefined queries that can be referenced from the configuration. For more information about predefined queries, see "Parameterized Queries". The queries are divided between those for
genericTables
and those forexplicitTables
.The following sample extract from the default MySQL configuration file shows two credential queries, one for a generic mapping, and one for an explicit mapping. Note that the lines have been broken here for legibility only. In a real configuration file, the query would be all on one line:
"queries" : { "genericTables" : { "credential-query" : "SELECT obj.objectid, obj.rev, obj.fullobject FROM ${_dbSchema}.${_mainTable} obj INNER JOIN ${_dbSchema}.objecttypes objtype ON objtype.id = obj.objecttypes_id AND objtype.objecttype = ${_resource} INNER JOIN ${_dbSchema}.${_propTable} usernameprop ON obj.id = usernameprop.${_mainTable}_id AND usernameprop.propkey='/userName' INNER JOIN ${_dbSchema}.${_propTable} statusprop ON obj.id = statusprop.${_mainTable}_id AND statusprop.propkey='/accountStatus' WHERE usernameprop.propvalue = ${username} AND statusprop.propvalue = 'active'", ... "explicitTables" : { "credential-query" : "SELECT * FROM ${_dbSchema}.${_table} WHERE username = ${username} and accountstatus = 'active'", ... } }
Options supported for query parameters include the following:
A default string parameter, for example:
openidm.query("managed/user", { "_queryId": "for-userName", "uid": "jdoe" });
For more information about the query function, see "openidm.query(resourceName, params, fields)".
A list parameter (
${list:propName}
).Use this parameter to specify a set of indeterminate size as part of your query. For example:
WHERE targetObjectId IN (${list:filteredIds})
An integer parameter (
${int:propName}
).Use this parameter to query non-string values in the database. This is particularly useful with explicit tables.
commands
Specific commands configured to manage the database over the REST interface. Currently, the following default commands are included in the configuration:
purge-by-recon-expired
purge-by-recon-number-of
delete-mapping-links
delete-target-ids-for-recon
These commands assist with removing stale reconciliation audit information from the repository, and preventing the repository from growing too large. The commands work by executing a query filter, then performing the specified operation on each result set. Currently the only supported operation is
DELETE
, which removes all entries that match the filter. For more information about repository commands, see "Running Queries and Commands on the Repository".resourceMapping
Defines the mapping between IDM resource URIs (for example,
managed/user
) and JDBC tables. The structure of the resource mapping is as follows:"resourceMapping" : { "default" : { "mainTable" : "genericobjects", "propertiesTable" : "genericobjectproperties", "searchableDefault" : true }, "genericMapping" : {...}, "explicitMapping" : {...} }
The default mapping object represents a default generic table in which any resource that does not have a more specific mapping is stored.
The generic and explicit mapping objects are described in the following section.
6.1.3. Understanding the DS Repository Configuration
An excerpt of a DS repository configuration file follows:
{ "embedded" : false, "maxConnectionAttempts" : 5, "security" : {...}, "ldapConnectionFactories" : {...}, "queries" : {...}, "commands" : {...}, "rest2LdapOptions": {...}, "indices": {...}, "schemaProviders": {...}, "resourceMapping" : {...} }
The configuration file includes the following properties:
embedded
: booleanSpecifies an embedded or external DS instance.
IDM uses an embedded DS instance by default. The embedded instance is not supported in production.
maxConnectionAttempts
: integerSpecifies the number of times IDM should attempt to connect to the DS instance. On startup, IDM will attempt to connect to DS indefinitely. The
maxConnectionAttempts
parameter controls the number of reconnection attempts in the event of a failure during normal operation, for example, if an attempt to access the DS repository times out.By default, IDM will attempt to reconnect to the DS instance
5
times.security
Specifies the DS key manager and trust manager provider types, both
jvm
by default. For example:"security": { "trustManager": "jvm", "keyManager": "jvm" }
ldapConnectionFactories
For an external DS repository, configures the connection to the DS instance. For example:
"ldapConnectionFactories": { "bind": { "connectionSecurity": "none", "sslCertAlias": "client-cert", "heartBeatIntervalSeconds": 60, "heartBeatTimeoutMilliSeconds": 10000, "primaryLdapServers": [{ "hostname": "localhost", "port": 31389 }], "secondaryLdapServers": [] }, "root": { "inheritFrom": "bind", "authentication": { "simple": { "bindDn": "cn=Directory Manager", "bindPassword": "password" } } } }
queries
Predefined queries that can be referenced from the configuration. For a DS repository, all predefined queries are really filtered queries (using the
_queryFilter
parameter), for example:"query-all-ids": { "_queryFilter": "true", "_fields": "_id,_rev" },
The queries are divided between those for
generic
mappings and those forexplicit
mappings, but the queries themselves are the same for both mapping types.commands
Specific commands configured to manage the repository over the REST interface. Currently, only two commands are included by default:
delete-mapping-links
delete-target-ids-for-recon
Both of these commands assist with removing stale reconciliation audit information from the repository, and preventing the repository from growing too large. For more information about repository commands, see "Running Queries and Commands on the Repository".
rest2LdapOptions
Specifies the configuration for accessing the LDAP data stored in DS. For more information, see Gateway REST2LDAP Configuration File in the DS Reference.
indices
For generic mappings, sets up LDAP indices on custom object properties. For more information, see "Improving Generic Mapping Search Performance (DS)".
schemaProviders
For generic mappings, lets you list custom objects whose properties should be indexed. For more information, see "Improving Generic Mapping Search Performance (DS)".
resourceMapping
Defines the mapping between IDM resource URIs (for example,
managed/user
) and the DS directory tree. The structure of the resource mapping object is as follows:{ "resourceMapping" : { "defaultMapping": { "dnTemplate": "ou=generic,dc=openidm,dc=forgerock,dc=com" }, "explicitMapping" : {...}, "genericMapping" : {...} }
The default mapping object represents a default generic organizational unit (
ou
) in which any resource that does not have a more specific mapping is stored.The generic and explicit mapping objects are described in "Using Generic and Explicit Object Mappings" .
6.2. Using Generic and Explicit Object Mappings
There are two ways to map IDM objects to the tables in a JDBC database or to organizational units in DS:
Generic mapping, which allows you to store arbitrary objects without special configuration or administration.
Explicit mapping, which maps specific objects and properties to tables and columns in the JDBC database or to organizational units in DS.
These two mapping strategies are discussed in the following sections, for JDBC repositories and for DS repositories:
6.2.1. Generic and Explicit Mappings With a JDBC Repository
6.2.1.1. Using Generic Mappings With a JDBC Repository
Generic mapping speeds up development, and can make system maintenance more flexible by providing a stable database structure. However, generic mapping can have a performance impact and does not take full advantage of the database facilities (such as validation within the database and flexible indexing). In addition, queries can be more difficult to set up.
In a generic table, the entire object content is stored in a single
large-character field named fullobject
in the
mainTable
for the object. To search on specific fields,
you can read them by referring to them in the corresponding
properties table
for that object. The disadvantage of
generic objects is that, because every property you might like to filter by
is stored in a separate table, you must join to that table each time you
need to filter by anything.
The following diagram shows a pared down database structure for the default generic table, when using a MySQL repository. The diagram indicates the relationship between the main table and the corresponding properties table for each object.
These separate tables can make the query syntax particularly complex. For example, a simple query to return user entries based on a user name would need to be implemented as follows:
SELECT obj.objectid, obj.rev, obj.fullobject FROM ${_dbSchema}.${_mainTable} obj INNER JOIN ${_dbSchema}.${_propTable} prop ON obj.id = prop.${_mainTable}_id INNER JOIN ${_dbSchema}.objecttypes objtype ON objtype.id = obj.objecttypes_id WHERE prop.propkey='/userName' AND prop.propvalue = ${uid} AND objtype.objecttype = ${_resource}",
The query can be broken down as follows:
Select the full object, the object ID, and the object revision from the main table:
SELECT obj.objectid, obj.rev, obj.fullobject FROM ${_dbSchema}.${_mainTable} obj
Join to the properties table and locate the object with the corresponding ID:
INNER JOIN ${_dbSchema}.${_propTable} prop ON obj.id = prop.${_mainTable}_id
Join to the object types table to restrict returned entries to objects of a specific type. For example, you might want to restrict returned entries to
managed/user
objects, ormanaged/role
objects:INNER JOIN ${_dbSchema}.objecttypes objtype ON objtype.id = obj.objecttypes_id
Filter records by the
userName
property, where the userName is equal to the specifieduid
and the object type is the specified type (in this case, managed/user objects):WHERE prop.propkey='/userName' AND prop.propvalue = ${uid} AND objtype.objecttype = ${_resource}",
The value of the
uid
field is provided as part of the query call, for example:openidm.query("managed/user", { "_queryId": "for-userName", "uid": "jdoe" });
Tables for user definable objects use a generic mapping by default.
The following sample generic mapping object illustrates how
managed/
objects are stored in a generic table:
"genericMapping" : { "managed/*" : { "mainTable" : "managedobjects", "propertiesTable" : "managedobjectproperties", "searchableDefault" : true, "properties" : { "/picture" : { "searchable" : false } } } },
mainTable
(string, mandatory)Indicates the main table in which data is stored for this resource.
The complete object is stored in the
fullobject
column of this table. The table includes anobjecttypes
foreign key that is used to distinguish the different objects stored within the table. In addition, the revision of each stored object is tracked, in therev
column of the table, enabling multiversion concurrency control (MVCC). For more information, see "Manipulating Managed Objects Programmatically".propertiesTable
(string, mandatory)Indicates the properties table, used for searches.
Note
PostgreSQL repositories do not use these properties tables to access specific properties. Instead, the PostgreSQL
json_extract_path_text()
function achieves this functionality.The contents of the properties table is a defined subset of the properties, copied from the character large object (CLOB) that is stored in the
fullobject
column of the main table. The properties are stored in a one-to-many style separate table. The set of properties stored here is determined by the properties that are defined assearchable
.The stored set of searchable properties makes these values available as discrete rows that can be accessed with SQL queries, specifically, with
WHERE
clauses. It is not otherwise possible to query specific properties of the full object.The properties table includes the following columns:
${_mainTable}_id
corresponds to theid
of the full object in the main table, for example,manageobjects_id
, orgenericobjects_id
.propkey
is the name of the searchable property, stored in JSON pointer format (for example/mail
).proptype
is the data type of the property, for examplejava.lang.String
. The property type is obtained from the Class associated with the value.propvalue
is the value of property, extracted from the full object that is stored in the main table.Regardless of the property data type, this value is stored as a string, so queries against it should treat it as such.
searchableDefault
(boolean, optional)Specifies whether all properties of the resource should be searchable by default. Properties that are searchable are stored and indexed. You can override the default for individual properties in the
properties
element of the mapping. The preceding example indicates that all properties are searchable, with the exception of thepicture
property.For large, complex objects, having all properties searchable implies a substantial performance impact. In such a case, a separate insert statement is made in the properties table for each element in the object, every time the object is updated. Also, because these are indexed fields, the recreation of these properties incurs a cost in the maintenance of the index. You should therefore enable
searchable
only for those properties that must be used as part of a WHERE clause in a query.Note
PostgreSQL repositories do not use the
searchableDefault
property.properties
Lists any individual properties for which the searchable default should be overridden.
Note that if an object was originally created with a subset of
searchable
properties, changing this subset (by adding a newsearchable
property in the configuration, for example) will not cause the existing values to be updated in the properties table for that object. To add the new property to the properties table for that object, you must update or recreate the object.
6.2.1.2. Improving Generic Mapping Search Performance (JDBC)
All properties in a generic mapping are searchable by default. In other
words, the value of the searchableDefault
property is
true
unless you explicitly set it to false. Although
there are no individual indexes in a generic mapping, you can improve search
performance by setting only those properties that you need to search as
searchable
. Properties that are searchable are created
within the corresponding properties table. The properties table exists only
for searches or look-ups, and has a composite index, based on the resource,
then the property name.
The sample JDBC repository configuration files
(db/database/conf/repo.jdbc.json
)
restrict searches to specific properties by setting the
searchableDefault
to false
for
managed/user
mappings. You must explicitly set
searchable
to true for each property that should be
searched. The following sample extract from
repo.jdbc.json
indicates searches restricted to the
userName
property:
"genericMapping" : { "managed/user" : { "mainTable" : "manageduserobjects", "propertiesTable" : "manageduserobjectproperties", "searchableDefault" : false, "properties" : { "/userName" : { "searchable" : true } } } },
With this configuration, IDM creates entries in the properties
table only for userName
properties of managed user
objects.
If the global searchableDefault
is set to false,
properties that do not have a searchable attribute explicitly set to true
are not written in the properties table.
6.2.1.3. Using Explicit Mappings With a JDBC Repository
Explicit mapping is more difficult to set up and maintain, but can take complete advantage of the native database facilities.
An explicit table offers better performance and simpler queries. There is less work in the reading and writing of data, because the data is all in a single row of a single table. In addition, it is easier to create different types of indexes that apply to only specific fields in an explicit table. The disadvantage of explicit tables is the additional work required in creating the table in the schema. Also, because rows in a table are inherently more simple, it is more difficult to deal with complex objects. Any non-simple key:value pair in an object associated with an explicit table is converted to a JSON string and stored in the cell in that format. This makes the value difficult to use, from the perspective of a query attempting to search within it.
You can have a generic mapping configuration for most managed objects, and an explicit mapping that overrides the default generic mapping in certain cases.
IDM provides a sample configuration, for each JDBC repository,
that sets up an explicit mapping for the managed user
object and a generic mapping for all other managed objects. This
configuration is defined in the files named
/path/to/openidm/db/repository/conf/repo.jdbc-repository-explicit-managed-user.json
.
To use this configuration, copy the file that corresponds to your
repository to your project's conf/
directory and
rename it repo.jdbc.json
. Run the
sample-explicit-managed-user.sql
data definition
script (in the path/to/openidm/db/repository/scripts
directory) to set up the corresponding tables when you configure your JDBC
repository.
IDM uses explicit mapping for internal system tables, such as the tables used for auditing.
Depending on the types of usage your system is supporting, you might find that an explicit mapping performs better than a generic mapping. Operations such as sorting and searching (such as those performed in the default UI) tend to be faster with explicitly-mapped objects, for example.
The following sample explicit mapping object illustrates how
internal/user
objects are stored in an explicit table:
"explicitMapping" : { "internal/user" : { "table" : "internaluser", "objectToColumn" : { "_id" : "objectid", "_rev" : "rev", "password" : "pwd", "roles" : "roles" } }, ... }
<resource-uri>
(string, mandatory)Indicates the URI for the resources to which this mapping applies, for example,
internal/user
.table
(string, mandatory)The name of the database table in which the object (in this case internal users) is stored.
objectToColumn
(string, mandatory)The way in which specific managed object properties are mapped to columns in the table.
The mapping can be a simple one to one mapping, for example
"userName": "userName",
or a more complex JSON map or list. When a column is mapped to a JSON map or list, the syntax is as shown in the following examples:"messageDetail" : { "column" : "messagedetail", "type" : "JSON_MAP" }
or
"roles": { "column" : "roles", "type" : "JSON_LIST" }
Available column data types you can specify are
STRING
(the default),NUMBER
,JSON_MAP
,JSON_LIST
, andFULLOBJECT
.
Caution
Pay particular attention to the following caveats when you map properties to explicit columns in your database:
Support for data types in columns is restricted to numeric values (
NUMBER
) and strings (STRING
). Although you can specify other data types, IDM handles all other data types as strings. Your database will need to convert these types from a string to the alternative data type. This conversion is not guaranteed to work.If the conversion does work, the format might not be the same when the data is read from the database as it was when it was saved. For example, your database might parse a date in the format
12/12/2012
and return the date in the format2012-12-12
when the property is read.Passwords are encrypted before they are stored in the repository. The length of the password column must be long enough to store the encrypted password value, which can vary depending on how it is encrypted and whether it is also hashed.
The
sample-explicit-managed-user.sql
file referenced in this section sets the password column to a length of 511 characters (VARCHAR(511)
to account for the additional space an encrypted password requires. For more information about IDM encryption and an example encrypted password value, see "Using the encrypt Subcommand" and "Encoding Attribute Values".If your data objects include virtual properties, you must include columns in which to store these properties. If you don't explicitly map the virtual properties, you will see errors similar to the following when you attempt to create the corresponding object"
{ "code":400, "reason":"Bad Request", "message":"Unmapped fields [/property-name/0] for type managed/user and table openidm.managed_user" }
When virtual properties are returned in the result of a query, the query previously persisted values of the requested virtual properties. To recalculate virtual property values in a query, you must set
executeOnRetrieve
totrue
in the query request parameters. For more information, see "Property Storage Triggers".
6.2.2. Generic and Explicit Mappings With a DS Repository
For both generic and explicit mappings, IDM maps object types
using a dnTemplate
property. The
dnTemplate
is effectively a pointer to where the object
is stored in DS. For example, the following excerpt of the
default repo.ds.json
file shows how configuration
objects are stored under the DN
ou=config,dc=openidm,dc=forgerock,dc=com
:
"config": { "dnTemplate": "ou=config,dc=openidm,dc=forgerock,dc=com" },
6.2.2.1. Using Generic Mappings With a DS Repository
By default, IDM uses a generic mapping for all objects except the following:
Internal users, roles, and privileges
Links
Clustered reconciliation target IDs
Note that clustered reconciliation is not currently supported with a DS repository.
Locks
Objects related to queued synchronization
With a generic mapping, all the properties of an object are stored as a
single JSON blob in the fr-idm-json
attribute. To create
a new generic mapping, you need only specify the
dnTemplate
, that is, where the object will be stored in
the directory tree.
You can specify a wildcard mapping, that stores all nested URIs under a particular branch of the directory tree, for example:
"managed/*": { "dnTemplate": "ou=managed,dc=openidm,dc=forgerock,dc=com" },
With this mapping, all objects under managed/
, such as
managed/user
and managed/device
, will
be stored in the branch
ou=managed,dc=openidm,dc=forgerock,dc=com
. You do not
have to specify separate mappings for each of these objects. The mapping
creates a new ou
for each object. So, for example,
managed/user
objects will be stored under the DN
ou=user,ou=managed,dc=openidm,dc=forgerock,dc=com
and
managed/device
objects will be stored under the DN
ou=device,ou=managed,dc=openidm,dc=forgerock,dc=com
.
6.2.2.1.1. Improving Generic Mapping Search Performance (DS)
By default, all generic objects are instances of the
fr-idm-generic-obj
object class and their properties
are stored as a single JSON blob in the fr-idm-json
attribute. The fr-idm-json
attribute is indexed by
default, which results in all attributes of a generic
object being indexed. JDBC repositories behave in a similar way, with all
generic objects being searchable by default.
To optimize search performance on specific generic resources, you can set up your own schema providers and indices as described in this section. For a detailed explanation of how indexes improve LDAP search performance, see Indexing Attribute Values in the DS Administration Guide.
For the embedded DS repository, or an external DS repository installed as described in "Using an External DS Repository" in the Installation Guide, the following managed user properties are indexed by default:
userName
(cn)givenName
sn
mail
telephoneNumber
You can configure managed user indexes in the repository configuration
(repo.ds.json
) by adding indices
and schemaProviders
objects, as follows:
"indices" : { ... "fr-idm-managed-user-json" : { "type" : [ "EQUALITY" ] }, ... }, "schemaProviders" : { "Managed User Json" : { "matchingRuleName" : "caseIgnoreJsonQueryMatchManagedUser", "matchingRuleOid" : "1.3.6.1.4.1.36733.2.....", "caseSensitiveStrings" : false, "fields" : [ "userName", "givenName", "sn", "mail", "telephoneNumber" ] }, ... },
The indexed properties are listed in the array of fields
for that managed object. To index additional managed user properties, add
the property names to this array of fields
.
To set up indexes on generic objects other than the managed user object, you must do the following:
Add the object to the DS schema.
The schema for an embedded DS repository is stored in the
/path/to/openidm/db/openidm/opendj/db/schema/60-repo-schema.ldif
file.You can use the managed user object as an example of the schema syntax:
### # Managed User ### attributeTypes: ( 1.3.6.1.4.1.36733.2.3.1.13 NAME 'fr-idm-managed-user-json' SYNTAX 1.3.6.1.4.1.36733.2.1.3.1 EQUALITY caseIgnoreJsonQueryMatchManagedUser ORDERING caseIgnoreOrderingMatch SINGLE-VALUE X-ORIGIN 'OpenIDM DSRepoService') objectClasses: ( 1.3.6.1.4.1.36733.2.3.2.6 NAME 'fr-idm-managed-user' SUP top STRUCTURAL MUST ( fr-idm-managed-user-json ) X-ORIGIN 'OpenIDM DSRepoService' )
For information about adding JSON objects to the DS schema, see Working With JSON in the DS Administration Guide.
Warning
If you delete the
db/openidm
directory, any additions you have made to the schema will be lost. If you have customized the schema, be sure to back up the60-repo-schema.ldif
file.Add the object to the
indices
property in theconf/repo.ds.json
file.The following example sets up an equality index for a managed devices object:
"indices" : { ... "fr-idm-managed-devices-json" : { "type" : [ "EQUALITY" ] }, ... },
Add the object to the
schemaProviders
property in theconf/repo.ds.json
file and list the properties that should be indexed.The following example sets up indexes for the
deviceName
,brand
, andassetNumber
properties of the managed device object:"schemaProviders" : { "Managed Device Json" : { "matchingRuleName" : "caseIgnoreJsonQueryMatchManagedDevice", "matchingRuleOid" : "1.3.6.1.4.1.36733.2.....", "caseSensitiveStrings" : false, "fields" : [ "deviceName", "brand", "assetNumber" ] },
For more information about indexing JSON attributes, see Configuring an Index for a JSON Attribute in the DS Administration Guide.
Note
The OIDs shown in this section are reserved for ForgeRock internal use. If you set up additional objects and attributes, or if you change the default schema, you must specify your own OIDs here.
6.2.2.2. Using Explicit Mappings With a DS Repository
The default configuration uses generic mappings for all objects except internal users and roles, links, and clustered reconciliation target IDs. To use an explicit mapping for managed user objects, follow these steps:
Stop IDM if it is running.
Copy the
repo.ds-explicit-managed-user.json
file to your project'sconf
directory, and rename that filerepo.ds.json
:$ cd /path/to/openidm $ cp db/ds/conf/repo.ds-explicit-managed-user.json project-dir/conf/repo.ds.json
Important
This file is configured for an embedded DS repository by default. To set up an explicit mapping for an external DS repository, change the value of the
"embedded"
property tofalse
and add the following properties:"security": { "trustManager": "jvm", "keyManager": "jvm" }, "ldapConnectionFactories": { "bind": { "connectionSecurity": "none", "sslCertAlias": "client-cert", "heartBeatIntervalSeconds": 60, "heartBeatTimeoutMilliSeconds": 10000, "primaryLdapServers": [{ "hostname": "localhost", "port": 31389 }], "secondaryLdapServers": [] }, "root": { "inheritFrom": "bind", "authentication": { "simple": { "bindDn": "cn=Directory Manager", "bindPassword": "password" } } } },
For more information on these properties, see "Understanding the DS Repository Configuration".
Restart IDM.
IDM uses the DS REST to LDAP gateway to map JSON
objects to LDAP objects stored in the directory. To create additional
explicit mappings, you must specify the LDAP objectClasses
to which the object is mapped, and how each property maps to its
corresponding LDAP attributes. Specify at least the property
type
and the corresponding
ldapAttribute
.
The following excerpt of the explicit managed user object mapping provides an example:
"managed/user" : { "dnTemplate": "ou=user,ou=managed,dc=openidm,dc=forgerock,dc=com", "objectClasses": [ "person", "organizationalPerson", "inetOrgPerson", "fr-idm-managed-user-explicit" ], "properties": { "_id": { "type": "simple", "ldapAttribute": "uid", "isRequired": true, "writability": "createOnly" }, "userName": { "type": "simple", "ldapAttribute": "cn" }, "password": { "type": "json", "ldapAttribute": "fr-idm-password" }, "accountStatus": { "type": "simple", "ldapAttribute": "fr-idm-accountStatus" }, "roles": { "type": "json", "ldapAttribute": "fr-idm-role", "isMultiValued": true }, "effectiveRoles": { "type": "json", "ldapAttribute": "fr-idm-effectiveRole", "isMultiValued": true }, "effectiveAssignments": { "type": "json", "ldapAttribute": "fr-idm-effectiveAssignment", "isMultiValued": true }, ... } },
You do not need to map the _rev
(revision) property of
an object as this property is implicit in all objects and maps to the
DS etag
operational attribute.
If your data objects include virtual properties, you must include property mappings for these properties. If you don't explicitly map the virtual properties, you will see errors similar to the following when you attempt to create the corresponding object:
{"code":400,"reason":"Bad Request","message":"Unmapped fields...}
For more information about the REST to LDAP property mappings, see Mapping Configuration File in the DS Reference.
For performance reasons, the DS repository does not apply unique constraints to links. This behavior is different to the JDBC repositories, where uniqueness on link objects is enforced.
Important
DS currently has a default index entry limit of 4000. Therefore, you cannot query more than 4000 records unless you create a Virtual List View (VLV) index. A VLV index is designed to help DS respond to client applications that need to browse through a long list of objects.
You cannot create a VLV index on a JSON attribute. For generic mappings, IDM avoids this restriction by using client-side sorting and searching. However, for explicit mappings you must create a VLV index for any filtered or sorted results, such as results displayed in a UI grid. To configure a VLV index, use the dsconfig command described in Configuring a Virtual List View Index in the DS Administration Guide.
6.2.2.2.1. Specifying How IDM IDs Map to LDAP Entry Names
The DS REST2LDAP configuration lets you specify a
namingStrategy
that determines how LDAP entry names are
mapped to JSON resources. When IDM stores its objects in a
DS repository, this namingStrategy
determines how the IDM _id
value maps to the
Relative Distinguished Name (RDN) of the corresponding DS
object.
The namingStrategy
is specified as part of the
explicitMapping
of an object in the
repo.ds.json
file. The following example shows
a naming strategy configuration for an explicit managed user mapping:
"resourceMapping": { "defaultMapping": { "dnTemplate": "ou=generic,dc=openidm,dc=forgerock,dc=com" }, ... "explicitMapping": { "managed/user" : { "dnTemplate": "ou=user,ou=managed,dc=openidm,dc=forgerock,dc=com", "objectClasses": [ "person", "organizationalPerson", "inetOrgPerson", "fr-idm-managed-user-explicit" ], "namingStrategy" : { "type" : "clientDnNaming", "dnAttribute" : "uid" }, ... }
The namingStrategy
can be one of the following:
clientDnNaming
- IDM provides an_id
to DS and that_id
is used to generate the DS RDN. In the following example, the IDM_id
maps to the LDAPuid
attribute:{ "namingStrategy": { "type": "clientDnNaming", "dnAttribute": "uid" } }
With this default configuration, entries are stored in DS with a DN similar to the following:
"uid=idm-uuid,ou=user,ou=managed,dc=openidm,dc=forgerock,dc=com"
Note
If these default DNs are suitable in your deployment, you do not have to change anything with regard to the naming strategy.
clientNaming
- IDM provides an_id
to DS but the DS RDN is derived from a different user attribute in the LDAP entry. In the following example, the RDN is thecn
attribute. The_id
that IDM provides for the object maps to the LDAPuid
attribute:{ "namingStrategy": { "type": "clientNaming", "dnAttribute": "cn", "idAttribute": "uid" } }
With this configuration, entries are stored in DS with a DN similar to the following:
"cn=username,ou=user,ou=managed,dc=openidm,dc=forgerock,dc=com"
Specifying a namingStrategy
is optional. If you do not
specify a strategy, the default is clientDnNaming
with
the following configuration:
{ "namingStrategy" : { "type" : "clientDnNaming", "dnAttribute" : "uid" }, "properties: : { "_id": { "type": "simple", "ldapAttribute": "uid", "isRequired": true, "writability": "createOnly" }, ... } }
Note
If you do not set a dnAttribute
as part of the naming
strategy, the value of the dnAttribute
is taken from
the value of the ldapAttribute
on the
_id
property.
6.3. Connect to a JDBC Repository Over SSL
This procedure assumes that you have already set up your JDBC repository, as described in "Selecting a Repository" in the Installation Guide. The exact steps to connect to a JDBC repository over SSL depend on your repository. This procedure describes the steps for a MySQL 8 repository. If you are using a different JDBC repository, use the corresponding documentation for that repository, and adjust the steps accordingly.
Change the
jdbcUrl
property in your repository connection configuration file (conf/datasource.jdbc-default.json
).The exact value of the
jdbcUrl
property will depend on your JDBC database, and on the version of your JDBC driver:The following example shows the configuration for MySQL with JDBC driver version 8.0.12 or earlier:
"jdbcUrl" : "jdbc:mysql://&{openidm.repo.host}:&{openidm.repo.port}/openidm?allowMultiQueries=true&characterEncoding=utf8&useSSL=true&verifyServerCertificate=true&requireSSL=true"
The following example shows the configuration for MySQL with JDBC driver version 8.0.13 or later:
"jdbcUrl" : "jdbc:mysql://&{openidm.repo.host}:&{openidm.repo.port}/openidm?allowMultiQueries=true&characterEncoding=utf8&sslMode=VERIFY_CA&requireSSL=true"
Note
For Azure MySQL, JDBC Driver Version 8.0.17+ is required.
Create and verify the SSL certificate and key files required to support encrypted connections to the JDBC repository.
For MySQL 8, use one of the procedures in the MySQL docs.
Configure the JDBC repository to use encrypted connections.
For MySQL 8, follow the MySQL docs.
Check that the connection to the database is over SSL by running a command similar to the following:
mysql -u root -P 3306 -p mysql>show variables like "%have_ssl%"; +---------------+-------+ | Variable_name | Value | +---------------+-------+ | have_ssl | YES | +---------------+-------+ 1 row in set (0.00 sec)
Convert your MySQL client key and certificate files to a PKCS #12 archive. For example:
openssl pkcs12 -export \ -in client-cert.pem \ -inkey client-key.pem \ -name "mysqlclient" \ -passout pass:changeit \ -out client-keystore.p12
Import the
client-keystore.p12
into the IDM keystore:keytool \ -importkeystore \ -srckeystore client-keystore.p12 \ -srcstoretype pkcs12 \ -srcstorepass changeit \ -destkeystore /path/to/openidm/security/keystore.jceks \ -deststoretype jceks \ -deststorepass changeit
Important
For AWS RDS MySQL and Azure MySQL, no client certificates are provided. In this case, you must create an empty keystore for client certificates, and add the following to the
jdbcUrl
property in your repository connection configuration file (conf/datasource.jdbc-default.json
):&clientCertificateKeyStoreUrl=file:/opt/idm/security/empty.jks&clientCertificateKeyStorePassword=changeit
Import your MySQL CA certificate into the IDM truststore.
keytool \ -importcert \ -trustcacerts \ -file ca-cert.pem \ -alias "DB cert" \ -keystore /path/to/openidm/security/truststore
You are prompted for a keystore password. You must use the same password as is shown in your
resolver/boot.properties
file. The default truststore password is:openidm.truststore.password=changeit
After entering a keystore password, you are prompted with the following question. Assuming you have included an appropriate
ca-cert.pem
file, enteryes
.Trust this certificate? [no]:
Open your project's
conf/system.properties
file. Add the following line to that file. If appropriate, substitute the path to your own truststore:# Set the truststore javax.net.ssl.trustStore=&{idm.install.dir}/security/truststore
Even if you are setting up this instance of IDM as part of a cluster, you must configure this initial truststore. After this instance joins a cluster, the SSL keys in this particular truststore are replaced.
6.4. Interacting With the Repository Over REST
The IDM repository is accessible over the REST interface, at the
openidm/repo
endpoint.
In general, you must ensure that external calls to the
openidm/repo
endpoint are protected. Native queries and
free-form command actions on this endpoint are disallowed by default because
the endpoint is vulnerable to injection attacks. For more information, see
"Running Queries and Commands on the Repository".
6.4.1. Running Queries and Commands on the Repository
Free-form commands and native queries on the repository are disallowed by default and should remain so in production to reduce the risk of injection attacks.
Common filter expressions, called with the _queryFilter
keyword, enable you to form arbitrary queries on the repository, using a
number of supported filter operations. For more information on these filter
operations, see "Constructing Queries". Parameterized or
predefined queries and commands (using the _queryId
and
commandId
keywords) can be authorized on the repository
for external calls if necessary. For more information, see
"Parameterized Queries".
Running commands on the repository is supported primarily from scripts. Certain scripts that interact with the repository are provided by default, for example, the scripts that enable you to purge the repository of reconciliation audit records.
You can define your own commands, and specify them in the database table
configuration file (either repo.ds.json
or
repo.jdbc.json
). In the following simple example, a
command is called to clear out UI notification entries from the repository,
for specific users.
The command is defined in the repository configuration file, as follows:
"commands" : { "delete-notifications-by-id" : "DELETE FROM ui_notification WHERE receiverId = ${username}" ... },
The command can be called from a script, as follows:
openidm.action("repo/ui/notification", "command", {}, { "commandId" : "delete-notifications-by-id", "userName" : "scarter"});
Exercise caution when allowing commands to be run on the repository over the REST interface, as there is an attached risk to the underlying data.
Chapter 7. Configuring the Server
This chapter describes how IDM loads and stores its configuration, how the configuration can be changed, and specific configuration recommendations in a production environment.
The configuration is defined in a combination of
.properties
files, container configuration files, and
dynamic configuration objects. Most of the configuration files are stored in
your project's conf/
directory. Note that you might see
files with a .patch
extension in the
conf/
and
db/repo/conf/
directories.
These files specify differences relative to the last released version of
IDM and are used by the update mechanism. They do not affect your
current configuration.
7.1. Configuration Objects
IDM exposes internal configuration objects in JSON format. Configuration elements can be either single instance or multiple instance for an IDM installation.
7.1.1. Single Instance Configuration Objects
Single instance configuration objects correspond to services that have at
most one instance per installation. JSON file views of these configuration
objects are named
object-name.json
.
The following list describes the single instance configuration objects:
The
audit
configuration specifies how audit events are logged.The
authentication
configuration controls REST access.The
cluster
configuration defines how an IDM instance can be configured in a cluster.The
endpoint
configuration controls any custom REST endpoints.The
info
configuration points to script files for the customizable information service.The
managed
configuration defines managed objects and their schemas.The
policy
configuration defines the policy validation service.The
process access
configuration defines access to configured workflows.The
repo.repo-type
configuration such asrepo.ds
orrepo.jdbc
configures the IDM repository.The
router
configuration specifies filters to apply for specific operations.The
script
configuration defines the parameters that are used when compiling, debugging, and running JavaScript and Groovy scripts.The
sync
configuration defines the mappings that IDM uses when it synchronizes and reconciles managed objects.The
ui
configuration defines the configurable aspects of the default user interfaces.The
workflow
configuration defines the configuration of the workflow engine.
IDM stores managed objects in the repository, and exposes them
under /openidm/managed
. System objects on external
resources are exposed under /openidm/system
.
7.1.2. Multiple Instance Configuration Objects
Multiple instance configuration objects correspond to services that can have
many instances per installation. Multiple instance configuration objects are
named
objectname/instancename
,
for example, provisioner.openicf/csvfile
.
JSON file views of these configuration objects
are named
objectname-instancename.json
,
for example, provisioner.openicf-csvfile.json.
IDM provides the following multiple instance configuration objects:
Multiple
schedule
configurations can run reconciliations and other tasks on different schedules.Multiple
provisioner.openicf
configurations correspond to connected resources.Multiple
servletfilter
configurations can be used for different servlet filters such as the Cross Origin and GZip filters.
7.2. Making Configuration Changes
When you change configuration objects, take the following points into account:
IDM's authoritative configuration source is its repository. Although the JSON files provide a view of the configuration objects, they do not represent the authoritative source.
Unless you have disabled file writes, as described in "Disabling Automatic Configuration Updates", IDM updates JSON files after you make configuration changes over REST. You can also edit those JSON files directly.
IDM recognizes changes to JSON files when it is running. The server must be running when you delete configuration objects, even if you do so by editing the JSON files.
Avoid editing configuration objects directly in the repository. Rather, edit the configuration over the REST API, or in the configuration JSON files to ensure consistent behavior and that operations are logged.
By default, IDM stores its configuration in the repository. If you remove an IDM instance and do not specifically drop the repository, the configuration remains in effect for a new instance that uses that repository. You can disable this persistent configuration in your project's
conf/system.properties
file by uncommenting the following line:# openidm.config.repo.enabled=false
Disabling persistent configuration means that IDM stores its configuration in memory only.
7.3. Changing the Default REST Context
By default, IDM objects are accessible over REST at the context
path /openidm/*
where *
indicates the
remainder of the context path, for example /openidm/managed/user
.
You can change the default REST context (/openidm
) by
setting the openidm.servlet.alias
property in your
project's resolver/boot.properties
file.
The following change to the boot.properties
file sets
the REST context to /example
:
openidm.servlet.alias=/example
After this change, objects are accessible at the /example
context path, for example:
$ $ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/example/managed/user?_queryId=query-all-ids" { "result": [ { "_id": "bjensen", "_rev": "0000000042b1dcd2" }, { "_id": "scarter", "_rev": "000000009b54de8a" } ], ... }
To ensure that the Admin UI works with the new REST context, also change the
commonConstants.context
property in the following file:
/path/to/openidm/ui/admin/default/org/forgerock/openidm/ui/common/util/Constants.js
Note
If you've set up a custom UI per "Customizing the Admin UI" and/or
"Customizing the End User UI", the directory with the
Constants.js
file will vary.
Note that changing the REST context impacts the API Explorer, described in
"API Explorer". If you want to use the API Explorer
with the new REST context, change the baseUrl
property in the
following file:
/path/to/openidm/ui/api/default/index.html |
Based on the change to the REST context earlier in this section, you'd set the following:
//base URL for accessing the OpenAPI JSON endpoint var baseURL = '/example/';
7.4. Configuring the Server for Production
Out of the box, IDM is configured to make it easy to install and evaluate. Specific configuration changes are required before you deploy IDM in a production environment.
7.4.1. Configuring a Production Repository
By default, IDM installs an embedded ForgeRock Directory Services (DS) instance for use as its repository. This makes it easy to get started. Before you use IDM in production, you must replace the embedded DS repository with a supported repository. For more information, see "Selecting a Repository" in the Installation Guide.
For more information, see "Selecting a Repository" in the Installation Guide.
7.4.2. Disabling Automatic Configuration Updates
By default, IDM polls the JSON files in the conf
directory periodically for any changes to the configuration. In a production
system, it is recommended that you disable automatic polling for updates to
prevent untested configuration changes from disrupting your identity service.
To disable automatic polling for configuration changes, edit the
conf/system.properties
file for your project, and
uncomment the following line:
# openidm.fileinstall.enabled=false
This setting also disables the file-based configuration view, which means that IDM reads its configuration only from the repository.
Before you disable automatic polling, you must have started the server at least once to ensure that the configuration has been loaded into the repository. Be aware, if automatic polling is enabled, IDM immediately uses changes to scripts called from a JSON configuration file.
When your configuration is complete, you can disable writes to configuration
files. To do so, add the following line to the
conf/config.properties
file for your project:
felix.fileinstall.enableConfigSave=false
7.4.3. Communicating Through a Proxy Server
To set up IDM to communicate through a proxy server, you can use JVM parameters that identify the proxy host system, and the IDM port number.
If you've configured IDM behind a proxy server, include JVM properties from the following table, in the IDM startup script:
JVM Property | Example Values | Description |
---|---|---|
-Dhttps.proxyHost | proxy.example.com, 192.168.0.1 | Hostname or IP address of the proxy server |
-Dhttps.proxyPort | 8443, 9443 | Port number used by IDM |
If an insecure port is acceptable, you can also use the
-Dhttp.proxyHost
and -Dhttp.proxyPort
options. You can add these JVM proxy properties to the value of
OPENIDM_OPTS
in your startup script
(startup.sh
or startup.bat
):
# Only set OPENIDM_OPTS if not already set [ -z "$OPENIDM_OPTS" ] && OPENIDM_OPTS="-Xmx1024m -Xms1024m -Dhttps.proxyHost=localhost -Dhttps.proxyPort=8443"
7.5. Configuring the Server Over REST
IDM exposes configuration objects under the
/openidm/config
context path.
To list the configuration on the local host, perform a GET request on
http://localhost:8080/openidm/config
.
The following REST call includes excerpts of the default configuration for
an IDM instance started with the sync-with-csv
sample:
$ curl \ --request GET \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ http://localhost:8080/openidm/config { "_id": "", "configurations": [ { "_id": "router", "pid": "router", "factoryPid": null }, { "_id": "info/login", "pid": "info.f01fc3ed-5871-408d-a5f0-bef00ccc4c8f", "factoryPid": "info" }, { "_id": "provisioner.openicf/csvfile", "pid": "provisioner.openicf.9009f4a1-ea47-4227-94e6-69c345864ba7", "factoryPid": "provisioner.openicf" }, { "_id": "endpoint/usernotifications", "pid": "endpoint.e2751afc-d169-4a23-a88e-7211d340bccb", "factoryPid": "endpoint" }, ... ] }
Single instance configuration objects are located under
openidm/config/object-name
.
The following example shows the audit
configuration of the
sync-with-csv
. The output has been cropped for legibility:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/audit" { "_id": "audit", "auditServiceConfig": { "handlerForQueries": "json", "availableAuditEventHandlers": [ "org.forgerock.audit.handlers.csv.CsvAuditEventHandler", "org.forgerock.audit.handlers.elasticsearch.ElasticsearchAuditEventHandler", "org.forgerock.audit.handlers.jms.JmsAuditEventHandler", "org.forgerock.audit.handlers.json.JsonAuditEventHandler", "org.forgerock.audit.handlers.json.stdout.JsonStdoutAuditEventHandler", "org.forgerock.openidm.audit.impl.RepositoryAuditEventHandler", "org.forgerock.openidm.audit.impl.RouterAuditEventHandler", "org.forgerock.audit.handlers.splunk.SplunkAuditEventHandler", "org.forgerock.audit.handlers.syslog.SyslogAuditEventHandler" ], "filterPolicies": { "value": { "excludeIf": [ "/access/http/request/cookies/&{com.iplanet.am.cookie.name}", "/access/http/request/cookies/session-jwt", "/access/http/request/headers/&{com.sun.identity.auth.cookieName}", "/access/http/request/headers/&{com.iplanet.am.cookie.name}", "/access/http/request/headers/accept-encoding", "/access/http/request/headers/accept-language", "/access/http/request/headers/Authorization", "/access/http/request/headers/cache-control", "/access/http/request/headers/connection", "/access/http/request/headers/content-length", "/access/http/request/headers/content-type", "/access/http/request/headers/proxy-authorization", "/access/http/request/headers/X-OpenAM-Password", "/access/http/request/headers/X-OpenIDM-Password", "/access/http/request/queryParameters/access_token", "/access/http/request/queryParameters/IDToken1", "/access/http/request/queryParameters/id_token_hint", "/access/http/request/queryParameters/Login.Token1", "/access/http/request/queryParameters/redirect_uri", "/access/http/request/queryParameters/requester", "/access/http/request/queryParameters/sessionUpgradeSSOTokenId", "/access/http/request/queryParameters/tokenId", "/access/http/response/headers/Authorization", "/access/http/response/headers/Set-Cookie", "/access/http/response/headers/X-OpenIDM-Password" ], "includeIf": [] } }, "caseInsensitiveFields": [ "/access/http/request/headers", "/access/http/response/headers" ] }, "eventHandlers": [ { "class": "org.forgerock.audit.handlers.json.JsonAuditEventHandler", "config": { "name": "json", "logDirectory": "&{idm.data.dir}/audit", "buffering": { "maxSize": 100000, "writeInterval": "100 millis" }, "topics": [ "access", "activity", "recon", "sync", "authentication", "config" ] } } ... ], "eventTopics": { ... }, "exceptionFormatter": { "type": "text/javascript", "file": "bin/defaults/script/audit/stacktraceFormatter.js" } }
Multiple instance configuration objects are found under
openidm/config/object-name/instance-name
.
The following example shows the configuration for the CSV connector shown in
the sync-with-csv
sample. The output has been cropped for
legibility:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/provisioner.openicf/csvfile" { "_id": "provisioner.openicf/csvfile", "connectorRef": { "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.csvfile-connector", "bundleVersion": "[1.5.19.0,1.6.0.0)", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.csvfile.CSVFileConnector" }, "poolConfigOption": { "maxObjects": 10, "maxIdle": 10, "maxWait": 150000, "minEvictableIdleTimeMillis": 120000, "minIdle": 1 }, "operationTimeout": { "CREATE": -1, "VALIDATE": -1, "TEST": -1, "SCRIPT_ON_CONNECTOR": -1, "SCHEMA": -1, "DELETE": -1, "UPDATE": -1, "SYNC": -1, "AUTHENTICATE": -1, "GET": -1, "SCRIPT_ON_RESOURCE": -1, "SEARCH": -1 }, "configurationProperties": { "csvFile": "&{idm.instance.dir}/data/csvConnectorData.csv" }, "resultsHandlerConfig": { "enableAttributesToGetSearchResultsHandler": true }, "syncFailureHandler": { "maxRetries": 5, "postRetryAction": "logged-ignore" }, "objectTypes": { ... }, "operationOptions": {} }
You can change the configuration over REST by using an HTTP PUT or HTTP PATCH request to modify the required configuration object.
The following example uses a PUT request to modify the configuration of the scheduler service, increasing the maximum number of threads that are available for the concurrent execution of scheduled tasks:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request PUT \ --data '{ "threadPool": { "threadCount": 20 }, "scheduler": { "executePersistentSchedules": {"$bool" : "&{openidm.scheduler.execute.persistent.schedules}" } }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/scheduler" { "_id": "scheduler", "threadPool": { "threadCount": 20 }, "scheduler": { "executePersistentSchedules": { "$bool": "&{openidm.scheduler.execute.persistent.schedules}" } } }
The following example uses a PATCH request to reset the number of threads to their original value.
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request PATCH \ --data '[ { "operation" : "replace", "field" : "/threadPool/threadCount", "value" : 10 } ]' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/scheduler" { "_id": "scheduler", "threadPool": { "threadCount": 10 }, "scheduler": { "executePersistentSchedules": { "$bool": "&{openidm.scheduler.execute.persistent.schedules}" } } }
Note
Multi-version concurrency control (MVCC) is not supported for configuration objects so you do not need to specify a revision during updates to the configuration, and no revision is returned in the output.
For more information about using the REST API to update objects, see "REST API Reference".
7.6. Using Property Value Substitution
In an environment where you have more than one IDM instance, you might require a configuration that is similar, but not identical, across the different instances.
Property value substitution lets you achieve the following:
Define a configuration that is specific to a single instance, for example, setting the location of the keystore on a particular host.
Define a configuration whose parameters vary between different environments, for example, the URLs and passwords for test, development, and production environments.
Disable certain capabilities on specific nodes. For example, you might want to disable the workflow engine on specific instances.
Property value substitution uses configuration expressions to introduce variables into the server configuration. You set configuration expressions as the values of configuration properties. The effective property values can be evaluated in a number of ways. For more information about property evaluation, see "Expression Evaluation and Order of Precedence".
Configuration expressions have the following characteristics:
To distinguish them from static values, configuration expressions are preceded by an ampersand and enclosed in braces. For example:
&{openidm.port.http}
. The configuration token in the example isopenidm.port.http
. The.
serves as the separator character.You can use a default value in a configuration expression by including it after a vertical bar following the token.
For example, the following expression sets the default HTTP port value to 8080:
&{openidm.port.http|8080}
.With this configuration, the server attempts to substitute
openidm.port.http
with a defined configuration token. If no token definition is found, the server uses the default,8080
.A configuration property can include a mix of static values and expressions.
For example, suppose
hostname
is set tods
. Then&{hostname}.example.com
evaluates tods.example.com
.Configuration token evaluation is recursive.
For example, suppose
port
is set to&{port.prefix}389
, andport.prefix
is set to2
. Then&{port}
evaluates to2389
.
You can define nested properties (that is a property definition within another property definition) and you can combine system properties, boot properties, and environment variables.
Important
Property substitution is not available for any configuration not processed by the
IDM backend, such as ui-themeconfig
or any user-supplied configuration.
7.6.1. Expression Evaluation and Order of Precedence
At server startup, expression resolvers evaluate property values to determine the effective configuration. You must define expression values before you start the IDM server that uses them.
When configuration tokens are resolved, the result is always a string.
However, you can coerce the output type of the
evaluated token to match the type that is required by the property.
Ultimately, the expression must return the appropriate data type for the
configuration property. For example, the port
property
takes an integer. If you set it using an expression, the result of the
evaluated expression must be an integer. If the type is wrong, the server
fails to start due to a syntax error. For more information about data type
coercion, see "Transforming Data Types".
Expression resolvers can obtain values from the following sources:
Environment variables
You set an environment variable to hold the property value.
For example:
export OPENIDM_PORT_HTTP=8080
The environment variable name must be composed of uppercase characters and underscores. The name maps to the expression token as follows:
Uppercase characters are lower cased.
Underscores,
_
, are replaced with.
characters.
In other words, the value of
OPENIDM_PORT_HTTP
replaces&{openidm.port.http}
in the server configuration.Java system properties
You set a Java system property to hold the value.
Java system property names must match expression tokens exactly. In other words, the value of the
openidm.repo.port
system property replaces&{openidm.repo.port}
in the server configuration.Java system properties can be set in a number of ways. One way of setting system properties for IDM servers is to pass them through the
OPENIDM_OPTS
environment variable.For example:
export OPENIDM_OPTS="-Dopenidm.repo.port=3306"
System properties can also be declared in your project's
conf/system.properties
.The following example uses property value substitution with a standard system property. The example modifies the audit configuration, changing the
audit.json
file to redirect JSON audit logs to the user's home directory. Theuser.home
property is a default Java System property:"eventHandlers" : [ { "class" : "org.forgerock.audit.handlers.json.JsonAuditEventHandler", "config" : { "name" : "json", "logDirectory" : "&{user.home}/audit", ... } }, ...
Expression files
You set a key in a
.json
or.properties
file to hold the value. To use an expression file, set theIDM_ENVCONFIG_DIRS
environment variable, or theidm.envconfig.dirs
Java system property as described below. By default, IDM setsidm.envconfig.dirs
to&{idm.install.dir}/resolver/
.The default property resolver file in IDM is
resolver/boot.properties
but you can specify additional files that might hold property values.Keys in
.properties
files must match expression tokens exactly. In other words, the value of theopenidm.repo.port
key replaces&{openidm.repo.port}
in the server configuration.The following example expression properties file sets the repository port:
openidm.repo.port=1389
JSON expression files can contain nested objects.
JSON field names map to expression tokens as follows:
The JSON path name matches the expression token.
The
.
character serves as the JSON path separator character.
The following example JSON expression file uses property value substitution to set the host in the LDAP connector configuration:
{ "openidm" : { "provisioner" : { "ldap" : { "host" : "ds.example.com" } } } } }
To substitute this value in the configuration, the LDAP provisioner file would include the following:
{ ... "configurationProperties" : { "host" : &{openidm.provisioner.ldap.host|localhost}, ... } }
If the server does not find a configuration token for the host name, it substitutes the default (
localhost
).To use expression files, set the environment variable,
IDM_ENVCONFIG_DIRS
, or the Java system property,idm.envconfig.dirs
, to a comma-separated list of the directories containing the expression files.When reading these files, the server browses the directories in the order specified. It reads all the files with
.json
and.properties
extensions, and attempts to use them to evaluate expression tokens.For example, if you define
idm.envconfig.dirs=/directory1,/directory2
and a configuration token is defined in bothdirectory1
anddirectory2
, the resolved value will be the value defined indirectory1
. If the configuration token is defined only indirectory2
, the resolved value will be the value defined indirectory2
.Note the following constraints when using expression files:
Although IDM scans the directories in a specified order, within a directory IDM scans the files in a nondeterministic order.
IDM does not scan subdirectories.
Do not define the same configuration token more than once in a file.
If you define the same property twice in the same file, one definition will be used and the other will be ignored. The server will not throw an error, but because files are scanned in a nondeterministic order, you have no way of knowing which value will be used.
You cannot define the same configuration token in more than one file in a single directory. The server generates an error in this case.
Important
This constraint implies that you cannot have backup
.properties
and.json
files, in a single directory if they define the same tokens.If the same token occurs once in several files that are located in different directories, IDM uses the first value that is read.
Framework configuration properties
You can use the
conf/config.properties
file to override values used by the OSGI framework.Configuration files
All the properties declared in the
.json
files in your project'sconf/
directory.
The preceding list reflects the order of precedence:
Environment variables override system properties, default token settings, and settings in expression files.
System properties override default token settings, and any settings in expression files.
Default token settings.
If
IDM_ENVCONFIG_DIRS
oridm.envconfig.dirs
is set, the server uses the settings found in expression files.Framework configuration properties
Hardcoded property values
7.6.2. Transforming Data Types
When configuration tokens are resolved, the result is always a string. However, you can transform the output type of the evaluated token to match the type that is required by the property.
The following example JSON expression file sets the value of the port in the LDAP connector configuration:
{ "openidm" : { "provisioner" : { "ldap" : { "port" : 6389 } } } }
When this expression is evaluated, the port would be evaluated as a
string
value, which would cause an error. To coerce the
port value to an integer, you would substitute the value in the LDAP
provisioner file as follows:
{ ... "configurationProperties" : { "port" : { "$int" : "&{openidm.provisioner.ldap.port|1389}", ... } }
With this configuration, the server evaluates the LDAP port property to the
integer 6389
. If the server does not find a configuration
token for the port, it substitutes the default (1389
).
The following coercion types are supported:
integer (
$int
)number (
$number
)This type can coerce integers, doubles, longs, and floats.
boolean (
$bool
)array (
$array
)object (
$object
)This type can coerce a JSON object such as an encrypted password.
decodeBase64 (
$base64:decode
)Transforms a base64-encoded string into a decoded string.
encodeBase64 (
$base64:encode
)Transforms a string into a base64-encoded string.
7.6.3. Limitations of Property Value Substitution
The work you've done to set up property value substitution is limited; different rules apply in the following areas:
7.6.3.1. Property Value Substitution in the Admin UI
Support for property value substitution in the Admin UI is limited to the following categories:
String substitution, where
&{some.property|DefaultValue}
Number and integer substitution, including:
"$number" : "&{openidm.port|1234}"
"$int" : "&{openidm.port|5678}"
Base64 substitution, such as:
"$base64:decode" : "&{openidm.felix.web.console.password|YWRtaW4=}"
Cryptographic substitution, where for passwords and client secrets, IDM substitutes
"********"
for$crypto
7.6.3.2. Property Value Substitution for Connectors
You cannot use property substitution for connector reference
(connectorRef
) properties. For example, the following
configuration would not be valid:
"connectorRef" : { "connectorName" : "&{connectorName}", "bundleName" : "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.ldap-connector", "bundleVersion" : "&{LDAP.BundleVersion}" ... }
The "connectorName"
must be the precise string from the
connector configuration. If you need to specify multiple connector version
numbers, use a range of versions, for example:
"connectorRef" : { "connectorName" : "org.identityconnectors.ldap.LdapConnector", "bundleName" : "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.ldap-connector", "bundleVersion" : "[1.5.19.0,1.6.0.0)", ... }
7.6.3.3. Property Value Substitution and the Repository
Configuration fields that use property substitution are stored in the
repository as variables. You'll need to store the actual values of each
variable in *.properties
files.
You can use different *.properties
files to vary the
configuration for multiple nodes in a cluster.
The properties in the following table can be set through environment variables and more. They're evaluated during the IDM start process, as defined:
Variable | Description | Environment Variables | System Variables | boot.properties |
---|---|---|---|---|
idm.install.dir | Directory of files from unpacked IDM binary | X | X | X |
idm.data.dir | Working location directory | X | X | X |
idm.instance.dir | Project directory with IDM configuration files | X | X | X |
idm.envconfig.dirs | Directory with environment files, including boot.properties | X | X |
In contrast, configuration properties that are explicitly set in
project-dir/conf/*.json
files are stored in the
repository. You can manage these configuration objects by using the REST
interface or by using the JSON files themselves. Most aspects of the
configuration can also be managed by using the Admin UI, as described in
"Configuring the Server from the Admin UI".
You can access configuration properties in scripts using
identityServer.getProperty()
. For more information, see
"The identityServer
Variable".
7.7. Setting the Script Configuration
The script configuration file (conf/script.json
)
lets you modify the parameters that are used when compiling,
debugging, and running JavaScript and Groovy scripts.
The default script.json
file includes the following
parameters:
- properties
Any custom properties that should be provided to the script engine.
- ECMAScript
Specifies JavaScript debug and compile options. JavaScript is an ECMAScript language.
javascript.debug
- the JavaScript debugging configuration. By default this is set to the value of theopenidm.script.javascript.debug
property in IDM'sresolver/boot.properties
file.javascript.recompile.minimumInterval
- minimum time after which a script can be recompiled.The default value is
60000
, or 60 seconds. This means that any changes made to scripts will not get picked up for up to 60 seconds. If you are developing scripts, reduce this parameter to around100
(100 milliseconds).If you set the
javascript.recompile.minimumInterval
to-1
, or remove this property from thescript.json
file, IDM does not poll JavaScript files to check for changes.
- Groovy
Specifies compilation and debugging options related to Groovy scripts. Many of these options are commented out in the default script configuration file. Remove the comments to set these properties:
groovy.warnings
- the log level for Groovy scripts. Possible values arenone
,likely
,possible
, andparanoia
.groovy.source.encoding
- the encoding format for Groovy scripts. Possible values areUTF-8
andUS-ASCII
.groovy.target.directory
- the directory to which compiled Groovy classes will be output. The default directory isinstall-dir/classes
.groovy.target.bytecode
- the bytecode version that is used to compile Groovy scripts. The default version is1.5
.groovy.classpath
- the directory in which the compiler should look for compiled classes. The default classpath isinstall-dir/lib
.To call an external library from a Groovy script, you must specify the complete path to the .jar file or files, as a value of this property. For example:
"groovy.classpath" : "/&{idm.install.dir}/lib/http-builder-0.7.1.jar: /&{idm.install.dir}/lib/json-lib-2.3-jdk15.jar: /&{idm.install.dir}/lib/xml-resolver-1.2.jar: /&{idm.install.dir}/lib/commons-collections-3.2.1.jar",
Note
If you're deploying on Microsoft Windows, use a semicolon (
;
) instead of a colon to separate directories in thegroovy.classpath
.groovy.output.verbose
- specifies the verbosity of stack traces. Boolean,true
orfalse
.groovy.output.debug
- specifies whether debugging messages are output. Boolean,true
orfalse
.groovy.errors.tolerance
- sets the number of non-fatal errors that can occur before a compilation is aborted. The default is10
errors.groovy.script.extension
- specifies the file extension for Groovy scripts. The default is.groovy
.groovy.script.base
- defines the base class for Groovy scripts. By default any class extendsgroovy.lang.Script
.groovy.recompile
- indicates whether scripts can be recompiled. Boolean,true
orfalse
, with defaulttrue
.groovy.recompile.minimumInterval
- sets the minimum time between which Groovy scripts can be recompiled.The default value is
60000
, or 60 seconds. This means that any changes made to scripts will not get picked up for up to 60 seconds. If you are developing scripts, reduce this parameter to around100
(100 milliseconds).groovy.target.indy
- specifies whether a Groovy indy test can be used. Boolean,true
orfalse
, with defaulttrue
.groovy.disabled.global.ast.transformations
- specifies a list of disabled Abstract Syntax Transformations (ASTs).
- sources
Specifies the locations in which IDM expects to find JavaScript and Groovy scripts that are referenced in the configuration.
The following excerpt of the
script.json
file shows the default locations:... "sources" : { "default" : { "directory" : "&{idm.install.dir}/bin/defaults/script" }, "install" : { "directory" : "&{idm.install.dir}" }, "project" : { "directory" : "&{idm.instance.dir}" }, "project-script" : { "directory" : "&{idm.instance.dir}/script" } ...
Note
The order in which locations are listed in the
sources
property is important. Scripts are loaded from the bottom up in this list, that is, scripts found in the last location on the list are loaded first.
Note
By default, debug information (such as file name and line number) is
excluded from JavaScript exceptions. To troubleshoot script exceptions, you
can include debug information by changing the following setting to
true
in IDM's
resolver/boot.properties
file:
javascript.exception.debug.info=false
Including debug information in a production environment is not recommended.
7.8. Calling a Script From a Configuration File
You can call a script from within a configuration file by providing the script source, or by referencing a file that contains the script source. For example:
{ "type" : "text/javascript", "source": string }
or
{ "type" : "text/javascript", "file" : file location }
- type
string, required
Specifies the type of script to be executed. Supported types include
text/javascript
, andgroovy
.- source
string, required if
file
is not specifiedSpecifies the source code of the script to be executed.
- file
string, required if
source
is not specifiedSpecifies the file containing the source code of the script to execute.
The file path must be relative to the project-dir. Full file paths are not supported.
The following sample excerpts from configuration files indicate how scripts can be called.
The following example (included in the sync.json
file)
returns true
if the employeeType
is
equal to external
, otherwise returns
false
. This script can be useful during reconciliation to
establish whether a target object should be included in the reconciliation
process, or should be ignored:
"validTarget": { "type" : "text/javascript", "source": "target.employeeType == 'external'" }
The following example (included in the sync.json
file)
sets the __PASSWORD__
attribute to
defaultpwd
when IDM creates a target object:
"onCreate" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "source": "target.__PASSWORD__ = 'defaultpwd'" }
The following example (included in the router.json
file) shows a trigger to create Solaris home directories using a script. The
script is located in the file,
project-dir/script/createUnixHomeDir.js
:
{ "filters" : [ { "pattern" : "^system/solaris/account$", "methods" : [ "create" ], "onResponse" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "file" : "script/createUnixHomeDir.js" } } ] }
Often, script files are reused in different contexts. You can pass variables to your scripts to provide these contextual details at runtime. You pass variables to the scripts that are referenced in configuration files by declaring the variable name in the script reference.
The following example of a scheduled task configuration calls a script
named triggerEmailNotification.js
. The example sets the
sender and recipient of the email in the schedule configuration, rather
than in the script itself:
{ "enabled" : true, "type" : "cron", "schedule" : "0 0/1 * * * ?", "persisted" : true, "invokeService" : "script", "invokeContext" : { "script": { "type" : "text/javascript", "file" : "script/triggerEmailNotification.js", "fromSender" : "admin@example.com", "toEmail" : "user@example.com" } } }
Tip
In general, you should namespace variables passed into scripts with the
globals
map. Passing variables in this way prevents
collisions with the top-level reserved words for script maps, such as
file
, source
, and
type
. The following example uses the
globals
map to namespace the variables passed in the
previous example.
"script": { "type" : "text/javascript", "file" : "script/triggerEmailNotification.js", "globals" : { "fromSender" : "admin@example.com", "toEmail" : "user@example.com" } }
Script variables are not necessarily simple key:value
pairs. A script variable can be any arbitrarily complex JSON object.
7.9. Configuring HTTP Clients
Several IDM modules, such as the external REST service and identity provider service, need to make HTTP(S) requests to external systems.
HTTP client settings can be configured through any expression resolver
(in resolver/boot.properties
, environment variables, or
Java system properties). Configuration for specific clients can be set in
that client's JSON configuration file. For example
conf/external.rest.json
configures the external REST
service and properties set there override the expression resolvers. For more
information on property resolution, see "Expression Evaluation and Order of Precedence".
You can set the following properties for HTTP clients:
openidm.http.client.sslAlgorithm
The cipher to be used when making SSL/TLS connections, for example,
AES
,CBC
, orPKCS5Padding
. Defaults to the system SSL algorithm.openidm.http.client.socketTimeout
The TCP socket timeout, in seconds, when waiting for HTTP responses. The default timeout is 10 seconds.
openidm.http.client.connectionTimeout
The TCP connection timeout for new HTTP connections, in seconds. The default timeout is 10 seconds.
openidm.http.client.reuseConnections
(true or false)Specifies whether HTTP connections should be kept alive and reused for additional requests. By default, connections will be reused if possible.
openidm.http.client.retryRequests
(true or false)Specifies whether requests should be retried if a failure is detected. By default requests will be retried.
openidm.http.client.maxConnections
(integer)The maximum number of connections that should be pooled by the HTTP client. At most
64
connections will be pooled by default.openidm.http.client.hostnameVerifier
(string)Specifies whether the client should check that the hostname to which it has connected is allowed by the certificate that is presented by the server.
The property can take the following values:
STRICT
- hostnames are validatedALLOW_ALL
- the external REST service does not attempt to match the URL hostname to the SSL certificate Common Name, as part of its validation process
If you do not set this property, the behavior is to validate hostnames (the equivalent of setting
"hostnameVerifier": "STRICT"
). In production environments, you should set this property toSTRICT
.openidm.http.client.proxy.uri
Specifies that the client should make its HTTP(S) requests through the specified proxy server.
openidm.http.client.proxy.userName
The username of the account for the specified proxy.
openidm.http.client.proxy.password
The password of the account for the specified proxy.
openidm.http.client.proxy.useSystem
(true or false)If
true
>, specifies a system-wide proxy with the JVM system properties,http.proxyHost
,http.proxyPort
, and (optionally)http.nonProxyHosts
.If
openidm.http.client.proxy.uri
is set, and not empty, that setting overrides the system proxy setting.
Chapter 8. Accessing Data Objects
IDM supports a variety of objects that can be addressed via a URL or URI. You can access data objects by using scripts (through the Resource API) or by using direct HTTP calls (through the REST API).
The following sections describe these two methods of accessing data objects, and provide information on constructing and calling data queries.
8.1. Accessing Data Objects By Using Scripts
IDM's uniform programming model means that all objects are queried and manipulated in the same way, using the Resource API. The URL or URI that is used to identify the target object for an operation depends on the object type. For an explanation of object types, see "Data Models and Objects Reference". For more information about scripts and the objects available to scripts, see "Scripting Reference".
You can use the Resource API to obtain managed, system, configuration, and repository objects, as follows:
val = openidm.read("managed/organization/mysampleorg") val = openidm.read("system/mysystem/account") val = openidm.read("config/custom/mylookuptable") val = openidm.read("repo/custom/mylookuptable")
For information about constructing an object ID, see "URI Scheme".
You can update entire objects with the update()
function,
as follows:
openidm.update("managed/organization/mysampleorg", rev, object) openidm.update("system/mysystem/account", rev, object)
You can apply a partial update to a managed or system object by using the
patch()
function:
openidm.patch("managed/organization/mysampleorg", rev, value)
The create()
, delete()
, and
query()
functions work the same way.
8.2. Accessing Data Objects By Using the REST API
IDM provides RESTful access to data objects through the ForgeRock Common REST API. To access objects over REST, you can use a browser-based REST client, such as the Simple REST Client for Chrome, or RESTClient for Firefox. Alternatively you can use the curl command-line utility.
For a comprehensive overview of the REST API, see "REST API Reference".
To obtain a managed object through the REST API, depending on your security
settings and authentication configuration, perform an HTTP GET on the
corresponding URL, for example
http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/organization/mysampleorg
.
By default, the HTTP GET returns a JSON representation of the object.
In general, you can map any HTTP request to the corresponding
openidm.method
call. The following example shows how the
parameters provided in an openidm.query
request correspond
with the key-value pairs that you would include in a similar HTTP GET request:
Reading an object using the Resource API:
openidm.query("managed/user", { "_queryId": "query-all" }, ["userName","sn"])
Reading an object using the REST API:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryId=query-all&_fields=userName,sn"
8.3. Defining and Calling Queries
An advanced query model lets you define queries and to call them over the REST or Resource API. Three types of queries are supported, on both managed, and system objects:
Common filter expressions
Parameterized, or predefined queries
Native query expressions
Each of these mechanisms is discussed in the following sections.
Tip
For limits on queries in progressive profiling, see "Custom Progressive Profile Conditions".
8.3.1. Common Filter Expressions
The ForgeRock REST API defines common filter expressions that enable you to form arbitrary queries using a number of supported filter operations. This query capability is the standard way to query data if no predefined query exists, and is supported for all managed and system objects.
Common filter expressions are useful in that they do not require knowledge of how the object is stored and do not require additions to the repository configuration.
Common filter expressions are called with the
_queryFilter
keyword. The following example uses a common
filter expression to retrieve managed user objects whose user name is Smith:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=userName+eq+"smith"'
The filter is URL encoded in this example. The corresponding filter using the resource API would be:
openidm.query("managed/user", { "_queryFilter" : '/userName eq "smith"' });
Note that, this JavaScript invocation is internal and is not subject to the same URL-encoding requirements that a GET request would be. Also, because JavaScript supports the use of single quotes, it is not necessary to escape the double quotes in this example.
For a list of supported filter operations, see "Constructing Queries".
Note
Using common filter expressions to retrieve values from arrays is currently not supported. If you need to search within an array, set up a predefined (parameterized) query in your repository configuration. For more information, see "Parameterized Queries".
8.3.2. Parameterized Queries
Managed objects in the supported repositories can be accessed using a
parameterized query mechanism. Parameterized queries on repositories are
defined in the repository configuration (repo.*.json
)
and are called by their _queryId
.
Parameterized queries provide precise control over the query that is executed. Such control might be useful for tuning, or for performing database operations such as aggregation (which is not possible with a common filter expression.)
Parameterized queries provide security and portability for the query call signature, regardless of the backend implementation. Queries that are exposed over the REST interface must be parameterized queries to guard against injection attacks and other misuse. Queries on the officially supported repositories have been reviewed and hardened against injection attacks.
For system objects, support for parameterized queries is restricted to
_queryId=query-all-ids
. There is currently no support for
user-defined parameterized queries on system objects. Typically,
parameterized queries on system objects are not called directly over the
REST interface, but are issued from internal calls, such as correlation
queries.
A typical query definition is as follows:
"query-all-ids" : "SELECT objectid FROM ${_dbSchema}.${_table} LIMIT ${int:_pageSize} OFFSET ${int:_pagedResultsOffset}",
To call this query, you would reference its ID, as follows:
?_queryId=query-all-ids
The following example calls query-all-ids
over the REST
interface:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryId=query-all-ids"
Note
In repo.jdbc.json
, the queries
configuration object has a property,
validInRelationshipQuery
, which is an array specifying
the query IDs of queries that make use of relationships. If you create
additional queries that you expect to use as part of a relationship
query, be sure to add the query ID to this array. If no query IDs are
specified or the property is missing, relationship information will not
be returned in query results, even if requested. For more information
about relationships, see "Managing Relationships Between Objects".
8.3.3. Native Query Expressions
Native query expressions are supported for all managed objects and system objects, and can be called directly, rather than being defined in the repository configuration.
Native queries are intended specifically for internal callers, such as custom scripts, and should be used only in situations where the common filter or parameterized query facilities are insufficient. For example, native queries are useful if the query needs to be generated dynamically.
The query expression is specific to the target resource. For repositories, queries use the native language of the underlying data store. For system objects that are backed by ICF connectors, queries use the applicable query language of the system resource.
Important
Native query expressions are not supported with the default DS repository.
Native queries on the repository are made using the
_queryExpression
keyword. For example:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryExpression=select+*+from+managed_user"
Unless you have specifically enabled native queries over REST, the previous command returns a 403 access denied error message. Native queries are not portable and do not guard against injection attacks. Such query expressions should therefore not be used or made accessible over the REST interface or over HTTP in production environments. They should be used only via the internal Resource API. If you want to enable native queries over REST for development, see "Protecting Sensitive REST Interface URLs".
Alternatively, if you really need to expose native queries over HTTP, in a selective manner, you can design a custom endpoint to wrap such access.
8.3.4. Constructing Queries
The openidm.query
function lets you query managed
and system objects. The query syntax is
openidm.query(id, params)
, where id
specifies the object on which the query should be performed and
params
provides the parameters that are passed to the
query, either _queryFilter
or
_queryId
. For example:
var params = { '_queryFilter' : 'givenName co "' + sourceCriteria + '" or ' + 'sn co "' + sourceCriteria + '"' }; var results = openidm.query("system/ScriptedSQL/account", params)
Over the REST interface, the query filter is specified as
_queryFilter=filter
, for
example:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=userName+eq+"Smith"'
Note the use of double-quotes around the search term:
Smith
. In _queryFilter
expressions, string values must use double-quotes.
Numeric and boolean expressions should not use quotes.
When called over REST, you must URL encode the filter expression. The following examples show the filter expressions using the resource API and the REST API, but do not show the URL encoding, to make them easier to read.
Note that, for generic mappings, any fields that are included in the query
filter (for example userName
in the previous query), must
be explicitly defined as searchable, if you have set
the global searchableDefault
to false. For more
information, see "Improving Generic Mapping Search Performance (JDBC)".
The filter expression is constructed from the
building blocks shown in this section. In these expressions the simplest
json-pointer is a field of the JSON resource,
such as userName
or id
. A JSON pointer
can, however, point to nested elements.
Note
You can also use the negation operator (!) in query
construction. For example, a _queryFilter=!(userName+eq+"jdoe")
query would return every userName
except for
jdoe
.
You can set up query filters with the following expression types:
8.3.4.1. Comparison Expressions
Equal queries (see "Querying Objects That Equal a Specified Value")
Contains queries (see "Querying Objects That Contain a Specified Value")
Starts with queries (see "Querying Objects That Start With a Specified Value")
Less than queries (see "Querying Objects That Are Less Than a Specified Value")
Less than or equal to queries (see "Querying Objects That Are Less Than or Equal to a Specified Value")
Greater than queries (see "Querying Objects That Are Greater Than a Specified Value")
Greater than or equal to queries (see "Querying Objects That Are Greater Than or Equal to a Specified Value")
Note
Certain system endpoints also support EndsWith
and
ContainsAllValues
queries. However, such queries are
not supported for managed objects and have not been
tested with all supported ICF connectors.
8.3.4.1.1. Querying Objects That Equal a Specified Value
This is the associated JSON comparison expression:
json-pointer eq
json-value
.
Consider the following example:
"_queryFilter" : '/givenName eq "Dan"'
The following REST call returns the user name and given name of all
managed users whose first name (givenName
) is "Dan":
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=givenName+eq+"Dan"&_fields=userName,givenName' { "remainingPagedResults": -1, "pagedResultsCookie": null, "resultCount": 3, "result": [ { "givenName": "Dan", "userName": "dlangdon" }, { "givenName": "Dan", "userName": "dcope" }, { "givenName": "Dan", "userName": "dlanoway" } }
8.3.4.1.2. Querying Objects That Contain a Specified Value
This is the associated JSON comparison expression:
json-pointer co
json-value
.
Consider the following example:
"_queryFilter" : '/givenName co "Da"'
The following REST call returns the user name and given name of all
managed users whose first name (givenName
) contains
"Da":
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=givenName+co+"Da"&_fields=userName,givenName' { "remainingPagedResults": -1, "pagedResultsCookie": null, "resultCount": 10, "result": [ { "givenName": "Dave", "userName": "djensen" }, { "givenName": "David", "userName": "dakers" }, { "givenName": "Dan", "userName": "dlangdon" }, { "givenName": "Dan", "userName": "dcope" }, { "givenName": "Dan", "userName": "dlanoway" }, { "givenName": "Daniel", "userName": "dsmith" }, ... }
8.3.4.1.3. Querying Objects That Start With a Specified Value
This is the associated JSON comparison expression:
json-pointer sw
json-value
.
Consider the following example:
"_queryFilter" : '/sn sw "Jen"'
The following REST call returns the user names of all managed users whose
last name (sn
) starts with "Jen":
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=sn+sw+"Jen"&_fields=userName' { "remainingPagedResults": -1, "pagedResultsCookie": null, "resultCount": 4, "result": [ { "userName": "bjensen" }, { "userName": "djensen" }, { "userName": "cjenkins" }, { "userName": "mjennings" } ] }
8.3.4.1.4. Querying Objects That Are Less Than a Specified Value
This is the associated JSON comparison expression:
json-pointer lt json-value
.
Consider the following example:
"_queryFilter" : '/employeeNumber lt 5000'
The following REST call returns the user names of all managed users whose
employeeNumber
is lower than 5000:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=employeeNumber+lt+5000&_fields=userName,employeeNumber' { "remainingPagedResults": -1, "pagedResultsCookie": null, "resultCount": 4999, "result": [ { "employeeNumber": 4907, "userName": "jnorris" }, { "employeeNumber": 4905, "userName": "afrancis" }, { "employeeNumber": 3095, "userName": "twhite" }, { "employeeNumber": 3921, "userName": "abasson" }, { "employeeNumber": 2892, "userName": "dcarter" } ... ] }
8.3.4.1.5. Querying Objects That Are Less Than or Equal to a Specified Value
This is the associated JSON comparison expression:
json-pointer le
json-value
.
Consider the following example:
"_queryFilter" : '/employeeNumber le 5000'
The following REST call returns the user names of all managed users whose
employeeNumber
is 5000 or less:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=employeeNumber+le+5000&_fields=userName,employeeNumber' { "remainingPagedResults": -1, "pagedResultsCookie": null, "resultCount": 5000, "result": [ { "employeeNumber": 4907, "userName": "jnorris" }, { "employeeNumber": 4905, "userName": "afrancis" }, { "employeeNumber": 3095, "userName": "twhite" }, { "employeeNumber": 3921, "userName": "abasson" }, { "employeeNumber": 2892, "userName": "dcarter" } ... ] }
8.3.4.1.6. Querying Objects That Are Greater Than a Specified Value
This is the associated JSON comparison expression:
json-pointer gt
json-value
Consider the following example:
"_queryFilter" : '/employeeNumber gt 5000'
The following REST call returns the user names of all managed users whose
employeeNumber
is higher than 5000:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=employeeNumber+gt+5000&_fields=userName,employeeNumber' { "remainingPagedResults": -1, "pagedResultsCookie": null, "resultCount": 1458, "result": [ { "employeeNumber": 5003, "userName": "agilder" }, { "employeeNumber": 5011, "userName": "bsmith" }, { "employeeNumber": 5034, "userName": "bjensen" }, { "employeeNumber": 5027, "userName": "cclarke" }, { "employeeNumber": 5033, "userName": "scarter" } ... ] }
8.3.4.1.7. Querying Objects That Are Greater Than or Equal to a Specified Value
This is the associated JSON comparison expression:
json-pointer ge
json-value
.
Consider the following example:
"_queryFilter" : '/employeeNumber ge 5000'
The following REST call returns the user names of all managed users whose
employeeNumber
is 5000 or greater:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=employeeNumber+ge+5000&_fields=userName,employeeNumber' { "remainingPagedResults": -1, "pagedResultsCookie": null, "resultCount": 1457, "result": [ { "employeeNumber": 5000, "userName": "agilder" }, { "employeeNumber": 5011, "userName": "bsmith" }, { "employeeNumber": 5034, "userName": "bjensen" }, { "employeeNumber": 5027, "userName": "cclarke" }, { "employeeNumber": 5033, "userName": "scarter" } ... ] }
8.3.4.2. Presence Expressions
The following examples show how you can build filters using a presence
expression, shown as pr
. The presence expression is a
filter that returns all records with a given attribute.
A presence expression filter evaluates to true
when a
json-pointer pr
matches any
object in which the json-pointer is present,
and contains a non-null value. Consider the following expression:
"_queryFilter" : '/mail pr'
The following REST call uses that expression to return the mail addresses
for all managed users with a mail
property:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=mail+pr&_fields=mail' { "remainingPagedResults": -1, "pagedResultsCookie": null, "resultCount": 2, "result": [ { "mail": "jdoe@exampleAD.com" }, { "mail": "bjensen@example.com" } ] }
Depending on the connector, you can apply the presence filter on system
objects. The following query returns the email address of all users in a
CSV file who have the email
attribute in their entries:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/system/csvfile/account?_queryFilter=email+pr&_fields=email' { "result": [ { "_id": "bjensen", "email": "bjensen@example.com" }, { "_id": "scarter", "email": "scarter@example.com" } ], "resultCount": 2, "pagedResultsCookie": "MA%3D%3D", "totalPagedResultsPolicy": "NONE", "totalPagedResults": -1, "remainingPagedResults": -1 }
Not all connectors support the presence filter. In most cases, you can
replicate the behavior of the presence filter with an "equals"
(eq
) query such as _queryFilter=email+eq"*"
8.3.4.3. Literal Expressions
A literal expression is a boolean:
true
matches any object in the resource.false
matches no object in the resource.
For example, you can list the _id
of all managed
objects as follows:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=true&_fields=_id' { "remainingPagedResults": -1, "pagedResultsCookie": null, "resultCount": 2, "result": [ { "_id": "d2e29d5f-0d74-4d04-bcfe-b1daf508ad7c" }, { "_id": "709fed03-897b-4ff0-8a59-6faaa34e3af6" } ] }
8.3.4.4. Complex Expressions
You can combine expressions using the boolean operators and
,
or
, and !
(not). The following
example queries managed user objects located in London, with last name Jensen:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/?_queryFilter=city+eq+"London"+and+sn+eq+"Jensen"&_fields=userName,givenName,sn' { "remainingPagedResults": -1, "pagedResultsCookie": null, "resultCount": 3, "result": [ { "sn": "Jensen", "givenName": "Clive", "userName": "cjensen" }, { "sn": "Jensen", "givenName": "Dave", "userName": "djensen" }, { "sn": "Jensen", "givenName": "Margaret", "userName": "mjensen" } ] }
8.3.5. Paging Query Results
The common filter query mechanism supports paged query results for managed objects, and for some system objects, depending on the system resource. There are two ways to page objects in a query:
Using a cookie based on the value of a specified sort key.
Using an offset that specifies how many records should be skipped before the first result is returned.
These methods are implemented with the following query parameters:
_pagedResultsCookie
Opaque cookie used by the server to keep track of the position in the search results. The format of the cookie is a base-64 encoded version of the value of the unique sort key property. The value of the returned cookie is URL-encoded to prevent values such as
+
from being incorrectly translated.You cannot page results without sorting them (using the
_sortKeys
parameter). If you do not specify a sort key, the_id
of the record is used as the default sort key. At least one of the specified sort key properties must be a unique value property, such as_id
.Tip
For paged searches on generic mappings with the default DS repository, you should sort on the
_id
property, as this is the only property that is stored outside of the JSON blob. If you sort on something other than_id
, the search will incur a performance hit because IDM effectively has to pull the entire result set, and then sort it.The server provides the cookie value on the first request. You should then supply the cookie value in subsequent requests until the server returns a null cookie, meaning that the final page of results has been returned.
The
_pagedResultsCookie
parameter is supported only for filtered queries, that is, when used with the_queryFilter
parameter. You cannot use the_pagedResultsCookie
with a_queryExpression
or a_queryId
.The
_pagedResultsCookie
and_pagedResultsOffset
parameters are mutually exclusive, and cannot be used together.Paged results are enabled only if the
_pageSize
is a non-zero integer._pagedResultsOffset
Specifies the index within the result set of the number of records to be skipped before the first result is returned. The format of the
_pagedResultsOffset
is an integer value. When the value of_pagedResultsOffset
is greater than or equal to 1, the server returns pages, starting after the specified index.This request assumes that the
_pageSize
is set, and not equal to zero.For example, if the result set includes 10 records, the
_pageSize
is 2, and the_pagedResultsOffset
is 6, the server skips the first 6 records, then returns 2 records, 7 and 8. The_remainingPagedResults
value would be 2, the last two records (9 and 10) that have not yet been returned.If the offset points to a page beyond the last of the search results, the result set returned is empty.
_pageSize
An optional parameter indicating that query results should be returned in pages of the specified size. For all paged result requests other than the initial request, a cookie should be provided with the query request.
The default behavior is not to return paged query results. If set, this parameter should be an integer value, greater than zero.
When a
_pageSize
is specified, and non-zero, the server calculates thetotalPagedResults
, in accordance with thetotalPagedResultsPolicy
, and provides the value as part of the response. If a count policy is specified (_totalPagedResultsPolicy=EXACT
, ThetotalPagedResults
returns the total result count. If no count policy is specified in the query, or if_totalPagedResultsPolicy=NONE
, result counting is disabled, and the server returns a value of -1 fortotalPagedResults
. The following example shows a query that requests two results with atotalPagedResultsPolicy
ofEXACT
:$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=true&_pageSize=2&_totalPagedResultsPolicy=EXACT" { "result": [ { "_id": "adonnelly", "_rev": "0", "userName": "adonnelly", "givenName": "Abigail", "sn": "Donnelly", "telephoneNumber": "12345678", "active": "true", "mail": "adonnelly@example.com", "accountStatus": "active", "effectiveRoles": [], "effectiveAssignments": [] }, { "_id": "bjensen", "_rev": "0", "userName": "bjensen", "givenName": "Babs", "sn": "Jensen", "telephoneNumber": "12345678", "active": "true", "mail": "bjensen@example.com", "accountStatus": "active", "effectiveRoles": [], "effectiveAssignments": [] } ], "resultCount": 2, "pagedResultsCookie": "eyIvX2lkIjoiYm11cnJheSJ9", "totalPagedResultsPolicy": "EXACT", "totalPagedResults": 22, "remainingPagedResults": -1 }
The
totalPagedResults
and_remainingPagedResults
parameters are not supported for all queries. Where they are not supported, their returned value is always-1
. In addition, counting query results using these parameters is not currently supported for a ForgeRock Directory Services (DS) repository.Requesting the total result count (with
_totalPagedResultsPolicy=EXACT
) incurs a performance cost on the query.Queries that return large data sets will have a significant impact on heap requirements, particularly if they are run in parallel with other large data requests. To avoid out of memory errors, analyze your data requirements, set the heap configuration appropriately, and modify access controls to restrict requests on large data sets.
8.3.6. Sorting Query Results
For common filter query expressions, you can sort the results of a query
using the _sortKeys
parameter. This parameter takes a
comma-separated list as a value and orders the way in which the JSON result
is returned, based on this list.
The _sortKeys
parameter is not supported for predefined
queries.
Note
When using DS as a repo, pagination using
_pageSize
is recommended if you intend to use
_sortKeys
. If you do not plan to paginate your query,
the data you are querying must at least be indexed in DS.
For more information about how to set up indexes in DS, see
Indexing
Attribute Values in the DS Administration
Guide.
The following query returns all users with the givenName
Dan
, and sorts the results alphabetically, according to
surname (sn
):
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/system/ldap/account?_queryFilter=givenName+eq+"Dan"&_fields=givenName,sn&_sortKeys=sn' { "remainingPagedResults": -1, "pagedResultsCookie": null, "resultCount": 3, "result": [ { "sn": "Cope", "givenName": "Dan" }, { "sn": "Langdon", "givenName": "Dan" }, { "sn": "Lanoway", "givenName": "Dan" } ] }
8.3.7. Recalculating Virtual Property Values in Queries
For managed objects IDM includes an onRetrieve
script hook that lets you recalculate property values when an object
is retrieved as the result of a query. To use the onRetrieve
trigger, the query must include the executeOnRetrieve
parameter, for example:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=sn+eq+"Jensen"&executeOnRetrieve=true'
If a query includes executeOnRetrieve
, the query
recalculates virtual property values, based on the current state of the
system. The result of the query will be the same as a read
on a specific object, because reads always recalculate virtual property
values.
If a query does not include executeOnRetrieve
, the query
returns the virtual properties of an object, based on the value that is
persisted in the repository. Virtual property values are not recalculated.
For performance reasons, executeOnRetrieve
is
false
by default.
8.4. Uploading Files to the Server
IDM provides a generic file upload service that lets you upload
and save files either to the filesystem or to the repository. The service
uses the multipart/form-data
Content-Type to accept file
content, store it, and return that content when it is called over the REST
interface.
To configure the file upload service, add one or more
file-description.json
files
to your project's conf
directory, where
description provides an indication of the purpose
of the upload service. For example, you might create a
file-images.json
configuration file to handle uploading
image files. Each file upload configuration file sets up a separate instance
of the upload service. The description in the
filename also specifies the endpoint at which the file service will be
accessible over REST. In the previous example,
file-images.json
, the service would be accessible at the
endpoint openidm/file/images
.
A sample file upload service configuration file is available in the
/path/to/openidm/samples/example-configurations/conf
directory. The configuration is as follows:
{ "enabled" : true, "fileHandler" : { "type" : file handler type, "root" : directory } }
The service supports two file handlers—file
and repo
. The file handlers are configured as follows:
"type" : "file"
specifies that the uploaded content will be stored in the filesystem. If you use thefile
type, you must specify aroot
property to indicate the directory (relative to the IDM installation directory) in which uploaded content is stored. In the following example, uploaded content is stored in the/path/to/openidm/images
directory:{ "enabled" : true, "fileHandler" : { "type" : "file", "root" : "images" } }
You cannot use the file upload service to access any files outside the configured
root
directory."type" : "repo"
specifies that the uploaded content will be stored in the repository. Theroot
property does not apply to the repository file handler so the configuration is as follows:{ "enabled" : true, "fileHandler" : { "type" : "repo" } }
The file upload service performs a multi-part CREATE operation. Each upload
request includes two --form
options. The first option
indicates that the uploaded file content will be converted to a base
64-encoded string and inserted into the JSON object as a field named
content
with the following structure:
{ "content" : { "$ref" : "cid:filename#content" } }
The second --form
option specifies the file to be
uploaded, and the file type. The request loads the entire file into memory,
so file size will be constrained by available memory.
You can upload any mime type using this service, however, you must specify a
whitelist of mime types that can be retrieved over REST.
If you specify a mime type that is not in the whitelist during retrieval of
the file, the response content defaults to application/json
.
To configure the list of supported mime types, specify a comma-separated list
as the value of the
org.forgerock.json.resource.http.safemimetypes
property in
the conf/system.properties
file. For example:
org.forgerock.json.resource.http.safemimetypes=application/json,application/pkix-cert,application/x-pem-file
You can only select from the following list:
image/*
|
text/plain
|
text/css
|
application/json
|
application/pkix-cert
|
application/x-pem-file
|
The following request uploads an image (PNG) file named
test.png
to the filesystem. The file handler
configuration file provides the REST endpoint. In this case
openidm/file/images
references the configuration in the
file-images.json
file:
curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --form 'json={"content" : {"$ref" : "cid:test#content"}};type=application/json' \ --form 'test=@test.png;type=image/png' \ --request PUT \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/file/images/test.png" { "_id": "test.png", "content": "aW1hZ2UvcG5n" }
Note that the resource ID is derived directly from the upload filename—system-generated IDs are not supported.
The following request uploads a stylesheet (css
) file
named test.css
to the same location on the filesystem as
the previous request:
curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --form 'json={"content" : {"$ref" : "cid:test#content"}};type=application/json' \ --form '@test.css;type=text/css' \ --request PUT \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/file/images/test.css" { "_id": "test.css", "content": "aW1hZ2UvY3N2" }
Files uploaded to the repository are stored as JSON objects in the
openidm.files
table. The following request uploads the
same image (PNG) file (test.png
) to the repository:
curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --form 'json={"content" : {"$ref" : "cid:test#content"}};type=application/json' \ --form 'test=@test.png;type=image/png' \ --request PUT \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/file/repo/test.png" { "_id": "test.png", "_rev": "00000000970b4454", "content": "aW1hZ2UvcG5n" }
Note that the preceding example assumes the following file upload service
configuration (in file-repo.json
:
{ "enabled" : true, "fileHandler" : { "type" : "repo" } }
The file type is not stored with the file. By default, a READ on uploaded file content returns the content as a base 64-encoded string within the JSON object. For example:
curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/file/repo/test.png" { "_id": "test.png", "_rev": "00000000970b4454", "content": "aW1hZ2UvcG5n" }
Your client can retrieve the file in the correct format by specifying the
content
and mimeType
parameters in the
read request. For example:
curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/file/repo/test.css?_fields=content&_mimeType=text/css"
To delete uploaded content, send a DELETE request as follows:
curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request DELETE \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/file/repo/test.png" { "_id": "test.png", "_rev": "00000000970b4454", "content": "aW1hZ2UvcG5n" }
Chapter 9. Working With Managed Objects
IDM provides a default schema for typical managed object types, such as users and roles, but does not control the structure of objects that you store in the repository. You can modify or extend the schema for the default object types, and you can set up a new managed object type for any item that can be collected in a data set. For example, with the right schema, you can set up any device associated with the Internet of Things (IoT).
This chapter describes how to work with the default managed object types and how to create new object types as required by your deployment. For more information about the IDM object model, see "Data Models and Objects Reference".
9.1. Defining the Managed Object Schema
Managed objects and their properties are defined in your project's
conf/managed.json
file. The schema defined in this file
is not a comprehensive list of all the properties that can be stored in the
managed object repository. If you use a generic object mapping, you can
create a managed object with any arbitrary property, and that property will
be stored in the repository. However, if you create an object with properties
that are not defined in conf/managed.json
, those
properties will not be visible in the UI. In addition, you will not be able
configure the "sub-properties" that are described in the following section.
Important
The IDM Admin UI depends on the presence of specific core schema
elements, such as users, roles, and assignments (and the default properties
nested within them). If you remove such schema elements, and you use the
Admin UI to configure IDM, you must modify the Admin UI code
accordingly. For example, if you remove the entire assignment
object from conf/managed.json
, the UI will throw exceptions
wherever it queries this schema element.
For explicit object mappings, the schema must be mapped to tables and columns in the JDBC database or to organizational units in DS.
For more information about explicit and generic object mappings, see "Using Generic and Explicit Object Mappings".
9.2. Creating and Modifying Managed Object Types
If the managed object types provided in the default configuration are not sufficient for your deployment, you can create any number of new managed object types.
The easiest way to create a new managed object type is to use the Admin UI, as follows:
Navigate to the Admin UI URL (
https://localhost:8443/admin
) then select Configure > Managed Objects > New Managed Object.Enter a name and readable title for the new managed object. The readable title controls how that object will be referred to in the UI. Optionally, specify an icon that will be displayed for that object type, and a description.
Click Save.
On the Properties tab, specify the schema for the object type, that is, the properties that make up the object.
On the Scripts tab, specify any scripts that should be applied on various events associated with that object type, for example, when an object of that type is created, updated or deleted.
You can also create a new managed object type by adding its configuration,
in JSON, to your project's conf/managed.json
file. The following excerpt of the managed.json
file
shows the configuration of a "Phone" object, that was created through the UI.
{ "name": "Phone", "schema": { "$schema": "http://forgerock.org/json-schema#", "type": "object", "properties": { "brand": { "description": "The supplier of the mobile phone", "title": "Brand", "viewable": true, "searchable": true, "userEditable": false, "policies": [], "returnByDefault": false, "minLength": "", "pattern": "", "isVirtual": false, "type": [ "string", "null" ] }, "assetNumber": { "description": "The asset tag number of the mobile device", "title": "Asset Number", "viewable": true, "searchable": true, "userEditable": false, "policies": [], "returnByDefault": false, "minLength": "", "pattern": "", "isVirtual": false, "type": "string" }, "model": { "description": "The model number of the mobile device, such as 6 plus, Galaxy S4", "title": "Model", "viewable": true, "searchable": false, "userEditable": false, "policies": [], "returnByDefault": false, "minLength": "", "pattern": "", "isVirtual": false, "type": "string" } }, "required": [], "order": [ "brand", "assetNumber", "model" ] } }
Every managed object type has a name
and a
schema
that describes the properties associated with that
object. The managed object name
can only include the
characters a-z
, A-Z
,
0-9
, and _
(underscore).
You can add any arbitrary properties to the schema of a managed object type. A property definition typically includes the following fields:
title
The name of the property, in human-readable language, used to display the property in the UI.
description
A brief description of the property.
viewable
Specifies whether this property is viewable in the object's profile in the UI. Boolean,
true
orfalse
(true
by default).searchable
Specifies whether this property can be searched in the UI. A searchable property is visible within the Managed Object data grid in the End User UI. Note that for a property to be searchable in the UI, it must be indexed in the repository configuration. For information on indexing properties in a repository, see "Using Generic and Explicit Object Mappings".
Boolean,
true
orfalse
(false
by default).userEditable
Specifies whether users can edit the property value in the UI. This property applies in the context of the End User UI, where users are able to edit certain properties of their own accounts. Boolean,
true
orfalse
(false
by default).isProtected
Specifies whether reauthentication is required if the value of this property changes.
For certain properties, such as passwords, changing the value of the property should force an end user to reauthenticate. These properties are referred to as protected properties. Depending on how the user authenticates (which authentication module is used), the list of protected properties is added to the user's security context. For example, if a user logs in with the login and password of their managed user entry (
MANAGED_USER
authentication module), their security context will include this list of protected properties. The list of protected properties is not included in the security context if the user logs in with a module that does not support reauthentication (such as through a social identity provider).minLength
The minimum number of characters that the value of this property must have.
pattern
Any specific pattern to which the value of the property must adhere. For example, a property whose value is a date might require a specific date format.
policies
Any policy validation that must be applied to the property. For more information on managed object policies, see "Configuring the Default Policy for Managed Objects".
required
Specifies whether the property must be supplied when an object of this type is created. Boolean,
true
orfalse
.Important
The
required
policy is assessed only during object creation, not when an object is updated. You can effectively bypass the policy by updating the object and supplying an empty value for that property. To prevent this inconsistency, set bothrequired
andnotEmpty
totrue
for required properties. This configuration indicates that the property must exist, and must have a value.type
The data type for the property value; can be
string
,array
,boolean
,integer
,number
,object
,Resource Collection
, ornull
.Note
If a property (such as a
telephoneNumber
) might not exist for a particular user, you must includenull
as one of the propertytype
s. You can set a null property type in the Admin UI (Configure > Managed Objects > User, select the property, and under the Details tab, Advanced Options, setNullable
totrue
).You can also set a null property type directly in your
managed.json
file by setting"type" : '[ "string","null" ]'
for that property (wherestring
can be any other valid property type. This information is validated by thepolicy.js
script, as described in "Validation of Managed Object Data Types".If you're configuring a data
type
ofarray
through the Admin UI, you're limited to two values.isVirtual
Specifies whether the property takes a static value, or whether its value is calculated "on the fly" as the result of a script. Boolean,
true
orfalse
.returnByDefault
For non-core attributes (virtual attributes and relationship fields), specifies whether the property will be returned in the results of a query on an object of this type if it is not explicitly requested. Virtual attributes and relationship fields are not returned by default. Boolean,
true
orfalse
. When the property is in an array within a relationship, always set tofalse
.-
relationshipGrantTemporalConstraintsEnforced
For attributes with relationship fields. Specifies whether this relationship should have temporal constraints enforced. Boolean,
true
orfalse
. For more information about temporal constraints, see "Using Temporal Constraints to Restrict Effective Roles".
9.3. Working with Managed Users
User objects that are stored in the repository are referred to as
managed users. For a JDBC repository, IDM
stores managed users in the managedobjects
table. A second
table, managedobjectproperties
, serves as the index table.
IDM provides RESTful access to managed users, at the context path
/openidm/managed/user
. For more information, see
"Getting Started With the REST Interface" in the Installation Guide.
You can add, change, and delete managed users by using the Admin UI or over the REST interface. To use the Admin UI, select Manage > User. The UI is intuitive as regards user management.
If you are viewing users through the Admin UI, the User List page supports specialized filtering with the Advanced Filter option, which allows you to build many of the queries shown in "Defining and Calling Queries".
The following examples show how to add, change and delete users over the REST interface. For a reference of all managed user endpoints and actions, see "Managing Users Over REST". You can also use the API Explorer as a reference to the managed object REST API. For more information, see "API Explorer".
The following example retrieves the JSON representation of all managed users in the repository:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryId=query-all-ids"
The following two examples query all managed users for a user named
scarter
:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=userName+eq+%22scarter%22"
In this second example, note the use of single quotes around the URL, to
avoid conflicts with the double quotes around the user named
smith
. Note also that the _queryFilter
requires double quotes (or the URL encoded equivalent %22
)
around the search term:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ 'http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_queryFilter=userName+eq+"scarter"'
The following example retrieves the JSON representation of a managed user,
specified by his ID, scarter
:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/scarter"
Note
Some of the examples in this documentation set use client-assigned IDs (such
as bjensen
and scarter
) when creating
objects because it makes the examples easier to read. If you create objects
using the Admin UI, they are created with server-assigned IDs (such as
55ef0a75-f261-47e9-a72b-f5c61c32d339
). Generally,
immutable server-assigned UUIDs are used in production environments.
The following example adds a user with a specific user ID,
bjensen
:
$ curl \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "If-None-Match: *" \ --request PUT \ --data '{ "userName":"bjensen", "sn":"Jensen", "givenName":"Barbara", "mail": "bjensen@example.com", "telephoneNumber": "082082082", "password":"Passw0rd" }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/bjensen"
The following example adds the same user, but allows IDM to generate the ID:
$ curl \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request POST \ --data '{ "userName":"bjensen", "sn":"Jensen", "givenName":"Barbara", "mail": "bjensen@example.com", "telephoneNumber": "082082082", "password":"Passw0rd" }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_action=create"
The following example checks whether user bjensen
exists,
then replaces her telephone number with the new data provided in the request
body:
$ curl \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request POST \ --data '[{ "operation":"replace", "field":"/telephoneNumber", "value":"1234567" }]' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_action=patch&_queryId=for-userName&uid=bjensen"
The following example deletes user bjensen
:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request DELETE \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/bjensen"
9.4. Working With Managed Groups
IDM provides support for a managed group
object. For a JDBC repository, IDM stores managed groups with all
other managed objects, in the managedobjects
table, and
uses the managedobjectproperties
for indexing.
The managed group object is not provided by default. To use managed groups,
add an object similar to the following to your
conf/managed.json
file:
{ "name" : "group" },
With this addition, IDM provides RESTful access to managed
groups, at the context path /openidm/managed/group
.
For an example of a deployment that uses managed groups, see "Synchronizing LDAP Groups" in the Samples Guide.
9.5. Tracking Metadata For Managed Objects
Certain self-service features, such as progressive profile completion, privacy and consent, and terms and conditions acceptance, rely on user metadata that tracks information related to a managed object state. Such data might include when the object was created, or the date of the most recent change, for example. This metadata is not stored within the object itself, but in a separate resource location.
Because object metadata is stored outside the managed object, state change situations (such as the time of an update) are separate from object changes (the update itself). This separation reduces unnecessary synchronization to targets when the only data that has changed is metadata. Metadata is not returned in a query unless it is specifically requested. Therefore, the volume of data that is retrieved when metadata is not required, is reduced.
To specify which metadata you want to track for an object, add a
meta
stanza to the object definition in your managed
object configuration (managed.json
file). The following
default configuration tracks the createDate
and
lastChanged
date for managed user objects:
{ "objects" : [ { "name" : "user", ... "schema" : { ... }, "meta" : { "property" : "_meta", "resourceCollection" : "internal/usermeta", "trackedProperties" : [ "createDate", "lastChanged" ] }, ... }, ... ] }
Important
If you are not using the self-service features that require metadata, you
can remove the meta
stanza from your user object
definition in managed.json
. Preventing the creation and
tracking of metadata where it is not required will improve performance in
that scenario.
The metadata configuration includes the following properties:
property
The property that will be dynamically added to the managed object schema for this object.
resourceCollection
The resource location in which the metadata will be stored.
Adjust your repository to match the location you specify here. It's recommended that you use an
internal
object path and define the storage in yourrepo.jdbc.json
orrepo.ds.json
file.For a JDBC repository, metadata is stored in the
metaobjects
table by default. Themetaobjectproperties
table is used for indexing.For a DS repository, metadata is stored under
ou=usermeta,ou=internal,dc=openidm,dc=forgerock,dc=com
by default.User objects stored in a DS repository must include the
ou
specified in the precedingdnTemplate
attribute. For example:dn: ou=usermeta,ou=internal,dc=openidm,dc=forgerock,dc=com objectclass: organizationalunit objectclass: top ou: usermeta
trackedProperties
Lists the properties that will be tracked as metadata for this object. In the previous example, the
createDate
(when the object was created) and thelastChanged
date (when the object was last modified) are tracked.
You cannot search on metadata and it is not returned in the results of a
query unless it is specifically requested. To return all metadata for an
object, include _fields=,_meta/*
in your request. The
following example returns a user entry without requesting the metadata:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/bjensen" { "_id": "bjensen", "_rev": "000000000444dd1a", "mail": "bjensen@example.com", "givenName": "Barbara", "sn": "Jensen", "description": "Created By CSV", "userName": "bjensen", "telephoneNumber": "1234567", "accountStatus": "active", "effectiveRoles": [], "effectiveAssignments": [] }
The following example returns the same user entry, with their metadata:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/bjensen?_fields=,_meta/*" { "_id": "bjensen", "_rev": "000000000444dd1a", "mail": "bjensen@example.com", "givenName": "Barbara", "sn": "Jensen", "description": "Created By CSV", "userName": "bjensen", "telephoneNumber": "1234567", "accountStatus": "active", "effectiveRoles": [], "effectiveAssignments": [] "_meta": { "_ref": "internal/usermeta/284273ff-5e50-4fa4-9d30-4a3cf4a5f642", "_refResourceCollection": "internal/usermeta", "_refResourceId": "284273ff-5e50-4fa4-9d30-4a3cf4a5f642", "_refProperties": { "_id": "30076e2e-8db5-4b4d-ab91-5351d2da4620", "_rev": "000000001ad09f00" }, "createDate": "2018-04-12T19:53:19.004Z", "lastChanged": { "date": "2018-04-12T19:53:19.004Z" }, "loginCount": 0, "_rev": "0000000094605ed9", "_id": "284273ff-5e50-4fa4-9d30-4a3cf4a5f642" } }
Note
Apart from the createDate
and lastChanged
shown previously,
the request also returns the loginCount
. This property is stored by default
for all objects, and increments with each login request based on password or social authentication.
If the object for which metadata is tracked is not an object that "logs in," this field will
remain 0.
The request also returns a _meta
property that includes
relationship information. IDM uses the relationship model to
store the metadata. When the meta
stanza is added to the
user object definition, the attribute specified by the property
("property" : "_meta",
in this case) is added to the
schema as a uni-directional relationship to the resource collection specified
by resourceCollection
. In this example, the user object's
_meta
field is stored as an
internal/usermeta
object. The _meta/_ref
property shows the full resource path to the internal object where the
metadata for this user is stored.
9.6. Working With Virtual Properties
Properties can be defined to be strictly derived from other properties within
an object. This allows computed and composite values to be created in the
object. Such properties are named virtual properties.
The value of a virtual property is calculated only when that property is
retrieved, using a script called by onRetrieve
script
hook.
In some cases, the value of a virtual property might change without its
object being updated. For example, a change to a related object might affect
the value of the virtual property. In this case, you can use the
triggerSyncCheck
action to refresh the managed object,
including the values of any virtual attributes. The following command
refreshes all properties for the user with ID
9dce06d4-2fc1-4830-a92b-bd35c2f6bcbb
:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request POST \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/9dce06d4-2fc1-4830-a92b-bd35c2f6bcbb?_action=triggerSyncCheck"
For relationship type properties, you can configure how objects are refreshed using the relationship notification mechanism. For more information, see "Configuring Relationship Change Notification".
9.7. Running Scripts on Managed Objects
IDM provides a number of hooks that enable
you to manipulate managed objects using scripts. These scripts can be
triggered during various stages of the lifecycle of the managed object, and
are defined in the managed objects configuration file
(managed.json
).
The scripts can be triggered when a managed object is created (onCreate), updated (onUpdate), retrieved (onRetrieve), deleted (onDelete), validated (onValidate), or stored in the repository (onStore). A script can also be triggered when a change to a managed object triggers an implicit synchronization operation (onSync).
You can also use post-action scripts for managed objects, including after the creation of an object (postCreate), after the update of an object (postUpdate), and after the deletion of an object (postDelete).
The following sample extract of a managed.json
file runs
a script to calculate the effective assignments of a managed object, whenever
that object is retrieved from the repository:
"effectiveAssignments" : { "type" : "array", "title" : "Effective Assignments", "description" : "Effective Assignments", "viewable" : false, "returnByDefault" : true, "isVirtual" : true, "usageDescription" : "", "isPersonal" : false, "onRetrieve" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "file" : "roles/effectiveAssignments.js", "effectiveRolesPropName" : "effectiveRoles" }, "items" : { "type" : "object", "title" : "Effective Assignments Items" } },
9.8. Encoding Attribute Values
There are two ways to encode attribute values for managed objects—reversible encryption and salted hashing algorithms. Attribute values that might be encoded include passwords, authentication questions, credit card numbers, and social security numbers. If passwords are already encoded on the external resource, they are generally excluded from the synchronization process. For more information, see "Managing Passwords".
You configure attribute value encoding, per schema property, in the managed
object configuration (in your project's conf/managed.json
file). The following sections show how to use reversible encryption and
salted hash algorithms to encode attribute values.
9.8.1. Encoding Attribute Values With Reversible Encryption
The following excerpt of a managed.json
file shows a
managed object configuration that encrypts and decrypts the
password
attribute using the default symmetric key:
{ "objects" : [ { "name" : "user", ... "schema" : { ... "properties" : { ... "password" : { "title" : "Password", ... "encryption" : { "purpose" : "idm.password.encryption" }, "scope" : "private", ... } ] }
Tip
To configure encryption of properties by using the Admin UI:
Select Configure > Managed Objects, and select the object type whose property values you want to encrypt (for example User).
On the Properties tab, select the property whose value should be encrypted and select the Encrypt checkbox.
For information about encrypting attribute values from the command-line, see "Using the encrypt Subcommand".
Important
Hashing is a one way operation - property values that are hashed can not be "unhashed" in the way that they can be decrypted. Therefore, if you hash the value of any property, you cannot synchronize that property value to an external resource. For managed object properties with hashed values, you must either exclude those properties from the mapping or set a random default value if the external resource requires the property.
9.8.2. Encoding Attribute Values by Using Salted Hash Algorithms
To encode attribute values with salted hash algorithms, add the
secureHash
property to the attribute definition, and
specify the algorithm that should be used to hash the value.
IDM supports the following hash algorithms:
SHA-256
|
SHA-384
|
SHA-512
|
Bcrypt
|
Scrypt
|
Password-Based Key Derivation Function 2 (PBKDF2 )
|
If you do not specify an algorithm, SHA-256
is used by
default. MD5 and SHA-1 are supported for legacy reasons but you should use a
more secure algorithm in production environments.
Warning
Some one-way hash functions are designed to be computationally expensive. Functions such as PBKDF2, Bcrypt, and Scrypt are designed to be relatively slow even on modern hardware. This makes them generally less susceptible to brute force attacks. However, computationally expensive functions can dramatically increase response times. If you use these functions, be aware of the performance impact and perform extensive testing before deploying your service in production. Do not use functions like PBKDF2 and Bcrypt for any accounts that are used for frequent, short-lived connections.
The following excerpt of a managed.json
file shows a
managed object configuration that hashes the values of the
password
attribute using the SHA-256
algorithm:
{ "objects" : [ { "name" : "user", ... "schema" : { ... "properties" : { ... "password" : { "title" : "Password", ... "secureHash" : { "algorithm" : "SHA-256" }, "scope" : "private", ... } ] }
Tip
To configure hashing of properties by using the Admin UI:
Select Configure > Managed Objects, and select the object type whose property values you want to hash (for example User).
On the Properties tab, select the property whose value must be hashed and select the Hash checkbox.
Select the algorithm that should be used to hash the property value.
For information about hashing attribute values from the command-line, see "Using the secureHash Subcommand".
9.9. Privacy & Consent
As an end user, you might want to control what happens to your personal data. For IDM, that means control of how your data is shared with external systems. The example in "Marketo Connector" in the Connector Reference shows how you can generate a marketing leads database, only for those users who have selected a specific preference. Also read "Configuring Privacy & Consent".
IDM allows you to regulate access to two different kinds of personal data:
User information: while marketers want user information such as addresses and telephone numbers, IDM allows you to let individual users decide whether to share that data. For more information, see "Regulating HTTP Access to Personal Data".
Account information: by default, IDM prevents REST-based access to passwords with the
private
scope, as defined in themanaged.json
file. You can extend this protection to other properties. For more information, see "Restricting HTTP Access to Sensitive Data".
To configure Privacy & Consent in the End User UI, see "Configuring Privacy & Consent".
9.9.1. Regulating HTTP Access to Personal Data
In some cases, you might want to allow users to choose whether to share their personal data. "Configuring Synchronization Filters With User Preferences" describes how to allow users to select basic preferences for updates and marketing. They can select these preferences when they register and in the End User UI.
Examine the managed.json
file for your project. Every
relevant property should include two settings that determine whether a user
can choose to share or not share that property:
isPersonal
: When set totrue
, specifies personally identifying information. By default, theisPersonal
option foruserName
andpostalAddress
is set totrue
.usageDescription
: Includes additional information that can help users understand the sensitivity of a specific property such astelephoneNumber
.
The consentedMappings
property in a managed user object
enables the user to specify an array of mappings (target systems) with which
they consent to sharing their identifying information. The following
sample excerpt of the default managed user object schema shows the
consentedMappings
property definition:
"consentedMappings" : { "title" : "Consented Mappings", "description" : "Consented Mappings", "type" : "array", "viewable" : false, "searchable" : false, "userEditable" : true, "usageDescription" : "", "isPersonal" : false, "items" : { "type" : "array", "title" : "Consented Mappings Items", "items" : { "type" : "object", "title" : "Consented Mappings Item", "properties" : { "mapping" : { "title" : "Mapping", "description" : "Mapping", "type" : "string", "viewable" : true, "searchable" : true, "userEditable" : true }, "consentDate" : { "title" : "Consent Date", "description" : "Consent Date", "type" : "string", "viewable" : true, "searchable" : true, "userEditable" : true } }, "order" : [ "mapping", "consentDate" ], "required" : [ "mapping", "consentDate" ] } }, "returnByDefault" : false, "isVirtual" : false }
9.9.2. Restricting HTTP Access to Sensitive Data
You can protect specific sensitive managed data by marking the corresponding
properties as private
. Private data, whether it is
encrypted or not, is not accessible over the REST interface. Properties that
are marked as private are removed from an object when that object is
retrieved over REST.
To mark a property as private, set its scope
to
private
in the conf/managed.json
file.
The following extract of the managed.json
file shows how
HTTP access is prevented on the password
property:
{ "objects": [ { "name": "user", "schema": { "id" : "http://jsonschema.net", "title" : "User", ... "properties": { ... { "name": "password", "encryption": { "purpose": "idm.password.encryption" }' "scope" : "private" } }, ... } ] }
Tip
To configure private properties by using the Admin UI:
Select Configure > Managed Objects, and select the object type whose property values you want to make private (for example User).
On the Properties tab, select the property that must be private and select the Private checkbox.
A potential caveat relates to private properties. If you use an HTTP
GET
request, you won't even see private properties. Even
if you know all relevant private properties, a PUT
request would replace the entire object in the repository. In addition,
that require would effectively remove all private properties from the object.
To work around this limitation, use a POST
request to
update only those properties that require change.
For example, to update the givenName
of user jdoe, you
could run the following command:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request POST \ --data '[ { "operation":"replace", "field":"/givenName", "value":"Jon" } ]' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user?_action=patch&_queryId=for-userName&uid=jdoe"
Note
The filtering of private data applies only to direct HTTP read and query calls on managed objects. No automatic filtering is done for internal callers, and the data that these callers choose to expose.
Chapter 10. Managing Relationships Between Objects
Relationships are references between managed objects. Roles (described in "Working With Managed Roles") are implemented using relationships, but you can create relationships between any managed object type.
10.1. Defining a Relationship Type
Relationships are defined in your project's managed object configuration
file (conf/managed.json
). The default configuration
includes a relationship named manager
that lets you
configure a management relationship between two managed users. The
manager
relationship is a good example from which to
understand how relationships work.
The default manager
relationship is configured as
follows:
"manager" : { "type" : "relationship", "validate" : true, "reverseRelationship" : true, "reversePropertyName" : "reports", "description" : "Manager", "title" : "Manager", "viewable" : true, "searchable" : false, "usageDescription" : "", "isPersonal" : false, "properties" : { "_ref" : { "description" : "References a relationship from a managed object", "type" : "string" }, "_refProperties" : { "description" : "Supports metadata within the relationship", "type" : "object", "title" : "Manager _refProperties", "properties" : { "_id" : { "description" : "_refProperties object ID", "type" : "string" } } } }, "resourceCollection" : [ { "path" : "managed/user", "label" : "User", "query" : { "queryFilter" : "true", "fields" : [ "userName", "givenName", "sn" ] } } ], "userEditable" : false },
Most of these properties apply to any managed object type, and are described in "Creating and Modifying Managed Object Types". Relationships have the following specific configurable properties:
type
(string)The object type. Must be
relationship
for a relationship object.returnByDefault
(booleantrue, false
)Specifies whether the relationship should be returned as part of the response. The
returnByDefault
property is not specific to relationships — the flag applies to all managed object types. However, it is important to note that by default relationship properties are not returned, unless explicitly requested.reverseRelationship
(booleantrue, false
)Specifies whether this is a bidirectional relationship. For more information, see "Working With Bidirectional Relationships".
reversePropertyName
(string)Specifies the corresponding property name in the case of a reverse relationship. For example, the
manager
property has areversePropertyName
ofreports
. For more information, see "Working With Bidirectional Relationships"._ref
(JSON object)Specifies how the relationship between two managed objects is referenced.
In the relationship definition, the value of this property is
{ "type" : "string" }
. In a managed user entry, the value of the_ref
property is the reference to the other resource. The_ref
property is described in more detail in "Establishing a Relationship Between Two Objects"._refProperties
(JSON object)Specifies any required properties from the relationship that should be included in the managed object. The
_refProperties
field includes a unique ID (_id
) and the revision (_rev
) of the object._refProperties
can also contain arbitrary fields to support metadata within the relationship.resourceCollection
(JSON object)The collection of resources (objects) on which this relationship is based (for example,
managed/user
objects).Both managed objects and internal objects can use
resourceCollection
. Resource collections on managed objects are added directly inmanaged.json
. Since the schema for internal objects is not editable, resource collections for internal object relationships are made available ininternal.json
in yourconf/
directory.
10.2. Establishing a Relationship Between Two Objects
When you have defined a relationship type, (such as the
manager
relationship, described in the previous section),
you can reference one managed user from another, using
the _ref*
relationship properties. Three properties make
up a relationship reference:
_refResourceCollection
specifies the container of the referenced object (for example,managed/user
)._refResourceId
specifies the ID of the referenced object. This is generally a system-generated UUID, such as9dce06d4-2fc1-4830-a92b-bd35c2f6bcbb
. For clarity, this section uses client-assigned IDs such asbjensen
andpsmith
._ref
is a derived path that is a combination of_refResourceCollection
and a URL-encoded_refResourceId
.
For example, imagine that you are creating a new user, psmith, and that
psmith's manager will be bjensen. You would add psmith's user entry, and
reference bjensen's entry with the
_ref
property, as follows:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "If-None-Match: *" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request PUT \ --data '{ "sn":"Smith", "userName":"psmith", "givenName":"Patricia", "displayName":"Patti Smith", "description" : "psmith - new user", "mail" : "psmith@example.com", "phoneNumber" : "0831245986", "password" : "Passw0rd", "manager" : {"_ref" : "managed/user/bjensen"} }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/psmith" { "_id": "psmith", "_rev": "00000000ec41097c", "sn": "Smith", "userName": "psmith", "givenName": "Patricia", "displayName": "Patti Smith", "description": "psmith - new user", "mail": "psmith@example.com", "phoneNumber": "0831245986", "accountStatus": "active", "effectiveRoles": [], "effectiveAssignments": [] }
Note that the relationship information is not returned by default. To show the relationship in psmith's entry, you must explicitly request her manager entry, as follows:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/psmith?_fields=manager" { "_id": "psmith", "_rev": "00000000ec41097c", "manager": { "_ref": "managed/user/bjensen", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/user", "_refResourceId": "bjensen", "_refProperties": { "_id": "ffc6f0f3-93db-4939-b9eb-1f8389a59a52", "_rev": "0000000081aa991a" } } }
When a relationship changes, the updated relationship state can be queried
when any referenced managed objects are queried. So, after creating user
psmith with manager bjensen, a query on bjensen's user entry will show a
reference to psmith's entry in her reports
property
(because the reports
property is configured as the
reversePropertyName
of the manager
property). The following query shows the updated relationship state for
bjensen:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/bjensen?_fields=reports" { "_id": "bjensen", "_rev": "0000000057b5fe9d", "reports": [ { "_ref": "managed/user/psmith", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/user", "_refResourceId": "psmith", "_refProperties": { "_id": "ffc6f0f3-93db-4939-b9eb-1f8389a59a52", "_rev": "0000000081aa991a" } } ] }
IDM maintains referential integrity by deleting the relationship
reference, if the object referred to by that relationship is deleted. In our
example, if bjensen's user entry is deleted, the corresponding reference in
psmith's manager
property is removed.
10.3. Configuring Relationship Change Notification
A relationship exists between two managed objects. By default, when a relationship changes (when it is created, updated, or deleted), the managed objects on either side of the relationship are not notified of that change. This means that the state of each object with respect to that relationship field is not recalculated until the object is read. This default behavior improves performance, especially in the case where many objects are affected by a single relationship change.
For roles
, a special kind of relationship, change
notification is configured by default. The purpose of
this default configuration is to notify managed users when any of the
relationships that link users, roles, and assignments are manipulated. For
more information about relationship change notification in the specific case
of managed roles, see "Roles and Relationship Change Notification".
To change the default configuration, or to set up notification for other
relationship changes, use the notify*
properties in the
relationship definition, as described in this section.
A relationship exists between an origin object and a
referenced object. These terms reflect which managed
object is specified in the URL (for example managed/user/psmith
),
and which object is referenced by the relationship (_ref*
)
properties. For more information about the relationship properties, see
"Establishing a Relationship Between Two Objects".
In the previous example, a PUT on managed/user/psmith
with
"manager" : {_ref : "managed/user/bjensen"}
, causes
managed/user/psmith
to be the origin object, and
managed/user/bjensen
to be the referenced object for that
relationship, as shown in the following illustration:
Note that for the reverse relationship (a PUT on managed/user/bjensen
with "reports" : [{_ref = "managed/user/psmith"}]
)
managed/user/bjensen
would be the origin object, and
managed/user/psmith
would be the referenced object.
By default, when a relationship changes, neither the origin object nor the
referenced object is notified of the change. So, with
the PUT on managed/user/psmith
with
"manager" : {_ref : "managed/user/bjensen"}
, neither
psmith's object nor bjensen's object is notified.
Note
Auditing is not tied to relationship change notification and is always
triggered when a relationship changes. Therefore,
relationship changes are audited, regardless of the notify
and notifySelf
properties.
To configure relationship change notification, set the following properties
in your managed object schema (conf/managed.json
):
The notify
and notifySelf
properties
specify whether objects that reference relationships are notified of a
relationship change:
notifySelf
Notifies the origin object of the relationship change.
In our example, if the
manager
definition includes"notifySelf" : true
, and if the relationship is changed through a URL that references psmith, then psmith's object would be notified of the change. For example, for a CREATE, UPDATE or DELETE request on thepsmith/manager
, psmith would be notified, but the managed object referenced by this relationship (bjensen) would not be notified.If the relationship were manipulated through a request to
bjensen/reports
, then bjensen would only be notified if thereports
relationship specified"notifySelf" : true
.notify
Notifies the referenced object of the relationship change.
This property must be set on the
resourceCollection
of the relationship property. In our example, assume that themanager
definition has aresourceCollection
with apath
ofmanaged/user
, and that this object specifies"notify" : true
. If relationship is changed through a CREATE, UPDATE, or DELETE on the URLpsmith/manager
, then the reference object (managed/user/bjensen
) would be notified of the change to the relationship.
notifyRelationships
This property controls the propagation of notifications out of a managed object when one of its properties changes through an update or patch, or when that object receives a notification through one of these fields.
The
notifyRelationships
property takes an array of relationships as a value, for example"notifyRelationships" : ["relationship1", "relationship2"]
. The relationships specified here are fields defined on the managed object type (which might itself be a relationship).Notifications are propagated according to the recipient’s
notifyRelationships
configuration. If a managed object type is notified of a change through one if its relationship fields, the notification is done according to the configuration of the recipient object. To illustrate, look at theattributes
property in the defaultmanaged/assignment
object:{ "name" : "assignment", "schema" : { ... "properties" : { ... "attributes" : { "description" : "The attributes operated on by this assignment.", "title" : "Assignment Attributes", .... "notifyRelationships" : ["roles"] }, ...
This configuration means that if an assignment is updated or patched and the assignment's
attributes
change in some way, all theroles
connected to that assignment are notified. Because therole
managed object has"notifyRelationships" : ["members"]
defined on itsassignments
field, the notification that originated from the change to the assignment attribute is propagated to the connectedroles
, and then out to themembers
of those roles.So the
role
is notified through itsassignments
field because anattribute
in the assignment changed. This notification is propagated out of themembers
field because the role definition has"notifyRelationships" : ["members"]
on itsassignments
field.
The default implementation of roles
,
assignments
and members
uses
relationship change notification to ensure that relationship changes are
accurately provisioned.
For example, the default user
object includes a
roles
property with notifySelf
set to
true
:
{ "name" : "user", ... "schema" : { ... "properties" : { .... "roles" : { "description" : "Provisioning Roles", ... "items" : { "type" : "relationship", ... "reverseRelationship" : true, "reversePropertyName" : "members", "notifySelf" : true, ... } }
In this case, notifySelf
indicates the origin or
user
object. If any changes are made to a relationship
referencing a role through a URL that includes a user, the user will be
notified of the change. For example, if there is a CREATE on
managed/user/psmith/roles
which specifies a set of
references to existing roles, user psmith
will be
notified of the change.
Similarly, the role
object includes a
members
property. That property includes the following
schema definition:
{ "name" : "role", ... "schema" : { ... "properties" : { ... "members" : { ... "items" : { "type" : "relationship", ... "properties" : { ... "resourceCollection" : [ { "notify" : true, "path" : "managed/user", "label" : "User", ... } ] } ...
Notice the "notify" : true
setting on the
resourceCollection
. This setting indicates that if the
relationship is created, updated, or deleted through a URL that references
that role, all objects in that resource collection (in this case,
managed/user
objects) that are identified as
members
of that role must be notified of the change.
Important
To notify an object at the end of a relationship that the relationship has changed (using the
notify
property), the relationship must be bidirectional ("reverseRelationship" : true
). For more information about bidirectional relationships, see "Working With Bidirectional Relationships".When an object is notified of a relationship state change (create, delete, or update), part of that notification process involves calculating the changed object state with respect to the changed relationship field. For example, if a managed user is notified that a role has been created, the user object calculates its base state, and the state of its
roles
field, before and after the new role was created. This before and after state is then reconciled. An object that is referenced by a forward (unidirectional) relationship does not have a field that references that relationship — the object is "pointed-to", but does not "point-back". Because this object cannot calculate its before and after state with respect to the relationship field, it cannot be notified.Similarly, relationships that are notified of changes to the objects that reference them must be bidirectional relationships.
If you configure relationship change notification on a unidirectional relationship, IDM throws an exception.
You cannot configure relationship change notification in the Admin UI — you must update the managed object schema in the
conf/managed.json
file directly.
10.4. Validating Relationships Between Objects
Optionally, you can specify that a relationship between two objects must be validated when the relationship is created. For example, you can indicate that a user cannot reference a role, if that role does not exist.
When you create a new relationship type, validation is disabled by default
as it entails a query to the relationship that can be expensive, if it is
not required. To configure validation of a referenced relationship, set
"validate": true
in the object configuration (in
managed.json
). The managed.json
files provided with the sample configurations enable validation for the
following relationships:
For user objects ‒ roles, managers, and reports
For role objects ‒ members and assignments
For assignment objects ‒ roles
The following configuration of the manager
relationship
enables validation, and prevents a user from referencing a manager that has
not already been created:
"manager" : { "type" : "relationship", ... "validate" : true,
10.5. Working With Bidirectional Relationships
In most cases, you define a relationship between two objects in both directions. For example, a relationship between a user and his manager might indicate a reverse relationship between the manager and her direct report. Reverse relationships are particularly useful in querying. You might want to query jdoe's user entry to discover who his manager is, or query bjensen's user entry to discover all the users who report to bjensen.
You declare a reverse relationship as part of the relationship definition in
conf/managed.json
. Consider the following sample excerpt
of the default managed object configuration:
"reports" : { "description" : "Direct Reports", "title" : "Direct Reports", ... "type" : "array", "returnByDefault" : false, "items" : { "type" : "relationship", "reverseRelationship" : true, "reversePropertyName" : "manager", "validate" : true, ... } ...
The reports
property is a relationship
between users and managers. So, you can refer to a
managed user's reports by referencing the reports
.
However, the reports property is also a reverse relationship
("reverseRelationship" : true
) which
means that you can list all users that reference that report.
You can list all users whose manager
property is set to
the currently queried user.
The reverse relationship includes an optional
resourceCollection
that allows you to query a set of
objects, based on specific fields:
"resourceCollection" : [ { "path" : "managed/user", "label" : "User", "query" : { "queryFilter" : "true", "fields" : [ "userName", "givenName", "sn" ] } } ]
The path
property of the resourceCollection
points to the set of objects to be queried. If this path is not in the local
repository, the link expansion can incur a significant performance cost.
Although the resourceCollection
is optional, the same
performance cost is incurred if the property is absent.
The query
property indicates how you will query this
resource collection to configure the relationship. In this case,
"queryFilter" : "true",
indicates that you can search on
any of the properties listed in the fields
array when you
are assigning a manager to a user or a new report to a manager. To configure
these relationships from the Admin UI, see "Managing Relationships Through the Admin UI".
10.6. Working with Conditional Relationships
Relationships can be granted dynamically, based on a specified condition. In order to conditionally grant a relationship, the schemas for the resources you are creating a relationship between need to be configured to support conditional association. To do this, three fields in the schema are used:
conditionalAssociation
Boolean. This property is applied to the
resourceCollection
for the grantor of the relationship. For example, themembers
relationship onmanaged/role
specifies that there is a conditional association with themanaged/user
resource:"resourceCollection" : [ { "notify" : true, "conditionalAssociation" : true, "path" : "managed/user", "label" : "User", "query" : { "queryFilter" : "true", "fields" : [ "userName", "givenName", "sn" ] } } ]
conditionalAssociationField
This property is a string, specifying the field used to determine whether a conditional relationship is granted. The field is applied to the
resourceCollection
of the grantee of the relationship. For example, theroles
relationship onmanaged/user
specifies that the conditional association withmanaged/role
is defined by thecondition
field inmanaged/role
:"resourceCollection" : [ { "path" : "managed/role", "label" : "Role", "conditionalAssociationField" : "condition", "query" : { "queryFilter" : "true", "fields" : [ "name" ] } } ]
The field name specified will usually be
condition
if you are using default schema, but can be any field that evaluates a condition and has been flagged asisConditional
.isConditional
Boolean. This is applied to the field you wish to check to determine whether membership in a relationship is granted. Only one field on a resource can be marked as
isConditional
. For example, in the relationship betweenmanaged/user
andmanaged/role
, conditional membership in the relationship is determined by the query filter specified in themanaged/role
condition
field:"condition" : { "description" : "A conditional filter for this role", "title" : "Condition", "viewable" : false, "searchable" : false, "isConditional" : true, "type" : "string" },
Conditions can be a powerful tool for dynamically creating relationships between two objects. An example of conditional relationships in use can be seen in "Granting Roles Based on a Condition".
10.7. Viewing Relationships Over REST
By default, information about relationships is not returned as the result of a GET request on a managed object. You must explicitly include the relationship property in the request, for example:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/psmith?_fields=manager" { "_id": "psmith", "_rev": "000000007e0e0a09", "manager": { "_ref": "managed/user/bjensen", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/user", "_refResourceId": "bjensen", "_refProperties": { "_id": "6714cf83-c32e-45fa-9cba-faecfdb700d1", "_rev": "000000009e919882" } } }
To obtain more information about the referenced object (psmith's manager, in
this case), you can include additional fields from the referenced object in
the query, using the syntax object/property
(for a simple
string value) or object/*/property
(for an array of
values).
The following example returns the email address and contact number for psmith's manager:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/psmith?_fields=manager/mail,manager/telephoneNumber" { "_id": "psmith", "_rev": "000000007e0e0a09", "manager": { "_ref": "managed/user/bjensen", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/user", "_refResourceId": "bjensen", "_refProperties": { "_id": "6714cf83-c32e-45fa-9cba-faecfdb700d1", "_rev": "000000009e919882" }, "mail": "bjensen@example.com", "telephoneNumber": "1234567", "_rev": "000000001ed4ff4f", "_id": "bjensen" } }
To query all the relationships associated with a managed object, query the
reference (*_ref
) property of that object. For example,
the following query shows all the objects that are referenced by psmith's
entry:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/psmith?_fields=*_ref" { "_id": "psmith", "_rev": "000000007e0e0a09", "reports": [], "manager": { "_ref": "managed/user/bjensen", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/user", "_refResourceId": "bjensen", "_refProperties": { "_id": "6714cf83-c32e-45fa-9cba-faecfdb700d1", "_rev": "000000009e919882" } }, "authzRoles": [ { "_ref": "internal/role/openidm-authorized", "_refResourceCollection": "internal/role", "_refResourceId": "openidm-authorized", "_refProperties": { "_id": "6e2ddf00-d693-4038-ae63-b56b2447b49e", "_rev": "000000000508a08f" } } ], "roles": [] }
To expand that query to show all fields within each relationship, add a wildcard as follows:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/psmith?_fields=*_ref/*" { "_id": "psmith", "_rev": "000000007e0e0a09", "reports": [], "roles": [], "authzRoles": [ { "_ref": "internal/role/openidm-authorized", "_refResourceCollection": "internal/role", "_refResourceId": "openidm-authorized", "_refProperties": { "_id": "6e2ddf00-d693-4038-ae63-b56b2447b49e", "_rev": "000000000508a08f" }, "_id": "openidm-authorized", "description": "Basic minimum user", "_rev": "0000000068832d1e" } ], "manager": { "_ref": "managed/user/bjensen", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/user", "_refResourceId": "bjensen", "_refProperties": { "_id": "6714cf83-c32e-45fa-9cba-faecfdb700d1", "_rev": "000000009e919882" }, "mail": "bjensen@example.com", "givenName": "Barbara", "sn": "Jensen", "description": "Created By CSV", "userName": "bjensen", "telephoneNumber": "1234567", "accountStatus": "active", "_meta": { "_ref": "internal/usermeta/8a4ec527-7a8d-4873-ae5c-7a9bafe43cbd", "_refResourceCollection": "internal/usermeta", "_refResourceId": "8a4ec527-7a8d-4873-ae5c-7a9bafe43cbd", "_refProperties": { "_id": "a4d045eb-527f-42df-a6d1-6cb136014457", "_rev": "000000002d5a9e93" }, "createDate": "2018-04-12T21:50:18.097Z", "lastChanged": { "date": "2018-04-12T21:50:18.097Z" }, "loginCount": 0, "_rev": "0000000008e85fab", "_id": "8a4ec527-7a8d-4873-ae5c-7a9bafe43cbd" } "effectiveRoles": [], "effectiveAssignments": [], "_rev": "000000001ed4ff4f", "_id": "bjensen" } }
Note
Metadata is implemented using the relationships mechanism so when you
request all relationships for a user (with _ref/
), you
will also get all the metadata for that user, if metadata is being tracked.
For more information, see "Tracking Metadata For Managed Objects".
10.8. Viewing Relationships in Graph Form
The Identity Relationships widget gives a visual display of the relationships between objects.
This widget is not displayed on any dashboard by default. You can add it as follows:
Log into the Admin UI.
Select Dashboards, and choose the dashboard to which you want to add the widget.
For more information about managing dashboards in the UI, see "Managing Dashboards".
Select Add Widget.
In the Add Widget window, scroll down to the Utilities item, select Identity Relationships, then click Settings.
Choose the Widget Size (small, medium, or large).
From the Chart Type list, select Collapsible Tree Layout or Radial Layout.
The Collapsible Tree Layout looks something like this:
The Radial Layout looks something like this:
Select the object for which you want to display relationships, for example,
User
.Select the property or properties that will be used to search on that object, and that will be displayed in the widget, for example,
userName
andcity
.Optionally, select Preview for an idea of what the data represented by widget will look like. Select Settings to return to the Add Widget window.
Click Add to add the widget to the dashboard.
When you have added the Identity Relationships widget, select the user whose relationships you want to search.
The following graph shows all of imartinez's relationships. The graph shows imartinez's manager and her direct reports.
Select or deselect the Data Types on the left of the screen to control how much information is displayed.
Select and move the graph for a better view. Double-click on any user in the graph to view that user's profile.
10.9. Managing Relationships Through the Admin UI
This section describes how to set up relationships between managed objects by using the Admin UI. You can set up a relationship between any object types. The examples in this section demonstrate how to set up a relationship between users and devices, such as IoT devices.
For illustration purposes, these examples assume that you have started IDM and already have some managed users. If this is not the case, start the server with the sample configuration described in "Synchronizing Data From a CSV File to IDM" in the Samples Guide, and run a reconciliation to populate the managed user repository.
In the following procedures, you will:
Create a new managed object type named
Device
and add a few devices, each with unique serial numbers (see "To Create a New Device Object Type").Set up a bi-directional relationship between the Device object and the managed User object (see "To Configure the Relationship Between a Device and a User").
Demonstrate the relationships, assign devices to users, and show relationship validation (see "To Demonstrate the Relationship").
This procedure illustrates how to set up a new Device managed object type, adding properties to collect information such as model, manufacturer, and serial number for each device. In the next procedure, you will set up the relationship.
Click Configure > Managed Objects > New Managed Object.
Give the object an appropriate name and Readable Title. For this procedure, specify
Device
for both these fields.Enter a description for the object, select an icon that represents the object, and click Save.
You should now see three tabs: Properties, Details, and Scripts. Select the Properties tab.
Click Add a Property to set up the schema for the device.
For each property, enter a Name, and Label, select the data Type for the property, and specify whether that property is required for an object of this type.
For the purposes of this example, include the properties shown in the following image: model, serialNumber, manufacturer, description, and category.
When you save the properties for the new managed object type, IDM saves those entries in your project's
conf/managed.json
file.Now select Manage > Device > New Device and add a device as shown in the following image:
Continue adding new devices to the Device object.
When you have finished, select Manage > Device to view the complete list of Devices.
The remaining procedures in this section assume that you have added devices similar to the following:
(Optional) To change the order in which properties of the Device managed object are displayed, select Configure > Managed Objects > Device. Select the property that you want to move and drag it up or down the list.
Alternatively, you can make the same changes to this schema (or any managed object schema) in your project's
conf/managed.json
file.
To set up a relationship between the Device object type and the User object type, you must identify the specific property on each object that will form the basis of the relationship. For example, a device must have an owner and a user can own one or more devices. The property type for each of these must be relationship.
In this procedure, you will update the managed Device object type to add a
new Relationship type property named owner
. You will then
link that property to a new property on the managed User object, named
device
. At the end of the procedure, the updated object
types will look as follows:
Create a new relationship property on the Device object:
Select Configure > Managed Objects and select the Device object that you created previously.
On the Properties tab, add a new property named
owner
. Select Relationship as the property Type. Select Required, as all device objects must have an owner:Note
You cannot change the Type of a property after it has been created. If you create the property with an incorrect Type, you must delete the property and recreate it.
When you have saved the Owner property, select it to show the relationship on the Details tab:
Click the + Related Resource item and select
user
as the Resource.This sets up a relationship between the new Device object and the managed User object.
Under Display Properties, select all of the properties of the user object that should be visible when you display a user's devices in the UI. For example, you might want to see the user's name, email address and telephone number.
Note that this list of Display Properties also specifies how you can search for user objects when you are assigning a device to a user.
Click Show advanced options. Notice that the Query Filter field is set to
true
. This setting allows you to search on any of the Display Properties that you have selected, when you are assigning a device to a user.Click Save to continue.
You now have a one-way relationship between a device and a user.
Click the + Two-way Relationship item to configure the reverse relationship:
Select Has Many to indicate that a single user can have more than one device.
In the Reverse property name field, enter the new property name that will be created in the managed User object type. As shown in "Relationship Properties on User and Device Objects", that property is
device
in this example.Under Display Properties, select all of the properties of the device object that should be visible when you display a user in the UI. For example, you might want to see the model and serial number of each device.
Click Show advanced options. Notice that the Query Filter field is set to
true
. This setting allows you to search on any of the Display Properties that you have selected, when you are assigning a device to a user.Select Validate relationship.
This setting ensures that the relationship is valid when a device is assigned to a user. IDM verifies that both the user and device objects exist, and that that specific device has not already been assigned to user.
Click Save to continue.
You should now have the following reverse relationship configured between User objects and Device objects:
Select Configure > Managed Objects > User.
Scroll down to the end of the Properties tab and notice that the
device
property was created automatically when you configured the relationship.
This procedure demonstrates how devices can be assigned to users, based on the relationship configuration that you set up in the previous two procedures.
Select Manage > User, click on a user entry and select the new Device tab.
Click Add Device and click in the Device field to display the list of devices that you added in the previous procedure.
Select two devices and click Add.
On the Device tab, click the Show Chart icon at the top right.
A graphical representation of the relationship between the user and her devices is displayed:
You can also assign an owner to a device.
Select Manage > Device, and select one of the devices that you did not assign in the previous step.
Click Add Owner and search for the user to whom the device should be assigned.
To demonstrate the relationship validation, try to assign a device that has already been assigned to a different user.
The UI displays the error:
Conflict with Existing Relationship
.
10.10. Viewing the Relationship Configuration in the UI
The Managed Objects Relationship Diagram provides a visual display of the relationship configuration between managed objects. Unlike the Identity Relationships widget, described in "Viewing Relationships in Graph Form", this widget does not show the actual relationship data, but rather shows the configured relationship types.
This widget is not displayed on any dashboard by default. You can add it as follows:
Log into the Admin UI.
Select Dashboards, and choose the dashboard to which you want to add the widget.
For more information about managing dashboards in the UI, see "Managing Dashboards".
Select Add Widget.
In the Add Widget window, scroll down to the Utilities item and select Managed Objects Relationship Diagram.
There are no configurable settings for this widget.
The Preview button shows the current relationship configuration. The following image shows the relationship configuration for a basic IDM installation with no specific configuration:
The legend indicates which relationships are required, which are optional, and which are one to one or one to many. In the default relationship configuration shown in the previous image, you can see that a user can have one or more roles and a role can have one or more users. A manager can have one or more reports but a user can have only one manager. There are no mandatory relationships in this default configuration.
Chapter 11. Working With Managed Roles
This chapter describes a specific managed object type — the managed role object. Managed roles use the relationships mechanism, described in "Managing Relationships Between Objects". It is useful to understand how relationships work before you read about roles in IDM.
IDM supports two types of roles:
Provisioning roles - used to specify how objects are provisioned to an external system.
Authorization roles - used to specify the authorization rights of a managed object internally, within IDM.
Provisioning roles are always created as managed roles, at the context path
openidm/managed/role/role-name
.
Provisioning roles are granted to managed users as values of the user's
roles
property.
Authorization roles can be created either as managed roles (at the context
path
openidm/managed/role/role-name
)
or as internal roles (at the context path
openidm/internal/role/role-name
).
Authorization roles are granted to managed users as values of the user's
authzRoles
property.
Both provisioning roles and authorization roles use the relationships mechanism to link the role to the managed object to which it applies. For more information about relationships between objects, see "Managing Relationships Between Objects".
This section describes how to create and use managed roles, either managed provisioning roles, or managed authorization roles. For more information about internal authorization roles, and how IDM controls authorization to its own endpoints, see "Authorization".
Managed roles are defined like any other managed object, and are granted to users through the relationships mechanism.
A managed role can be granted manually, as a static value of the user's
roles
or authzRoles
attribute, or
dynamically, as a result of a condition or script. For example, a user might
be granted a role such as sales-role
dynamically, if that
user is in the sales
organization.
A managed user's roles
and authzRoles
attributes take an array of references as a value, where
the references point to the managed roles. For example, if user bjensen has
been granted two provisioning roles (employee
and
supervisor
), the value of bjensen's
roles
attribute would look something like the following:
"roles": [ { "_ref": "managed/role/employee", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/role", "_refResourceId": "employee", "_refProperties": { "_grantType": "", "_id": "bb399428-21a9-4b01-8b74-46a7ac43e0be", "_rev": "00000000e43e9ba7" } }, { "_ref": "managed/role/supervisor", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/role", "_refResourceId": "supervisor", "_refProperties": { "_grantType": "", "_id": "9f7d124b-c7b1-4bcf-9ece-db4900e37c31", "_rev": "00000000e9c19d26" } } ]
The _refResourceCollection
is the container that holds
the role and the _refResourceId
the ID of the role. The
_ref
property is a resource path that is derived from
the _refResourceCollection
and the URL-encoded
_refResourceId
. The _refProperties
property provides more information about the relationship.
Important
Some of the examples in this documentation set use client-assigned IDs
(such as bjensen
and scarter
) for the
user objects because it makes the examples easier to read. If you create
objects using the Admin UI, they are created with server-assigned IDs (such
as 55ef0a75-f261-47e9-a72b-f5c61c32d339
). This particular
example uses a client-assigned role ID that is the same as the role name.
All other examples in this chapter use server-assigned IDs. Generally,
immutable server-assigned UUIDs are used for all managed objects in
production environments.
The following sections describe how to create, read, update, and delete managed roles, and how to grant roles to users. For information about how roles are used to provision users to external systems, see "Working With Role Assignments".
11.1. Creating a Role
The easiest way to create a new role is by using the Admin UI. Select Manage > Role and select New Role on the Role List page. Enter a name and description for the new role and select Save.
Optionally, select Temporal Constraint to restrict the role grant to a set time period or Condition to define a query filter that will allow the role to be granted to members dynamically. For more information on these options, see "Using Temporal Constraints to Restrict Effective Roles" and "Granting Roles Dynamically".
To create a managed role over REST, send a PUT or POST request to the
/openidm/managed/role
context path. The following
example creates a managed role named employee
:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request POST \ --data '{ "name" : "employee", "description" : "Role granted to workers on the company payroll" }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/role?_action=create" { "_id": "5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1", "_rev": "0000000079c6644f", "name": "employee", "description": "Role granted to workers on the company payroll" }
At this stage, the employee
role has no corresponding
assignments. Assignments are what enables the
provisioning logic to the external system. Assignments are created and
maintained as separate managed objects, and are referred to within role
definitions. For more information about assignments, see
"Working With Role Assignments".
11.2. Listing Existing Roles
You can display a list of all configured managed roles over REST or by using the Admin UI.
To list the managed roles in the Admin UI, select Manage > Role.
If you have many managed roles, the Role List page now supports specialized filtering, with the Advanced Filter option, which allows you to build many of the queries shown in "Defining and Calling Queries".
To list the managed roles over REST, query the
openidm/managed/role
endpoint. The following example
shows the employee
role that you created in the previous
section:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/role?_queryFilter=true" { "result": [ { "_id": "5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1", "_rev": "0000000079c6644f", "name": "employee", "description": "Role granted to workers on the company payroll" } ], ... }
11.3. Granting a Role to a User
Roles are granted to users through the relationship mechanism. Relationships are essentially references from one managed object to another, in this case from a user object to a role object. For more information about relationships, see "Managing Relationships Between Objects".
Roles can be granted manually or dynamically.
To grant a role manually, you must do one of the following:
Update the value of the user's
roles
property (if the role is a provisioning role) orauthzRoles
property (if the role is an authorization role) to reference the role.Update the value of the role's
members
property to reference the user.
Manual role grants are described further in "Granting Roles Manually".
Dynamic role grants use the result of a condition or script to update a user's list of roles. Dynamic role grants are described in detail in "Granting Roles Dynamically".
11.3.1. Granting Roles Manually
To grant a role to a user manually, use the Admin UI or the REST interface as follows:
- Using the Admin UI
Use one of the following UI methods to grant a role to a user:
Update the user entry:
Select Manage > User and select the user to whom you want to grant the role.
Select the Provisioning Roles tab and select Add Provisioning Roles.
Select the role from the dropdown list and select Add.
Update the role entry:
Select Manage > Role and select the role that you want to grant.
Select the Role Members tab and select Add Role Members.
Select the user from the dropdown list and select Add.
- Over the REST interface
Use one of the following methods to grant a role to a user over REST:
Update the user's
roles
property to refer to the role.The following sample command grants the
employee
role (with ID5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1
) to user scarter:$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request PATCH \ --data '[ { "operation": "add", "field": "/roles/-", "value": {"_ref" : "managed/role/5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1"} } ]' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/scarter" { "_id": "scarter", "_rev": "000000003be825ce", "mail": "scarter@example.com", "givenName": "Steven", "sn": "Carter", "description": "Created By CSV", "userName": "scarter", "telephoneNumber": "1234567", "accountStatus": "active", "effectiveRoles": [ { "_ref": "managed/role/5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1" } ], "effectiveAssignments": [] }
Note that scarter's
effectiveRoles
attribute has been updated with a reference to the new role. For more information about effective roles and effective assignments, see "Understanding Effective Roles and Effective Assignments".When you update a user's existing roles array, you must use the
-
special index to add the new value to the set. For more information, see Set semantic arrays in "Patch Operation: Add".Update the role's
members
property to refer to the user.The following sample command makes scarter a member of the
employee
role:$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request PATCH \ --data '[ { "operation": "add", "field": "/members/-", "value": {"_ref" : "managed/user/scarter"} } ]' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/role/5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1" { "_id": "5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1", "_rev": "0000000079c6644f", "name": "employee", "description": "Role granted to workers on the company payroll" }
Note that the
members
property of a role is not returned by default in the output. To show all members of a role, you must specifically request the relationship properties (*_ref
) in your query. The following sample command lists the members of theemployee
role (currently only scarter):$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/role/5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1?_fields=*_ref,name" { "_id": "5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1", "_rev": "0000000079c6644f", "name": "employee", "authzMembers": [], "assignments": [], "members": [ { "_ref": "managed/user/scarter", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/user", "_refResourceId": "scarter", "_refProperties": { "_id": "7ad15a7b-6806-487b-900d-db569927f56d", "_rev": "0000000075e09cbf" } } ] }
You can replace an existing role grant with a new one by using the
replace
operation in your patch request.The following command replaces scarter's entire
roles
entry (that is, overwrites any existing roles) with a single entry, the reference to theemployee
role (ID5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1
):$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request PATCH \ --data '[ { "operation": "replace", "field":"/roles", "value":[ {"_ref":"managed/role/5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1"} ] } ]' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/scarter" { "_id": "scarter", "_rev": "00000000da112702", "mail": "scarter@example.com", "givenName": "Steven", "sn": "Carter", "description": "Created By CSV", "userName": "scarter", "telephoneNumber": "1234567", "accountStatus": "active", "effectiveRoles": [ { "_ref": "managed/role/5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1" } ], "effectiveAssignments": [] }
11.3.2. Granting Roles Dynamically
The previous section showed how to grant roles to a user manually, by
listing a reference to the role as a value of the user's
roles
attribute. You can also grant a role
dynamically by using one of the following methods:
Granting a role based on a condition, where that condition is expressed in a query filter in the role definition. If the condition is
true
for a particular member, that member is granted the role. Conditions can be used in both managed and internal roles.Using a custom script to define a more complex role granting strategy.
11.3.2.1. Granting Roles Based on a Condition
A role that is granted based on a defined condition is called a conditional role. To create a conditional role, include a query filter in the role definition.
Important
Properties that are used as the basis of a conditional role query
must be configured as searchable
and must be indexed in the repository configuration. To configure a
property as searchable
, update the schema in your
conf/managed.json
file. For more information, see
"Creating and Modifying Managed Object Types".
To create a conditional role by using the Admin UI, select Condition on the role Details page, then define the query filter that will be used to assess the condition.
To create a conditional role over REST, include the query filter as a value
of the condition
property in the role definition. The
following command creates a role, fr-employee
, that will
be granted only to those users who live in France (whose
country
property is set to FR
):
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request POST \ --data '{ "name": "fr-employee", "description": "Role granted to employees resident in France", "condition": "/country eq \"FR\"" }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/role?_action=create" { "_id": "eb18a2e2-ee1e-4cca-83fb-5708a41db94f", "_rev": "000000004085704c", "name": "fr-employee", "description": "Role granted to employees resident in France", "condition": "/country eq \"FR\"" }
When a conditional role is created or updated, IDM automatically
assesses all managed users, and recalculates the value of their
roles
property, if they qualify for that role. When a
condition is removed from a role, that is, when the role becomes an
unconditional role, all conditional grants removed. So, users who were
granted the role based on the condition have that role removed from their
roles
property.
Caution
When a conditional role is defined in an existing data set, every user entry (including the mapped entries on remote systems) must be updated with the assignments implied by that conditional role. The time that it takes to create a new conditional role is impacted by the following items:
The number of managed users affected by the condition
The number of assignments related to the conditional role
The average time required to provision updates to all remote systems affected by those assignments
In a data set with a very large number of users, creating a new conditional role can therefore incur a significant performance cost at the time of creation. Ideally, you should set up your conditional roles at the beginning of your deployment to avoid performance issues later.
11.3.2.2. Granting Roles By Using Custom Scripts
The easiest way to grant roles dynamically is to use conditional roles, as described in "Granting Roles Based on a Condition". If your deployment requires complex conditional logic that cannot be achieved with a query filter, you can create a custom script to grant the role, as follows:
Create a
roles
directory in your project'sscript
directory and copy the default effective roles script to that new directory:$ mkdir project-dir/script/roles/ $ cp /path/to/openidm/bin/defaults/script/roles/effectiveRoles.js \ project-dir/script/roles/
The new script will override the default effective roles script.
Modify the script to reference additional roles that have not been granted manually, or as the result of a conditional grant. The effective roles script calculates the grants that are in effect when the user is retrieved.
For example, the following addition to the
effectiveRoles.js
script grants the rolesdynamic-role1
anddynamic-role2
to all active users (managed user objects whoseaccountStatus
value isactive
). This example assumes that you have already created the managed roles,dynamic-role1
(with IDd2e29d5f-0d74-4d04-bcfe-b1daf508ad7c
) anddynamic-role2
(with ID709fed03-897b-4ff0-8a59-6faaa34e3af6
, and their corresponding assignments:// This is the location to expand to dynamic roles, // project role script return values can then be added via // effectiveRoles = effectiveRoles.concat(dynamicRolesArray); if (object.accountStatus === 'active') { effectiveRoles = effectiveRoles.concat([ {"_ref": "managed/role/d2e29d5f-0d74-4d04-bcfe-b1daf508ad7c"}, {"_ref": "managed/role/709fed03-897b-4ff0-8a59-6faaa34e3af6"} ]); }
Note
For conditional roles, the user's roles
property is
updated if the user meets the condition. For custom scripted roles, the
user's effectiveRoles
property is calculated when the
user is retrieved and includes the dynamic roles according to the custom
script.
If you make any of the following changes to a scripted role grant, you must perform a manual reconciliation of all affected users before assignment changes will take effect on an external system:
If you create a new scripted role grant.
If you change the definition of an existing scripted role grant.
If you change any of the assignment rules for a role that is granted by a custom script.
11.4. Using Temporal Constraints to Restrict Effective Roles
You can use temporal constraints to restrict the period a role is effective in. Temporal constraints can be applied to both managed and internal roles, and can also be applied to role grants on a per-user basis.
For example, you might want a role such as contractors-2018
which you want to apply to all contract employees for the year 2018. In
this case, you would set the temporal constraint on the role. Alternatively,
you might want to assign a contractors
role to apply to
an individual user only for the period of their contract of employment.
The following sections describe how to set temporal constraints on role definitions, and on individual role grants.
11.4.1. Adding a Temporal Constraint to a Role Definition
When you create a role, you can include a temporal constraint in the role definition that restricts the validity of the entire role, regardless of how that role is granted. Temporal constraints are expressed as a time interval in ISO 8601 date and time format. For more information on this format, see the ISO 8601 standard.
To restrict the period during which a role is valid by using the Admin UI, select Temporal Constraint on the role Details tab, then select a timezone offset relative to GMT and the start and end dates for the required period.
The following example adds a contractor
role over the
REST interface. The role is effective from March 1st, 2018 to August 31st,
2018:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request POST \ --data '{ "name" : "contractor", "description" : "Role granted to contract workers for 2018", "temporalConstraints" : [ { "duration": "2018-03-01T00:00:00.000Z/2018-08-31T00:00:00.000Z" } ] }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/role?_action=create" { "_id": "6c0afad4-645f-4573-a896-2ad2ae76c29a", "_rev": "00000000533c7a94", "name": "contractor", "description": "Role granted to contract workers for 2018", "temporalConstraints": [ { "duration": "2018-03-01T00:00:00.000Z/2018-08-31T00:00:00.000Z" } ] }
The preceding example specifies the time zone as Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC) by appending Z
to the time. If no time zone
information is provided, the time zone is assumed to be local time. To
specify a different time zone, include an offset (from UTC) in the format
±hh:mm
. For example, an interval of
2018-03-01T00:00:00.000-07:00/2018-08-31T00:00:00.000-07:00
specifies a time zone that is seven hours behind UTC.
When the period defined by the constraint has ended, the role object remains in the repository but the effective roles script will not include the role in the list of effective roles for any user.
The following example assumes that user scarter has been granted a role
contractor-february
. A temporal constraint has been
included in the contractor-february
definition that
specifies that the role should be applicable only during the month of
February 2018. At the end of this period, a query on scarter's entry shows
that his roles
property still includes the
contractor-february
role (with ID
6c0afad4-645f-4573-a896-2ad2ae76c29a
), but his
effectiveRoles
property does not:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/scarter?_fields=_id,userName,roles,effectiveRoles" { "_id": "scarter", "_rev": "00000000c1481582", "userName": "scarter", "effectiveRoles": [], "roles": [ { "_ref": "managed/role/6c0afad4-645f-4573-a896-2ad2ae76c29a", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/role", "_refResourceId": "6c0afad4-645f-4573-a896-2ad2ae76c29a", "_refProperties": { "_grantType": "", "_id": "d3e045ea-af80-4699-9aae-120bc2a75cab", "_rev": "00000000d5a1a32c" } } ] }
The role is still in place but is no longer effective.
11.4.2. Adding a Temporal Constraint to a Role Grant
To restrict the validity of a role for individual users, you can apply a temporal constraint at the grant level, rather than as part of the role definition. In this case, the temporal constraint is taken into account per user, when the user's effective roles are calculated. Temporal constraints that are defined at the grant level can be different for each user who is a member of that role.
To restrict the period during which a role grant is valid by using the Admin UI, set a temporal constraint when you add the member to the role.
For example, to specify that bjensen be added to a Contractor role only for the period of her employment contract, select Manage > Role, select the Contractor role, then select Add Role Members. On the Add Role Members screen, select bjensen from the list, then enable the Temporal Constraint and specify the start and end date of her contract.
To apply a temporal constraint to a grant over the REST interface, include
the constraint as one of the _refProperties
of the
relationship between the user and the role. The following example assumes a
contractor
role, with ID
6c0afad4-645f-4573-a896-2ad2ae76c29a
. The command adds
user bjensen as a member of that role, with a temporal constraint that
specifies that she be a member of the role only for one year, from January
1st, 2018 to January 1st, 2019:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request PATCH \ --data '[ { "operation": "add", "field": "/members/-", "value": { "_ref" : "managed/user/bjensen", "_refProperties": { "temporalConstraints": [{"duration": "2018-01-01T00:00:00.000Z/2019-01-01T00:00:00.000Z"}] } } } ]' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/role/6c0afad4-645f-4573-a896-2ad2ae76c29a" { "_id": "6c0afad4-645f-4573-a896-2ad2ae76c29a", "_rev": "000000007b0475fc", "name": "contractor", "description": "Role granted to contract workers" }
A query on bjensen's roles property shows that the temporal constraint has been applied to this grant:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/bjensen/roles?_queryFilter=true" { "result": [ { "_id": "ff9ed5a7-4cb1-461e-a59a-d793b6f35808", "_rev": "0000000035aab598", "_ref": "managed/role/6c0afad4-645f-4573-a896-2ad2ae76c29a", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/role", "_refResourceId": "6c0afad4-645f-4573-a896-2ad2ae76c29a", "_refProperties": { "temporalConstraints": [ { "duration": "2018-01-01T00:00:00.000Z/2019-01-01T00:00:00.000Z" } ], "_id": "ff9ed5a7-4cb1-461e-a59a-d793b6f35808", "_rev": "0000000035aab598" } } ], ... }
11.5. Querying a User's Manual and Conditional Roles
The easiest way to check what roles have been granted to a user, either manually, or as the result of a condition, is to look at the user's entry in the Admin UI. Select Manage > User, select the user whose roles you want to see, and select the Provisioning Roles tab.
If you have many managed roles, use the Advanced Filter option on the Role List page to build a custom query.
To obtain a similar list over the REST interface, query the user's
roles
property. The following sample query shows that
scarter has been granted two roles - an employee
role
(with ID 5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1
) and an
fr-employee
role (with ID
eb18a2e2-ee1e-4cca-83fb-5708a41db94f
).
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/scarter/roles?_queryFilter=true&_fields=_ref/*,name" { "result": [ { "_id": "053705c1-1759-4776-80de-3af89fe7b107", "_rev": "000000005e55a064", "_ref": "managed/role/5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/role", "_refResourceId": "5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1", "_refProperties": { "_grantType": "", "_id": "053705c1-1759-4776-80de-3af89fe7b107", "_rev": "000000005e55a064" } }, { "_id": "16e5e25e-eb92-43b1-9013-806289574d44", "_rev": "00000000a0f6a6d6", "_ref": "managed/role/eb18a2e2-ee1e-4cca-83fb-5708a41db94f", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/role", "_refResourceId": "eb18a2e2-ee1e-4cca-83fb-5708a41db94f", "_refProperties": { "_grantType": "conditional", "_id": "16e5e25e-eb92-43b1-9013-806289574d44", "_rev": "00000000a0f6a6d6" } } ], ... }
Note that the fr-employee
role indicates a
_grantType
of conditional
. This
property indicates how the role was granted to the
user. If the _grantType
is empty, the role was granted
manually.
Querying a user's roles in this way does not return
any roles that would be in effect as a result of a custom script, or of any
temporal constraint applied to the role. To return a complete list of
all the roles in effect at a specific time, you need
to query the user's effectiveRoles
property, as follows:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/scarter?_fields=effectiveRoles"
11.6. Deleting a User's Roles
Roles that have been granted manually can be removed from a user's entry in two ways:
Update the value of the user's
roles
property (if the role is a provisioning role) orauthzRoles
property (if the role is an authorization role) to remove the reference to the role.Update the value of the role's
members
property to remove the reference to that user.
Both of these actions can be achieved by using the Admin UI, or over REST.
- Using the Admin UI
Use one of the following methods to remove a user's roles:
Select Manage > User and select the user whose role or roles you want to remove.
Select the Provisioning Roles tab, select the role that you want to remove, then select Remove Selected Provisioning Roles.
Select Manage > Role and select on the role whose members you want to remove.
Select the Role Members tab, select the member or members that that you want to remove, then select Remove Selected Role Members.
- Over the REST interface
Use one of the following methods to remove a role grant from a user:
Delete the role from the user's
roles
property, including the reference ID (the ID of the relationship between the user and the role) in the delete request:The following sample command removes the
employee
role from user scarter. The role ID is5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1
but the ID required in the DELETE request is the reference ID (053705c1-1759-4776-80de-3af89fe7b107
):$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request DELETE \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/scarter/roles/053705c1-1759-4776-80de-3af89fe7b107" { "_id": "053705c1-1759-4776-80de-3af89fe7b107", "_rev": "000000005e55a064", "_ref": "managed/role/5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/role", "_refResourceId": "5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1", "_refProperties": { "_grantType": "", "_id": "053705c1-1759-4776-80de-3af89fe7b107", "_rev": "000000005e55a064" } }
PATCH the user entry to remove the role from the array of roles, specifying the value of the role object in the JSON payload.
Caution
When you remove a role in this way, you must include the entire object in the value, as shown in the following example:
$ curl \ --header "Content-type: application/json" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request PATCH \ --data '[ { "operation" : "remove", "field" : "/roles", "value" : { "_ref": "managed/role/5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/role", "_refResourceId": "5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1", "_refProperties": { "_grantType": "", "_id": "cec1fabc-894b-4963-ab44-e7dc8ca89927", "_rev": "000000002c5fa279" } } } ]' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/scarter" { "_id": "scarter", "_rev": "000000009f853b33", "mail": "scarter@example.com", "givenName": "Steven", "sn": "Carter", "description": "Created By CSV", "userName": "scarter", "telephoneNumber": "1234567", "accountStatus": "active", "effectiveRoles": [ { "_ref": "managed/role/eb18a2e2-ee1e-4cca-83fb-5708a41db94f" } ], "effectiveAssignments": [], "preferences": { "updates": false, "marketing": false }, "country": "FR" }
Delete the user from the role's
members
property, including the reference ID (the ID of the relationship between the user and the role) in the delete request.The following example first queries the members of the
employee
role, to obtain the ID of the relationship, then removes bjensen's membership from that role:$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/role/5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1/members?_queryFilter=true" { "result": [ { "_id": "0d7ded4c-600e-42ae-ac99-3edbd5348d3f", "_rev": "000000002651a299", "_ref": "managed/user/bjensen", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/user", "_refResourceId": "bjensen", "_refProperties": { "_grantType": "", "_id": "0d7ded4c-600e-42ae-ac99-3edbd5348d3f", "_rev": "000000002651a299" } } ], ... } $ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request DELETE \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/role/5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1/members/0d7ded4c-600e-42ae-ac99-3edbd5348d3f" { "_id": "0d7ded4c-600e-42ae-ac99-3edbd5348d3f", "_rev": "000000002651a299", "_ref": "managed/user/bjensen", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/user", "_refResourceId": "bjensen", "_refProperties": { "_grantType": "", "_id": "0d7ded4c-600e-42ae-ac99-3edbd5348d3f", "_rev": "000000002651a299" } }
Note
Roles that have been granted as the result of a condition can only be removed when the condition is changed or removed, or when the role itself is deleted.
11.7. Deleting a Role Definition
You can delete a managed provisioning or authorization role by using the Admin UI, or over the REST interface.
To delete a role by using the Admin UI, select Manage > Role, select the role you want to remove then Delete Selected.
To delete a role over the REST interface, simply delete that managed object.
The following command deletes the employee
role created
in the previous section:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request DELETE \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/role/5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1" { "_id": "5790220a-719b-49ad-96a6-6571e63cbaf1", "_rev": "0000000079c6644f", "name": "employee", "description": "Role granted to workers on the company payroll" }
Note
You cannot delete a role if it is currently granted to one or more users.
If you attempt to delete a role that is granted to a user (either over the
REST interface, or by using the Admin UI), IDM returns an
error. The following command indicates an attempt to remove the
contractor
role while it is still granted to user
scarter:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request DELETE \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/role/6c0afad4-645f-4573-a896-2ad2ae76c29a" { "code": 409, "reason": "Conflict", "message": "Cannot delete a role that is currently granted" }
11.8. Working With Role Assignments
Authorization roles control access to IDM itself. Provisioning roles define rules for how attribute values are updated on external systems. These rules are configured through assignments that are attached to a provisioning role definition. The purpose of an assignment is to provision an attribute or set of attributes, based on an object's role membership.
The synchronization mapping configuration between two resources (defined in
the sync.json
file) provides the basic account
provisioning logic (how an account is mapped from a source to a target
system). Role assignments provide additional provisioning logic that is not
covered in the basic mapping configuration. The attributes and values that
are updated by using assignments might include group membership, access to
specific external resources, and so on. A group of assignments can
collectively represent a role.
Assignment objects are created, updated and deleted like any other managed
object, and are attached to a role by using the relationships mechanism, in
much the same way as a role is granted to a user. Assignment are stored in
the repository and are accessible at the context path
/openidm/managed/assignment
.
This section describes how to manipulate managed assignments over the REST
interface, and by using the Admin UI. When you have created an assignment,
and attached it to a role definition, all user objects that reference that
role definition will, as a result, reference the corresponding assignment
in their effectiveAssignments
attribute.
11.8.1. Creating an Assignment
The easiest way to create an assignment is by using the Admin UI, as follows:
Select Manage > Assignment then select New Assignment on the Assignment List page.
Enter a name and description for the new assignment.
Select the mapping to which the assignment should apply. The mapping indicates the target resource, that is, the resource on which the attributes specified in the assignment will be adjusted.
Select Save to add the assignment.
Select the Attributes tab and select the attribute or attributes whose values will be adjusted by this assignment.
If a regular text field appears, specify what the value of the attribute should be, when this assignment is applied.
If an Item button appears, you can specify a managed object type, such as an object, relationship, or string.
If a Properties button appears, you can specify additional information such as an array of role references.
Select the assignment operation from the dropdown list:
Merge With Target
- the attribute value will be added to any existing values for that attribute. This operation merges the existing value of the target object attribute with the value(s) from the assignment. If duplicate values are found (for attributes that take a list as a value), each value is included only once in the resulting target. This assignment operation is used only with complex attribute values like arrays and objects, and does not work with strings or numbers. (Property:mergeWithTarget
.)Replace Target
- the attribute value will overwrite any existing values for that attribute. The value from the assignment becomes the authoritative source for the attribute. (Property:replaceTarget
.)
Select the unassignment operation from the dropdown list. You can set the unassignment operation to one of the following:
Remove From Target
- the attribute value is removed from the system object when the user is no longer a member of the role, or when the assignment itself is removed from the role definition. (Property:removeFromTarget
.)No Operation
- removing the assignment from the user'seffectiveAssignments
has no effect on the current state of the attribute in the system object. (Property:noOp
.)
(Optional) Select the Events tab to specify any scriptable events associated with this assignment.
The assignment and unassignment operations described in the previous step operate at the attribute level. That is, you specify what should happen with each attribute affected by the assignment when the assignment is applied to a user, or removed from a user.
The scriptable On assignment and On unassignment events operate at the assignment level, rather than the attribute level. You define scripts here to apply additional logic or operations that should be performed when a user (or other object) receives or loses an entire assignment. This logic can be anything that is not restricted to an operation on a single attribute.
For information about the variables available to these scripts, see "Variables Available to Role Assignment Scripts".
Select the Roles tab to attach this assignment to an existing role definition.
To create a new assignment over REST, send a PUT or POST request to the
/openidm/managed/assignment
context path.
The following example creates a new managed assignment named
employee
. The JSON payload in this example shows the
following:
The assignment is applied for the mapping
managedUser_systemLdapAccounts
, so attributes will be updated on the external LDAP system specified in this mapping.The name of the attribute on the external system whose value will be set is
employeeType
and its value will be set toEmployee
.When the assignment is applied during a sync operation, the attribute value
Employee
will be added to any existing values for that attribute. When the assignment is removed (if the role is deleted, or if the managed user is no longer a member of that role), the attribute valueEmployee
will be removed from the values of that attribute.
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request POST \ --data '{ "name" : "employee", "description": "Assignment for employees.", "mapping" : "managedUser_systemLdapAccount", "attributes": [ { "name": "employeeType", "value": [ "Employee" ], "assignmentOperation" : "mergeWithTarget", "unassignmentOperation" : "removeFromTarget" } ] }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/assignment?_action=create" { "_id": "5a145b08-d885-4fba-be21-08f2733ac1c5", "_rev": "00000000f26f9b5c", "name": "employee", "description": "Assignment for employees.", "mapping": "managedUser_systemLdapAccount", "attributes": [ { "name": "employeeType", "value": [ "Employee" ], "assignmentOperation": "mergeWithTarget", "unassignmentOperation": "removeFromTarget" } ] }
Note that at this stage, the assignment is not linked to any role, so no user can make use of the assignment. You must add the assignment to a role, as described in the following section.
11.8.2. Adding an Assignment to a Role
When you have created a managed role, and a managed assignment, you create a relationship between the assignment and the role, in much the same way as a user references a role.
You can update a role definition to include one or more assignments, either by using the Admin UI, or over the REST interface.
- Using the Admin UI
Select Manage > Role and select the role to which you want to add an assignment.
Select the Managed Assignments tab and select Add Managed Assignments.
Select the assignment that you want to add to the role then select Add.
- Over the REST interface
Update the role definition to include a reference to the ID of the assignment in the
assignments
property of the role. The following sample command adds theemployee
assignment (with ID5a145b08-d885-4fba-be21-08f2733ac1c5
) to an existingemployee
role (whose ID isa2e7a145-3d7d-4878-8b41-4d1a224ab53f
):$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request PATCH \ --data '[ { "operation" : "add", "field" : "/assignments/-", "value" : { "_ref": "managed/assignment/5a145b08-d885-4fba-be21-08f2733ac1c5" } } ]' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/role/a2e7a145-3d7d-4878-8b41-4d1a224ab53f" { "_id": "a2e7a145-3d7d-4878-8b41-4d1a224ab53f", "_rev": "00000000fd4060d9", "name": "employee", "description": "Role granted to members on the payroll" }
To check that the assignment was added successfully, query the
assignments
property of the role:$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/role/a2e7a145-3d7d-4878-8b41-4d1a224ab53f/assignments?_queryFilter=true&_fields=_ref/*,name" { "result": [ { "_id": "ef3ed499-8a66-4020-8cc0-3924054188dc", "_rev": "000000004318a7d5", "_ref": "managed/assignment/5a145b08-d885-4fba-be21-08f2733ac1c5", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/assignment", "_refResourceId": "5a145b08-d885-4fba-be21-08f2733ac1c5", "_refProperties": { "_id": "ef3ed499-8a66-4020-8cc0-3924054188dc", "_rev": "000000004318a7d5" } } ], ... }
Note that the role's
assignments
property now references the assignment that you created in the previous step.
To remove an assignment from a role definition, remove the reference to the
assignment from the role's assignments
property.
11.8.3. Deleting an Assignment
You can delete an assignment by using the Admin UI, or over the REST interface.
To delete an assignment by using the Admin UI, select Manage > Assignment, select the assignment you want to remove, then select Delete.
To delete an assignment over the REST interface, simply delete that object.
The following command deletes the employee
assignment
created in the previous section:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request DELETE \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/assignment/5a145b08-d885-4fba-be21-08f2733ac1c5" { "_id": "5a145b08-d885-4fba-be21-08f2733ac1c5", "_rev": "00000000f26f9b5c", "name": "employee", "description": "Assignment for employees.", "mapping": "managedUser_systemLdapAccount", "attributes": [ { "name": "employeeType", "value": [ "Employee" ], "assignmentOperation": "mergeWithTarget", "unassignmentOperation": "removeFromTarget" } ] }
Note
You can delete an assignment, even if it is
referenced by a managed role. When the assignment is removed, any users
to whom the corresponding roles were granted will no longer have that
assignment in their list of effectiveAssignments
. For
more information about effective roles and effective assignments, see
"Understanding Effective Roles and Effective Assignments".
11.8.4. Synchronizing Roles and Assignments
If you have mapped roles and assignments to properties on a target system,
and you are preloading the result set into memory, make sure that your
targetQuery
returns the mapped property. For example, if
you have mapped a specific role to the ldapGroups
property on the target system, the target query must include the
ldapGroups
property when it returns the object.
The following excerpt of a mapping indicates that the target query must
return the _id
of the object as well as its
ldapGroups
property:
"targetQuery": { "_queryFilter" : true, "_fields" : "_id,ldapGroups" },
For more information about preloading the result set for reconciliation operations, see "Improving Reconciliation Query Performance".
11.9. Understanding Effective Roles and Effective Assignments
Effective roles and
effective assignments are virtual properties of a
user object. Their values are calculated on the fly by
the openidm/bin/defaults/script/roles/effectiveRoles.js
and openidm/bin/defaults/script/roles/effectiveAssignments.js
scripts. These scripts are triggered when a managed user is retrieved and
are referenced in onRetrieve
hooks in the managed user
schema.
The effectiveRoles.js
and
effectiveAssignments.js
scripts must
be executed in a specific order. First the effectiveRoles.js
script determines the role grants for a user, processes any temporal
constraints, and sets the effectiveRoles
field in the
user object. Then the effectiveAssignments.js
script
calculates the set of effective assignments, based on the value of the user's
effectiveRoles
property. The scripts are executed in the
order in which they appear in the managed.json
file, so
you must ensure that the effectiveRoles
property is
declared first.
The following excerpt of a managed.json
file shows how
these two virtual properties are constructed for each managed user object:
"effectiveRoles" : { "type" : "array", "title" : "Effective Roles", "description" : "Effective Roles", "viewable" : false, "returnByDefault" : true, "isVirtual" : true, "usageDescription" : "", "isPersonal" : false, "onRetrieve" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "source" : "require('roles/effectiveRoles').calculateEffectiveRoles(object, 'roles');" }, "items" : { "type" : "object", "title" : "Effective Roles Items" } }, "effectiveAssignments" : { "type" : "array", "title" : "Effective Assignments", "description" : "Effective Assignments", "viewable" : false, "returnByDefault" : true, "isVirtual" : true, "usageDescription" : "", "isPersonal" : false, "onRetrieve" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "file" : "roles/effectiveAssignments.js", "effectiveRolesPropName" : "effectiveRoles" }, "items" : { "type" : "object", "title" : "Effective Assignments Items" } },
When a role references an assignment, and a user references the role, that user automatically references the assignment in its list of effective assignments.
The effectiveRoles.js
script uses the
roles
attribute of a user entry to calculate the grants
(manual or conditional) that are currently in effect at the time of
retrieval, based on temporal constraints or other custom scripted logic.
The effectiveAssignments.js
script uses the virtual
effectiveRoles
attribute to calculate that user's
effective assignments. The synchronization engine reads the calculated value
of the effectiveAssignments
attribute when it processes
the user. The target system is updated according to the configured
assignmentOperation
for each assignment.
Do not change the default effectiveRoles.js
and
effectiveAssignments.js
scripts. If you need to change
the logic that calculates effectiveRoles
and
effectiveAssignments
, create your own custom script and
include a reference to it in your project's
conf/managed.json
file. For more information about
using custom scripts, see "Scripting Reference".
When a user entry is retrieved, IDM calculates the
effectiveRoles
and effectiveAssignments
for that user based on the current value of the user's
roles
property, and on any roles that might be granted
dynamically through a custom script. The previous set of examples showed the
creation of a role employee
that referenced an assignment
employee
and was granted to user bjensen. Querying that
user entry would show the following effective roles and effective
assignments:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/managed/user/bjensen?_fields=userName,roles,effectiveRoles,effectiveAssignments" { "_id": "bjensen", "_rev": "00000000edea91fa", "userName": "bjensen", "effectiveRoles": [ { "_ref": "managed/role/a2e7a145-3d7d-4878-8b41-4d1a224ab53f" } ], "effectiveAssignments": [ { "name": "employee", "description": "Assignment for employees.", "mapping": "managedUser_systemLdapAccount", "attributes": [ { "assignmentOperation": "mergeWithTarget", "name": "employeeType", "unassignmentOperation": "removeFromTarget", "value": [ "employee" ] } ], "_rev": "00000000e2c8b067", "_id": "4038e228-7477-4b70-b059-542f30c5be19" } ], "roles": [ { "_ref": "managed/role/a2e7a145-3d7d-4878-8b41-4d1a224ab53f", "_refResourceCollection": "managed/role", "_refResourceId": "a2e7a145-3d7d-4878-8b41-4d1a224ab53f", "_refProperties": { "_grantType": "", "_id": "71d12cf2-3c33-4ec8-9c66-b78c33012bbf", "_rev": "00000000f007a17e" } } ] }
In this example, synchronizing the managed/user repository with the
external LDAP system defined in the mapping should populate user bjensen's
employeeType
attribute in LDAP with the value
employee
.
11.10. Roles and Relationship Change Notification
Before you read this section, see "Configuring Relationship Change Notification"
to understand the notify
and notifyRelationships
properties, and how change notification works for relationships in general.
In the case of roles, the change notification configuration exists to ensure
that managed users are notified when any of the relationships that link
users, roles, and assignments are manipulated (that is, created, updated, or
deleted).
Consider the situation where a user has role R
. A new
assignment A
is created that references role
R
. Ultimately, we want to notify all users that have role
R
so that their reconciliation state will reflect any
attributes in the new assignment A
. We achieve this
notification with the following configuration:
In the managed object schema, the assignment
object
definition has a roles
property that includes a
resourceCollection
. The path
of this
resource collection is managed/role
and
"notify" : true
for the resource collection:
{ "name" : "assignment", "schema" : { ... "properties" : { ... "roles" : { ... "items" : { ... "resourceCollection" : [ { "notify" : true, "path" : "managed/role", "label" : "Role", "query" : { "queryFilter" : "true", "fields" : [ "name" ] } } ... }
With this configuration, when assignment A
is created,
with a reference to role R
, role R
is
notified of the change. However, we still need to propagate that
notification to any users
who are members
of role R
. To do this, we configure the role
object as follows:
{ "name" : "role", "schema" : { ... "properties" : { ... "assignments" : { ... "notifyRelationships" : ["members"] } ... }
When role R
is notified of the creation of a new
relationship to assignment A
, the notification is
propagated through the assignments
property. Because
"notifyRelationships" : ["members"]
is set on the
assignments
property, the notification is propagated
across role R
to all members of role R
.
11.11. Managed Role Script Hooks
Like any other managed object, a role has script hooks that enable you to
configure role behavior. The default role definition in
conf/managed.json
includes the following script hooks:
{ "name" : "role", "onDelete" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "file" : "roles/onDelete-roles.js" }, "postCreate" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "source" : "require('roles/postOperation-roles').manageTemporalConstraints(resourceName);" }, "postUpdate" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "source" : "require('roles/postOperation-roles').manageTemporalConstraints(resourceName);" }, "postDelete" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "source" : "require('roles/postOperation-roles').manageTemporalConstraints(resourceName);" }, ...
When a role is deleted, the onDelete
script hook calls
the bin/default/script/roles/onDelete-roles.js
script.
Directly after a role is created, updated or deleted, the
postCreate
, postUpdate
, and
postDelete
hooks call
roles/postOperation-roles
, which can be found in
bin/defaults/script/roles/postOperation-roles.js
.
Depending on when this script is called, it either creates or removes the
scheduled jobs required to manage temporal constraints on roles.
Chapter 12. Configuring Social Identity Providers
IDM provides a standards-based solution for social authentication requirements, based on the OAuth 2.0 and OpenID Connect 1.0 standards. They are similar, as OpenID Connect 1.0 is an authentication layer built on OAuth 2.0.
This chapter describes how to configure IDM to register and authenticate users with multiple social identity providers.
To configure different social identity providers, you'll take the same general steps:
Set up the provider. You'll need information such as a
Client ID
andClient Secret
to set up an interface with IDM.Configure the provider on IDM.
Set up User Registration. Activate
Social Registration
in the applicable Admin UI screen or configuration file.After configuration is complete, test the result. For a common basic procedure, see "Testing Social Identity Providers".
You can configure how IDM handles authentication using social identity providers by opening the Admin UI and selecting Configure > Authentication > Modules > Social Providers. The Social Providers authentication module is enabled by default. For more information, see "Configuring the Social Providers Authentication Module".
To understand how data is transmitted between IDM and a social identity provider, read "OpenID Connect Authorization Code Flow".
Note
For all social identity providers, set up a FQDN for IDM, along
with information in a DNS server, or system hosts
files. For test purposes, FQDNs that comply with RFC 2606, such as
localhost
and openidm.example.com
,
are acceptable.
12.1. OpenID Connect Authorization Code Flow
The OpenID Connect Authorization Code Flow specifies how IDM (Relying Party) interacts with the OpenID Provider (Social ID Provider), based on the use of the OAuth 2.0 authorization grant. The following sequence diagram illustrates successful processing from the authorization request, through grant of the authorization code, access token, ID token, and provisioning from the social identity provider to IDM.
The following list describes details of each item in the authorization flow:
A user navigates to the IDM End User UI, and selects the
Sign In
link for the desired social identity provider.IDM prepares an authorization request.
IDM sends the request to the Authorization Endpoint that you configured for the social identity provider, with a Client ID.
The social identity provider requests end user authentication and consent.
The end user transmits authentication and consent.
The social identity provider sends a redirect message, with an authorization code, to the end user's browser. The redirect message goes to an
oauthReturn
endpoint, configured inui.context-oauth.json
in your project'sconf/
directory.When you configure a social identity provider, you'll find the endpoint in the applicable configuration file with the following property:
redirectUri
.The browser transmits the redirect message, with the authorization code, to IDM.
IDM records the authorization code, and sends it to the social identity provider Token Endpoint.
The social identity provider token endpoint returns access and ID tokens.
IDM validates the token, and sends it to the social identity provider User Info Endpoint.
The social identity provider responds with information on the user's account, that IDM can provision as a new Managed User.
You'll configure these credentials and endpoints, in some form, for each social identity provider.
12.2. Many Social Identity Providers, One Schema
Most social identity providers include common properties, such as name, email address, icon configuration, and location.
IDM includes two sets of property maps that translate information from a social identity provider to your managed user objects. These property maps are as follows:
The
identityProviders.json
file includes apropertyMap
code block for each supported provider. This file maps properties from the provider to a generic managed user object. You should not customize this file.The
selfservice.propertymap.json
file translates the generic managed user properties to the managed user schema that you have defined inmanaged.json
. If you have customized the managed user schema, this is the file that you must change, to indicate how your custom schema maps to the generic managed user schema.
Examine the identityProviders.json
file in the
conf/
subdirectory for your project. The following
excerpt represents the Facebook propertyMap
code block
from that file:
"propertyMap" : [ { "source" : "id", "target" : "id" }, { "source" : "name", "target" : "displayName" }, { "source" : "first_name", "target" : "givenName" }, { "source" : "last_name", "target" : "familyName" }, { "source" : "email", "target" : "email" }, { "source" : "email", "target" : "username" }, { "source" : "locale", "target" : "locale" } ]
The source lists the Facebook property, the target lists the corresponding property for a generic managed user.
IDM then processes that information through the
selfservice.propertymap.json
file, where the source
corresponds to the generic managed user and the target corresponds to your
customized managed user schema (defined in your project's
managed.json
file).
{ "properties" : [ { "source" : "givenName", "target" : "givenName" }, { "source" : "familyName", "target" : "sn" }, { "source" : "email", "target" : "mail" }, { "source" : "postalAddress", "target" : "postalAddress", "condition" : "/object/postalAddress pr" }, { "source" : "addressLocality", "target" : "city", "condition" : "/object/addressLocality pr" }, { "source" : "addressRegion", "target" : "stateProvince", "condition" : "/object/addressRegion pr" }, { "source" : "postalCode", "target" : "postalCode", "condition" : "/object/postalCode pr" }, { "source" : "country", "target" : "country", "condition" : "/object/country pr" }, { "source" : "phone", "target" : "telephoneNumber", "condition" : "/object/phone pr" }, { "source" : "username", "target" : "userName" } ] }
Tip
To take additional information from a social identity provider, make
sure the property is mapped through the identityProviders.json
and selfservice.propertymap.json
files.
Several of the property mappings include a pr
presence
expression which is a filter that returns all records with the given
attribute. For more information, see "Presence Expressions".
12.3. Setting Up Google as a Social Identity Provider
Take the following basic steps to configure Google as a social identity provider for IDM:
12.3.1. Setting Up Google
To set up Google as a social identity provider, navigate to the Google API Manager. You'll need a Google account. If you have GMail, you already have a Google account. While you could use a personal Google account, it is best to use an organizational account to avoid problems if specific individuals leave your organization. When you set up a Google social identity provider, you'll need to perform the following tasks:
Plan ahead. It may take some time before the Google+
API that you configure for IDM is ready for use.
In the Google API Manager, select and enable the
Google+
API. It is one of the Google "social" APIs.Create a project for IDM.
Create OAuth client ID credentials. You'll need to configure an
OAuth consent screen
with at least a product name and email address.When you set up a Web application for the client ID, you'll need to set up a web client with:
Authorized JavaScript origins
The origin URL for IDM, typically a URL such as
https://openidm.example.com:8443
Authorized redirect URIs
The redirect URI after users are authenticated, typically,
https://openidm.example.com:8443/
In the list of credentials, you'll see a unique
Client ID
andClient secret
. You'll need this information when you configure the Google social identity provider, as described in "Configuring a Google Social Identity Provider".
For Google's procedure, see the Google Identity Platform documentation on Setting Up OAuth 2.0.
12.3.2. Configuring a Google Social Identity Provider
To configure a Google social identity provider, log into the Admin UI and navigate to Configure > Social ID Providers.
Enable the Google social identity provider, and if needed, select the edit icon.
Include the Google values for
Client ID
andClient Secret
for your project, as described earlier in this section.Under regular and
Advanced Options
, include the options shown in the following appendix: "Google Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
When you enable a Google social identity provider in the Admin UI,
IDM generates the identityProvider-google.json
file in your project's conf/
subdirectory.
When you review that file, you should see information from what you
configured in the Admin UI, and beyond. The first part of the file includes
the name of the provider, endpoints, as well as the values for
clientId
and clientSecret
.
{ "enabled" : true, "authorizationEndpoint" : "https://accounts.google.com/o/oauth2/v2/auth", "tokenEndpoint" : "https://www.googleapis.com/oauth2/v4/token", "userInfoEndpoint" : "https://www.googleapis.com/oauth2/v3/userinfo", "wellKnownEndpoint" : "https://accounts.google.com/.well-known/openid-configuration" "clientId" : "<someUUID>", "clientSecret" : { "$crypto" : { "type" : "x-simple-encryption", "value" : { "cipher" : "AES/CBC/PKCS5Padding", "stableId" : "openidm-sym-default", "salt" : "<hashValue>", "data" : "<encryptedValue>", "keySize" : 16, "purpose" : "idm.config.encryption", "iv" : "<encryptedValue>", "mac" : "<hashValue>" } } }, ...
You should also see UI settings related to the social identity provider icon (badge) and the sign-in button, described in "Social Identity Provider Button and Badge Properties".
You'll see links related to the authenticationIdKey
,
redirectUri
, scopes
, and
configClass
; the location may vary.
The file includes schema
information,
which includes properties for each social identity account, as collected by
IDM, as well as the order in which it appears in the Admin UI.
When you've registered a user with a Google social identity, you can verify
this by selecting Manage > Google, and then selecting a user.
Another part of the file includes a propertyMap
, which
maps user information entries between the source
(social identity provider) and the target
(IDM).
If you need more information about the properties in this file, refer to the following appendix: "Google Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
12.3.3. Configuring User Registration to Link to Google
Once you've configured the Google social identity provider, you can activate it through User Registration. To do so in the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration, and under the Social tab, enable the option associated with Social Registration. For more information on user self-service features, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
When you enable social registration, you're allowing users to register on IDM through all active social identity providers.
12.4. Setting Up LinkedIn as a Social Identity Provider
As suggested in the introduction to this chapter, you'll need to take the following basic steps to configure LinkedIn as a social identity provider for IDM:
12.4.1. Setting Up LinkedIn
To set up LinkedIn as a social identity provider, navigate to the
LinkedIn
Developers page for My Applications
.
You'll need a LinkedIn account. While you could use a personal LinkedIn
account, it is best to use an organizational account to avoid problems if
specific individuals leave your organization. When you set up a LinkedIn
social identity provider, you'll need to perform the following tasks:
In the LinkedIn Developers page for My Applications, select Create Application.
You'll need to include the following information when creating an application:
Company Name
Application Name
Description
Application Logo
Application Use
Website URL
Business Email
Business Phone
When you see Authentication Keys for your LinkedIn application, save the
Client ID
andClient Secret
.Enable the following default application permissions:
r_basicprofile
r_emailaddress
When you set up a Web application for the client ID, you'll need to set up a web client with OAuth 2.0 Authorized Redirect URLs. For example, if your IDM FQDN is
openidm.example.com
, add the following URL:http://openidm.example.com:8080/
You can ignore any LinkedIn URL boxes related to OAuth 1.0a.
For LinkedIn's procedure, see their documentation on Authenticating with OAuth 2.0.
12.4.2. Configuring a LinkedIn Social Identity Provider
To configure a LinkedIn social identity provider, log into the Admin UI and navigate to Configure > Social ID Providers.
Enable the LinkedIn social identity provider.
Include the values that LinkedIn created for
Client ID
andClient Secret
, as described in "Setting Up LinkedIn".Under regular and
Advanced Options
, include the options shown in the following appendix: "LinkedIn Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
When you enable a LinkedIn social identity provider, IDM
generates the identityProvider-linkedIn.json
file in your
project's conf/
subdirectory.
When you review that file, you should see information beyond what you see
in the Admin UI. The first part of the file includes the name of the provider,
endpoints, as well as the values for clientId
and
clientSecret
.
{ "provider" : "linkedIn", "authorizationEndpoint" : "https://www.linkedin.com/oauth/v2/authorization", "tokenEndpoint" : "https://www.linkedin.com/oauth/v2/accessToken", "userInfoEndpoint" : "https://api.linkedin.com/v1/people/~:(id,formatted-name,first-name,last-name,email-address,location)?format=json" "provider" : "linkedIn", "clientId" : "<someUUID>", "clientSecret" : { "$crypto" : { "type" : "x-simple-encryption", "value" : { "cipher" : "AES/CBC/PKCS5Padding", "stableId" : "openidm-sym-default", "salt" : "<hashValue>", "data" : "<encryptedValue>", "keySize" : 16, "purpose" : "idm.config.encryption", "iv" : "<encryptedValue>", "mac" : "<hashValue>" } } }, "scope" : [ "r_basicprofile", "r_emailaddress" ], ...
You should also see UI settings related to the social identity provider icon (badge) and the sign-in button, described in "Social Identity Provider Button and Badge Properties".
You'll see links related to the authenticationIdKey
,
redirectUri
, and configClass
; the
location may vary.
Another part of the file includes a propertyMap
, which
maps user information entries between the source
(social identity provider) and the target
(IDM).
The file includes schema
information,
which includes properties for each social identity account, as collected by
IDM, as well as the order in which it appears in the Admin UI.
When you've registered a user with a LinkedIn social identity, you can verify
this by selecting Manage > LinkedIn, and then selecting a user.
If you need more information about the properties in this file, refer to the following appendix: "LinkedIn Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
12.4.3. Configuring User Registration With LinkedIn
Once you've configured the LinkedIn social identity provider, you can activate it through User Registration. To do so in the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration. Under the Social tab, enable the option associated with Social Registration. For more information about user self-service features, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
When you enable social registration, you're allowing users to register on IDM through all active social identity providers.
12.5. Setting Up Facebook as a Social Identity Provider
As suggested in the introduction to this chapter, you'll need to take the following basic steps to configure Facebook as a social identity provider for IDM:
Note
As of October 2018, Facebook as a social identity provider requires access over secure HTTP (HTTPS).
12.5.1. Setting Up Facebook
To set up Facebook as a social identity provider, navigate to the Facebook for Developers page. You'll need a Facebook account. While you could use a personal Facebook account, it is best to use an organizational account to avoid problems if specific individuals leave your organization. When you set up a Facebook social identity provider, you'll need to perform the following tasks:
In the Facebook for Developers page, select My Apps and Add a New App. For IDM, you'll create a
Website
application.You'll need to include the following information when creating a Facebook website application:
Display Name
Contact Email
IDM URL
When complete, you should see your App. Navigate to Basic Settings.
Make a copy of the
App ID
andApp Secret
for when you configure the Facebook social identity provider in IDM.In the settings for your App, you should see an entry for
App Domains
, such asexample.com
, as well as a Website Site URL, such ashttps://idm.example.com/
.
For Facebook's documentation on the subject, see Facebook Login for the Web with the JavaScript SDK.
12.5.2. Configuring a Facebook Social Identity Provider
To configure a Facebook social identity provider, log into the Admin UI and navigate to Configure > Social ID Providers.
Enable the Facebook social identity provider.
Include the values that Facebook created for
App ID
andApp Secret
, as described in "Setting Up Facebook".Under regular and
Advanced Options
, include the options shown in the following appendix: "Facebook Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
When you enable a Facebook social identity provider in the Admin UI,
IDM generates the identityProvider-facebook.json
file in your project's conf/
subdirectory.
It includes parts of the file that you may have configured through the Admin
UI. While the labels in the UI specify App ID and App Secret, you'll see
them as clientId
and clientSecret
,
respectively, in the configuration file.
{ "provider" : "facebook", "authorizationEndpoint" : "https://www.facebook.com/dialog/oauth", "tokenEndpoint" : "https://graph.facebook.com/v2.7/oauth/access_token", "userInfoEndpoint" : "https://graph.facebook.com/me?fields=id,name,picture,email,first_name,last_name,locale" "clientId" : "<someUUID>", "clientSecret" : { "$crypto" : { "type" : "x-simple-encryption", "value" : { "cipher" : "AES/CBC/PKCS5Padding", "stableId" : "openidm-sym-default", "salt" : "<hashValue>", "data" : "<encryptedValue>", "keySize" : 16, "purpose" : "idm.config.encryption", "iv" : "<encryptedValue>", "mac" : "<hashValue>" } } }, "scope" : [ "email", "user_birthday" ], ...
You should also see UI settings related to the social identity provider icon (badge) and the sign-in button, described in "Social Identity Provider Button and Badge Properties".
You'll see links related to the authenticationIdKey
,
redirectUri
, and configClass
; the
location may vary.
The file includes schema
information,
which includes properties for each social identity account, as collected by
IDM, as well as the order in which it appears in the Admin UI.
When you've registered a user with a Facebook social identity, you can verify
this by selecting Manage > Facebook, and then selecting a user.
Another part of the file includes a propertyMap
, which
maps user information entries between the source
(social identity provider) and the target
(IDM).
If you need more information about the properties in this file, refer to the following appendix: "Facebook Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
12.5.3. Configuring User Registration to Link to Facebook
Once you've configured the Facebook social identity provider, you can activate it through User Registration. To do so in the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration, and under the Social tab, enable the option associated with Social Registration. For more information about user self-service features, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
When you enable social registration, you're allowing users to register on IDM through all active social identity providers.
12.6. Setting Up Amazon as an IDM Social Identity Provider
As suggested in the introduction to this chapter, you'll need to take the following basic steps to configure Amazon as a social identity provider for IDM:
Note
Amazon as a social identity provider requires access over secure HTTP (HTTPS).
12.6.1. Setting Up Amazon
To set up Amazon as a social identity provider, navigate to the following Amazon page: Register Your Website With Login With Amazon . You'll need an Amazon account. You'll also need to register a security profile.
When you set up Amazon as a social identity provider, navigate to the Amazon Security Profile Management page. You'll need to enter the following:
Security Profile Name (The name of your app)
Security Profile Description
Consent Privacy Notice URL
Consent Logo Image (optional)
When complete and saved, you should see a list of security profiles with
OAuth2
credentials. You should be able to find the
Client ID
and Client Secret
from this
screen.
However, you still need to configure the web settings for your new
Security Profile. You can find a list of your existing Security Profiles on the
Login with Amazon Developer Console Page
. You can access that page from the Amazon Developer Console dashboard
by selecting Apps and Services > Login with Amazon. You can then
Manage
the Web Settings
for that app.
In the Web Settings
for your app, you'll need to set
either of the following properties:
Allowed Origins, which should match the URL for your registration page, such as
https://openidm.example.com:8443
Allowed Return URLs, which should match the redirect URIs described in "Configuring an Amazon Social Identity Provider". You may see URIs such as
https://openidm.example.com:8443/
.
12.6.2. Configuring an Amazon Social Identity Provider
To configure an Amazon social identity provider, log into the Admin UI and navigate to Configure > Social ID Providers.
Enable the Amazon social identity provider.
In the
Amazon Provider
pop-up that appears, the values forRedirect URI
should match the values that you've entered for Allowed Return URLs in "Setting Up Amazon".Include the values that Amazon created for
Client ID
andClient Secret
, as described in "Setting Up Amazon".Under regular and
Advanced Options
, include the options shown in the following appendix: "Amazon Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
When you enable an Amazon social identity provider in the Admin UI,
IDM generates the identityProvider-amazon.json
file in your project's conf/
subdirectory.
When you review that file, you should see information beyond what you see
in the Admin UI. The first part of the file includes the name of the provider,
endpoints, as well as the values for clientId
and
clientSecret
.
{ "provider" : "amazon", "authorizationEndpoint" : "https://www.amazon.com/ap/oa", "tokenEndpoint" : "https://api.amazon.com/auth/o2/token", "userInfoEndpoint" : "https://api.amazon.com/user/profile" "enabled" : true, "clientId" : "<someUUID>", "clientSecret" : { "$crypto" : { "type" : "x-simple-encryption", "value" : { "cipher" : "AES/CBC/PKCS5Padding", "stableId" : "openidm-sym-default", "salt" : "<hashValue>", "data" : "<encryptedValue>", "keySize" : 16, "purpose" : "idm.config.encryption", "iv" : "<encryptedValue>", "mac" : "<hashValue>" } } }, "scope" : [ "profile" ], ...
You should also see UI settings related to the social identity provider icon (badge) and the sign-in button, described in "Social Identity Provider Button and Badge Properties".
You'll see links related to the authenticationIdKey
,
redirectUri
, and configClass
; the
location may vary.
The file includes schema
information, which includes
properties for each social identity account, as collected by
IDM, as well as the order in which it appears in the Admin UI.
When you've registered a user with an Amazon social identity, you can verify
this by selecting Manage > Amazon, and then selecting a user.
Another part of the file includes a propertyMap
, which
maps user information entries between the source
(social identity provider) and the target
(IDM).
If you need more information about the properties in this file, refer to the following appendix: "Amazon Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
12.6.3. Configuring User Registration to Link to Amazon
Once you've configured the Amazon social identity provider, you can activate it through User Registration. To do so in the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration, and activate that feature. Under the Social tab that appears, enable Social Registration. For more information on IDM user self-service features, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
When you enable Social Registration, you're allowing users to register on IDM through all active social identity providers.
12.7. Setting Up Microsoft as an IDM Social Identity Provider
As suggested in the introduction to this chapter, you'll need to take the following basic steps to configure Microsoft as a social identity provider for IDM:
Note
Microsoft as a social identity provider requires access over secure
HTTP (HTTPS). This example assumes that you've configured IDM on
https://openidm.example.com:8443
. Substitute your URL
for openidm.example.com
.
12.7.1. Setting Up Microsoft
For Microsoft documentation on how to set up a social identity provider, navigate to the following article: Sign-in Microsoft Account & Azure AD users in a single app . You'll need a Microsoft account.
To set up Microsoft as a social identity provider:
Navigate to the Microsoft app registration portal at https://apps.dev.microsoft.com/ and sign in with your Microsoft account.
Select Add an App and give your app a name.
The portal will assign your app a unique
Application ID
.To find your
Application Secret
, select Generate New Password. That password is your Application Secret.Tip
Save your new password. It is the only time you'll see the
Application Secret
for your new app.Select Add Platform. You'll choose a
Web
platform, enableAllow Implicit Flow
and set up the following value forRedirect URI
:https://openidm.example.com:8443/
If desired, you can also enter the following information:
Logo image
Terms of Service URL
Privacy Statement URL
The OAuth2
credentials for your new Microsoft App include
an Application ID
and Application Secret
for your app.
12.7.2. Configuring a Microsoft Social Identity Provider
To configure a Microsoft social identity provider, log into the Admin UI and navigate to Configure > Social ID Providers.
Enable the Microsoft social identity provider.
In the
Microsoft Provider
pop-up that appears, the values forRedirect URI
should match the values that you've entered for Allowed Return URLs in "Setting Up Microsoft".Include the values that Microsoft created for
Client ID
andClient Secret
, as described in "Setting Up Microsoft".Under regular and
Advanced Options
, include the options shown in the following appendix: "Microsoft Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
When you enable a Microsoft social identity provider in the Admin UI,
IDM generates the identityProvider-microsoft.json
file in your project's conf/
subdirectory.
It includes parts of the file that you may have configured through the Admin
UI. While the labels in the UI specify Application ID and Application Secret,
you'll see them as clientId
and
clientSecret
, respectively, in the configuration file.
"provider" : "microsoft", "authorizationEndpoint" : "https://login.microsoftonline.com/common/oauth2/v2.0/authorize", "tokenEndpoint" : "https://login.microsoftonline.com/common/oauth2/v2.0/token", "userInfoEndpoint" : "https://graph.microsoft.com/v1.0/me" "clientId" : "<someUUID>", "clientSecret" : { "$crypto" : { "type" : "x-simple-encryption", "value" : { "cipher" : "AES/CBC/PKCS5Padding", "stableId" : "openidm-sym-default", "salt" : "<hashValue>", "data" : "<encryptedValue>", "keySize" : 16, "purpose" : "idm.config.encryption", "iv" : "<encryptedValue>", "mac" : "<hashValue>" } } }, "scope" : [ "User.Read" ], ...
You should also see UI settings related to the social identity provider icon (badge) and the sign-in button, described in "Social Identity Provider Button and Badge Properties".
You'll see links related to the authenticationIdKey
,
redirectUri
, and configClass
; the
location may vary.
The file includes schema
information,
which includes properties for each social identity account, as collected by
IDM, as well as the order in which it appears in the Admin UI.
When you've registered a user with a Microsoft social identity, you can
verify this by selecting Manage > Microsoft, and then selecting a user.
Another part of the file includes a propertyMap
, which
maps user information entries between the source
(social identity provider) and the target
(IDM).
If you need more information about the properties in this file, refer to the following appendix: "Microsoft Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
12.7.3. Configuring User Registration to Link to Microsoft
Once you've configured the Microsoft social identity provider, you can activate it through User Registration. To do so in the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration, and activate that feature. Under the Social tab that appears, enable Social Registration. For more information on IDM user self-service features, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
When you enable Social Registration, you're allowing users to register on IDM through all active social identity providers.
12.8. Setting Up WordPress as an IDM Social Identity Provider
As suggested in the introduction to this chapter, you'll need to take the following basic steps to configure WordPress as a social identity provider for IDM:
12.8.1. Setting Up WordPress
To set up WordPress as a social identity provider, navigate to the following WordPress Developers page: Developer Resources . You'll need a WordPress account. You can then navigate to the WordPress My Applications page, where you can create a new web application, with the following information:
Name
Description
Website URL, which becomes your Application URL
Redirect URL(s); for IDM, normally
http://openidm.example.com:8080/
Type, which allows you to select Web clients
When complete and saved, you should see a list of OAuth
Information
for your new web application. That information should
include your Client ID
and Client Secret
.
12.8.2. Configuring a WordPress Social Identity Provider
To configure a WordPress social identity provider, log into the Admin UI and navigate to Configure > Social ID Providers.
Enable the WordPress social identity provider.
In the
WordPress Provider
pop-up that appears, the values forRedirect URI
should match the values that you've entered for Allowed Return URLs in "Setting Up WordPress".Include the values that WordPress created for
Client ID
andClient Secret
, as described in "Setting Up WordPress".Under regular and
Advanced Options
, include the options shown in the following appendix: "WordPress Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
When you enable a WordPress social identity provider in the Admin UI,
IDM generates the identityProvider-wordpress.json
file in your project's conf/
subdirectory.
When you review that file, you should see information beyond what you see
in the Admin UI. The first part of the file includes the name of the provider,
endpoints, as well as the values for clientId
and
clientSecret
.
{ "provider" : "wordpress", "authorizationEndpoint" : "https://public-api.wordpress.com/oauth2/authorize", "tokenEndpoint" : "https://public-api.wordpress.com/oauth2/token", "userInfoEndpoint" : "https://public-api.wordpress.com/rest/v1.1/me/", "enabled" : true, "clientId" : "<someUUID>", "clientSecret" : { "$crypto" : { "type" : "x-simple-encryption", "value" : { "cipher" : "AES/CBC/PKCS5Padding", "stableId" : "openidm-sym-default", "salt" : "<hashValue>", "data" : "<encryptedValue>", "keySize" : 16, "purpose" : "idm.config.encryption", "iv" : "<encryptedValue>", "mac" : "<hashValue>" } } }, "scope" : [ "auth" ], ...
You should also see UI settings related to the social identity provider icon (badge) and the sign-in button, described in "Social Identity Provider Button and Badge Properties".
You'll see links related to the authenticationIdKey
,
redirectUri
, and configClass
; the
location may vary.
The file includes schema
information, which includes
properties for each social identity account, as collected by
IDM, as well as the order in which it appears in the Admin UI.
When you've registered a user with a Wordpress social identity, you can
verify this by selecting Manage > Wordpress, and then selecting a user.
Another part of the file includes a propertyMap
, which
maps user information entries between the source
(social identity provider) and the target
(IDM).
If you need more information about the properties in this file, refer to the following appendix: "WordPress Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
12.8.3. Configuring User Registration to Link to WordPress
Once you've configured the WordPress social identity provider, you can activate it through User Registration. To do so in the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration, and activate that feature. Under the Social tab that appears, enable Social Registration. For more information on IDM user self-service features, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
When you enable Social Registration, you're allowing users to register on IDM through all active social identity providers.
12.9. Setting Up WeChat as an IDM Social Identity Provider
As suggested in the introduction to this chapter, you'll need to take the following basic steps to configure WeChat as a social identity provider for IDM:
These requirements assume that you have a WeChat developer account where you can get access to create WeChat web application credentials. To verify access, you'll need the WeChat app on your mobile phone.
12.9.1. Setting Up WeChat
To set up WeChat as a social identity provider, you'll need to get the following information for your WeChat app. The name may be different in WeChat.
Client ID (WeChat uses
appid
as of this writing.)Client Secret (WeChat uses
secret
as of this writing.)Scope
Authorization Endpoint URL
Token Endpoint URL
User Info Endpoint URL
Redirect URI, normally something like
http://openidm.example.com/
WeChat Unique Requirements
Before testing WeChat, be prepared for the following special requirements:
WeChat works only if you deploy IDM on one of the following ports: 80 or 443.
For more information on how to configure IDM to use these ports, see "Host and Port Information".
For registration and sign-in, WeChat requires the use of a mobile device with a Quick Response (QR) code reader.
For sign-in, you'll also need to install the WeChat app on your mobile device.
12.9.2. Configuring a WeChat Social Identity Provider
To configure a WeChat social identity provider, log into the Admin UI and navigate to Configure > Social ID Providers.
Enable the WeChat social identity provider.
In the
WeChat Provider
pop-up that appears, the values forRedirect URI
should match the values that you've entered for Allowed Return URLs in "Setting Up WeChat".Include the values that WeChat created for
Client ID
andClient Secret
, as described in "Setting Up WeChat".Under regular and
Advanced Options
, include the options shown in the following appendix: "WeChat Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
When you enable a WeChat social identity provider in the Admin UI,
IDM generates the identityProvider-wechat.json
file in your project's conf/
subdirectory.
When you review that file, you should see information from what you
configured in the Admin UI, and beyond. The first part of the file includes
the name of the provider, endpoints, scopes, as well as the values for
clientId
and clientSecret
.
{ "provider" : "wechat", ... "clientId" : "<someUUID>", "clientSecret" : { "$crypto" : { "type" : "x-simple-encryption", "value" : { "cipher" : "AES/CBC/PKCS5Padding", "stableId" : "openidm-sym-default", "salt" : "<hashValue>", "data" : "<encryptedValue>", "keySize" : 16, "purpose" : "idm.config.encryption", "iv" : "<encryptedValue>", "mac" : "<hashValue>" } } }, "authorizationEndpoint" : "https://open.weixin.qq.com/connect/qrconnect", "tokenEndpoint" : "https://api.wechat.com/sns/oauth2/access_token", "refreshTokenEndpoint" : "https://api.wechat.com/sns/oauth2/refresh_token", "userInfoEndpoint" : "https://api.wechat.com/sns/userinfo", "redirectUri" : "http://openidm.example.com:8080/", "scope" : [ "snsapi_login" ], ...
You should also see UI settings related to the social identity provider icon (badge) and the sign-in button, described in "Social Identity Provider Button and Badge Properties".
You'll see links related to the authenticationIdKey
,
redirectUri
, and configClass
; the
location may vary.
The file includes schema
information, which includes
properties for each social identity account, as collected by
IDM, as well as the order in which it appears in the Admin UI.
When you've registered a user with a WeChat social identity, you can verify
this by selecting Manage > WeChat, and then selecting a user.
Another part of the file includes a propertyMap
, which
maps user information entries between the source
(social identity provider) and the target
(IDM).
If you need more information about the properties in this file, refer to the following appendix: "WeChat Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
12.9.3. Configuring User Registration to Link to WeChat
Once you've configured the WeChat social identity provider, you can activate it through User Registration. To do so in the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration, and activate that feature. Under the Social tab that appears, enable Social Registration. For more information on IDM user self-service features, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
When you enable Social Registration, you're allowing users to register on IDM through all active social identity providers.
12.10. Setting Up Instagram as an IDM Social Identity Provider
As suggested in the introduction to this chapter, you'll need to take the following basic steps to configure Instagram as a social identity provider for IDM:
12.10.1. Setting Up Instagram
To set up Instagram as a social identity provider, navigate to the following page: Instagram Developer Documentation . You'll need an Instagram account. You can then navigate to the Manage Clients page, where you can follow the Instagram process to create a new web application. As of this writing, you can do so on their Register a new Client ID page, where you'll need the following information:
Application Name
Description
Website URL for your app, such as
http://openidm.example.com:8080
Redirect URL(s); for IDM:
http://openidm.example.com:8080/
When complete and saved, you should see a list of OAuth
Information
for your new webapp. That information should be included
in your Client ID
and Client Secret
.
12.10.2. Configuring an Instagram Social Identity Provider
To configure an Instagram social identity provider, log into the Admin UI and navigate to Configure > Social ID Providers.
Enable the Instagram social identity provider.
In the
Instagram Provider
pop-up that appears, the values forRedirect URI
should match the values that you've entered for Valid Redirect URIs in "Setting Up Instagram".Include the values that Instagram created for
Client ID
andClient Secret
, as described in "Setting Up Instagram".Under regular and
Advanced Options
, include the options shown in the following appendix: "Instagram Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
When you enable an Instagram social identity provider in the Admin UI,
IDM generates the identityProvider-instagram.json
file in your project's conf/
subdirectory.
When you review that file, you should see information from what you
configured in the Admin UI, and beyond. The first part of the file includes
the name of the provider, endpoints, scopes, as well as the values for
clientId
and clientSecret
.
{ "provider" : "instagram", ... "clientId" : "<Client_ID_Name>", "clientSecret" : { "$crypto" : { "type" : "x-simple-encryption", "value" : { "cipher" : "AES/CBC/PKCS5Padding", "stableId" : "openidm-sym-default", "salt" : "<hashValue>", "data" : "<encryptedValue>", "keySize" : 16, "purpose" : "idm.config.encryption", "iv" : "<encryptedValue>", "mac" : "<hashValue>" } } }, "authorizationEndpoint" : "https://api.instagram.com/oauth/authorize/", "tokenEndpoint" : "https://api.instagram.com/oauth/access_token", "userInfoEndpoint" : "https://api.instagram.com/v1/users/self/", "redirectUri" : "http://openidm.example.com:8080/", "scope" : [ "basic", "public_content" ], ...
Another part of the file includes a propertyMap
, which
maps user information entries between the source
(social identity provider) and the target
(IDM).
The file includes schema
information,
which includes properties for each social identity account, as collected by
IDM, as well as the order in which it appears in the Admin UI.
When you've registered a user with an Instagram social identity, you can
verify this by selecting Manage > Instagram, and then selecting a user.
If you need more information about the properties in this file, refer to the following appendix: "Instagram Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
12.10.3. Configuring User Registration to Link to Instagram
Once you've configured the Instagram social identity provider, you can activate it through User Registration. To do so in the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration, and activate that feature. Under the Social tab that appears, enable Social Registration. For more information on IDM user self-service features, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
When you enable Social Registration, you're allowing users to register on IDM through all active social identity providers.
12.11. Setting Up Vkontakte as an IDM Social Identity Provider
As suggested in the introduction to this chapter, you'll need to take the following basic steps to configure Vkontakte as a social identity provider for IDM:
Note
When you configure a Vkontakte app, look for an Application ID
and a Secure Key. IDM uses this information
as a clientId
and clientSecret
,
respectively.
12.11.1. Setting Up Vkontakte
To set up Vkontakte as a social identity provider, navigate to the following Vkontakte page: Vkontakte Developers Page . You'll need a Vkontakte account. Find a My Apps link. You can then create an application with the following information:
Title (The name of your app)
Platform (Choose Website)
Site Address (The URL of your IDM deployment, such as
http://openidm.example.com:8080/
Base domain (Example:
example.com
)Authorized Redirect URI (Example:
http://openidm.example.com:8080/
)API Version; for the current VKontakte API version, see VK Developers Documentation, API Versions section. The default VKontakte API version used for IDM 6.5 is 5.73.
If you leave and need to return to Vkontakte, navigate to
https://vk.com/dev
and select My Apps.
You can then Manage the new apps that you've created.
Navigate to the Settings for your app, where you'll find the Application ID and Secure Key for your app. You'll use that information as shown here:
Vkontakte Application ID = IDM Client ID
Vkontakte Secure Key = IDM Client Secret
12.11.2. Configuring a Vkontakte Social Identity Provider
To configure a Vkontakte social identity provider, log into the Admin UI and navigate to Configure > Social ID Providers.
Enable the Vkontakte social identity provider.
In the
Vkontakte Provider
pop-up that appears, the values forRedirect URI
should match the values that you've entered for Authorized Redirect URI in "Setting Up Vkontakte".Include the values that Vkontakte created for
Client ID
andClient Secret
, as described in "Setting Up Vkontakte".Under regular and
Advanced Options
, include the options shown in the following appendix: "Vkontakte Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
When you enable a Vkontakte social identity provider in the Admin UI,
IDM generates the identityProvider-vkontakte.json
file in your project's conf/
subdirectory.
When you review that file, you should see information beyond what you see
in the Admin UI. The first part of the file includes the name of the provider,
endpoints, as well as information from the Consumer Key
and Consumer Secret, you'll see them as
clientId
and clientSecret
, respectively,
in the configuration file.
{ "provider" : "vkontakte", "configClass" : "org.forgerock.oauth.clients.vk.VKClientConfiguration", "basicAuth" : false, "clientId" : "<someUUID>", "clientSecret" : { "$crypto" : { "type" : "x-simple-encryption", "value" : { "cipher" : "AES/CBC/PKCS5Padding", "stableId" : "openidm-sym-default", "salt" : "<hashValue>", "data" : "<encryptedValue>", "keySize" : 16, "purpose" : "idm.config.encryption", "iv" : "<encryptedValue>", "mac" : "<hashValue>" } } }, "authorizationEndpoint" : "https://oauth.vk.com/authorize", "tokenEndpoint" : "https://oauth.vk.com/access_token", "userInfoEndpoint" : "https://api.vk.com/method/users.get", "redirectUri" : "http://openidm.example.com:8080/", "apiVersion" : "5.73", "scope" : [ "email" ], ...
You should also see UI settings related to the social identity provider icon (badge) and the sign-in button, described in "Social Identity Provider Button and Badge Properties".
You'll see links related to the authenticationIdKey
,
redirectUri
, and configClass
; the
location may vary.
The file includes schema
information, which includes
properties for each social identity account, as collected by
IDM, as well as the order in which it appears in the Admin UI.
When you've registered a user with a Vkontakte social identity, you can verify
this by selecting Manage > Vkontakte, and then selecting a user.
Another part of the file includes a propertyMap
, which
maps user information entries between the source
(social identity provider) and the target
(IDM).
If you need more information about the properties in this file, refer to the following appendix: "Vkontakte Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
12.11.3. Configuring User Registration to Link to Vkontakte
Once you've configured the Vkontakte social identity provider, you can activate it through User Registration. To do so in the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration, and activate that feature. Under the Social tab that appears, enable Social Registration. For more information on IDM user self-service features, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
When you enable Social Registration, you're allowing users to register on IDM through all active social identity providers.
12.12. Setting Up Salesforce as an IDM Social Identity Provider
As suggested in the introduction to this chapter, you'll need to take the following basic steps to configure Salesforce as a social identity provider for IDM:
Note
When you configure a Salesforce app, look for a Consumer Key
and a Consumer Secret. IDM uses this information
as a clientId
and clientSecret
,
respectively.
For reference, read through the following Salesforce documentation: Connected Apps Overview.
12.12.1. Setting Up Salesforce
To set up Salesforce as a social identity provider, you will need a Salesforce developer account. Log in to the Salesforce Developers Page with your developer account credentials and create a new Connected App.
Note
These instructions were written with the Winter '19 Release of the Salesforce API. The menu items might differ slightly if you are working with a different version of the API.
Under App Setup, select Create > Apps > Connected Apps > New. You will need to add the following information:
Connected App Name
API Name (defaults to the Connected App Name)
Contact Email
Activate the following option: Enable OAuth Settings
Callback URL (also known as the Redirect URI for other providers), for example
https://localhost:8443/
.The Callback URL must correspond to the URL that you use to log in to the IDM Admin UI.
Add the following OAuth scopes:
Access and Manage your data (api)
Access your basic information (id, profile, email, address, phone)
Perform requests on your behalf at any time (refresh_token, offline_access)
Provide access to your data via the Web (web)
Note that these must be added even if you are otherwise planning to use the
full
OAuth scope.
After you have saved the Connected App, it might take a few minutes for the new app to appear under Administration Setup > Manage Apps > Connected Apps.
Select the new Connected App then locate the Consumer Key and Consumer Secret (under the API list). You'll use that information as shown here:
Salesforce Consumer Key = IDM Client ID
Salesforce Consumer Secret = IDM Client Secret
12.12.2. Configuring a Salesforce Social Identity Provider
To configure a Salesforce social identity provider, log into the Admin UI and navigate to Configure > Social ID Providers.
Enable the Salesforce social identity provider.
In the
Salesforce Provider
pop-up that appears, the values forRedirect URI
should match the value that you've entered for Callback URL in "Setting Up Salesforce".Include the values that Salesforce created for
Consumer Key
andConsumer Secret
, as described in "Setting Up Salesforce".Under regular and
Advanced Options
, include the options shown in the following appendix: "Salesforce Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
When you enable a Salesforce social identity provider in the Admin UI,
IDM generates the identityProvider-salesforce.json
file in your project's conf/
subdirectory.
It includes parts of the file that you may have configured through the Admin
UI. While the labels in the UI specify Consumer Key and Consumer Secret,
you'll see them as clientId
and
clientSecret
, respectively, in the configuration file.
{ "provider" : "salesforce", "authorizationEndpoint" : "https://login.salesforce.com/services/oauth2/authorize", "tokenEndpoint" : "https://login.salesforce.com/services/oauth2/token", "userInfoEndpoint" : "https://login.salesforce.com/services/oauth2/userinfo", "clientId" : "<someUUID>", "clientSecret" : { "$crypto" : { "type" : "x-simple-encryption", "value" : { "cipher" : "AES/CBC/PKCS5Padding", "stableId" : "openidm-sym-default", "salt" : "<hashValue>", "data" : "<encryptedValue>", "keySize" : 16, "purpose" : "idm.config.encryption", "iv" : "<encryptedValue>", "mac" : "<hashValue>" } } }, "scope" : [ "id", "api", "web" ],
You should also see UI settings related to the social identity provider icon (badge) and the sign-in button, described in "Social Identity Provider Button and Badge Properties".
You'll see links related to the authenticationIdKey
,
redirectUri
, and configClass
; the
location may vary.
The file includes schema
information,
which includes properties for each social identity account, as collected by
IDM, as well as the order in which it appears in the Admin UI.
When you've registered a user with a Salesforce social identity, you can
verify this by selecting Manage > Salesforce, and then selecting a user.
Another part of the file includes a propertyMap
, which
maps user information entries between the source
(social identity provider) and the target
(IDM).
If you need more information about the properties in this file, refer to the following appendix: "Salesforce Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
12.12.3. Configuring User Registration to Link to Salesforce
Once you've configured the Salesforce social identity provider, you can activate it through User Registration. To do so in the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration, and activate that feature. Under the Social tab that appears, enable Social Registration. For more information on IDM user self-service features, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
When you enable Social Registration, you're allowing users to register on IDM through all active social identity providers.
12.13. Setting Up Yahoo as an IDM Social Identity Provider
As suggested in the introduction to this chapter, you'll need to take the following basic steps to configure Yahoo as a social identity provider for IDM:
12.13.1. Setting Up Yahoo
To set up Yahoo as a social identity provider, navigate to the following page: Yahoo OAuth 2.0 Guide . You'll need a Yahoo account. You can then navigate to the Create an App page, where you can follow the Yahoo process to create a new web application with the following information:
Application Name
Web Application
Callback Domain, such as
openidm.example.com
; required for IDMAPI Permissions; for whatever you select, choose Read/Write. IDM only reads Yahoo user information.
When complete and saved, you should see a Client ID
and
Client Secret
for your new web app.
Note
Yahoo supports URLs using only HTTPS, only on port 443. For more information on how to configure IDM to use these ports, see "Host and Port Information".
12.13.2. Configuring Yahoo as a Social Identity Provider
To configure Yahoo as a social identity provider, log in to the Admin UI and navigate to Configure > Social ID Providers.
Enable the Yahoo social identity provider.
In the
Yahoo Provider
pop-up that appears, the values forRedirect URI
should use the same Callback Domain as shown in "Setting Up Yahoo".Include the values that Yahoo created for
Client ID
andClient Secret
, as described in "Setting Up Yahoo".Under regular and
Advanced Options
, if necessary, include the options shown in the following appendix: "Yahoo Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
When you enable a Yahoo social identity provider in the Admin UI,
IDM generates the identityProvider-yahoo.json
file in your project's conf/
subdirectory.
When you review that file, you should see information beyond what you see in the Admin UI. The first part of the file includes the name of the provider, the scope, and UI settings related to the social identity provider icon (badge) and the sign-in button. For more information on the icon and button, see "Social Identity Provider Button and Badge Properties".
{ "provider" : "yahoo", "scope" : [ "openid", "sdpp-w" ], "uiConfig" : { "iconBackground" : "#7B0099", "iconClass" : "fa-yahoo", "iconFontColor" : "white", "buttonClass" : "fa-yahoo", "buttonDisplayName" : "Yahoo", "buttonCustomStyle" : "background-color: #7B0099; border-color: #7B0099; color:white;", "buttonCustomStyleHover" : "background-color: #7B0099; border-color: #7B0099; color:white;" },
Another part of the file includes a propertyMap
, which
maps user information entries between the source
(social identity provider) and the target
(IDM).
The next part of the file includes schema
information,
which includes properties for each social identity account, as collected by
IDM, as well as the order in which it appears in the Admin UI.
When you've registered a user with a Yahoo social identity, you can
verify this by selecting Manage > Yahoo, and then selecting a user.
Next, there's the part of the file that you may have configured through
the Admin UI, plus additional information on the redirectUri
,
the configClass
, and the authenticationIdKey
:
"authorizationEndpoint" : "https://api.login.yahoo.com/oauth2/request_auth", "tokenEndpoint" : "https://api.login.yahoo.com/oauth2/get_token", "wellKnownEndpoint" : "https://login.yahoo.com/.well-known/openid-configuration", "clientId" : "<Client_ID_Name>", "clientSecret" : { "$crypto" : { "type" : "x-simple-encryption", "value" : { "cipher" : "AES/CBC/PKCS5Padding", "stableId" : "openidm-sym-default", "salt" : "<hashValue>", "data" : "<encryptedValue>", "keySize" : 16, "purpose" : "idm.config.encryption", "iv" : "<encryptedValue>", "mac" : "<hashValue>" } } }, "authenticationIdKey" : "sub", "redirectUri" : "https://openidm.example.com/", "basicAuth" : false, "configClass" : "org.forgerock.oauth.clients.oidc.OpenIDConnectClientConfiguration", "enabled" : true }
If you need more information about the properties in this file, refer to the following appendix: "Yahoo Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
12.13.3. Configuring User Registration to Link to Yahoo
Once you've configured the Yahoo social identity provider, you can activate it through User Registration. To do so in the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration, and activate that feature. Under the Social tab that appears, enable Social Registration. For more information on IDM user self-service features, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
When you enable Social Registration, you're allowing users to register on IDM through all active social identity providers.
12.14. Setting Up Twitter as an IDM Social Identity Provider
As suggested in the introduction to this chapter, you'll need to take the following basic steps to configure Twitter as a social identity provider for IDM:
12.14.1. Setting Up Twitter
To set up Twitter as a social identity provider, navigate to the following page: Single-user OAuth with Examples . You'll need a Twitter account. You can then navigate to the Twitter Application Management page, where you can select Create New App and enter at least the following information:
Name
Description
Website, such as
http://openidm.example.com:8080
Callback URL, such as
http://openidm.example.com:8080/
; required for IDM; for other providers, known asRedirectURI
When complete and saved, you should see a Consumer Key
and
Consumer Secret
for your new web app.
Note
Twitter Apps use the OAuth 1.0a protocol. Fortunately, with IDM, you can use the same process used to configure OIDC and OAuth 2 social identity providers.
12.14.2. Configuring Twitter as a Social Identity Provider
To configure Twitter as a social identity provider, log in to the Admin UI and navigate to Configure > Social ID Providers.
Enable the Twitter social identity provider.
In the
Twitter Provider
pop-up that appears, the values forCallback URL
should use the same value shown in "Setting Up Twitter".Include the values that Twitter created for
Consumer Key
andConsumer Secret
, as described in "Setting Up Twitter".Under regular and
Advanced Options
, if necessary, include the options shown in the following appendix: "Twitter Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
When you enable a Twitter social identity provider in the Admin UI,
IDM generates the identityProvider-twitter.json
file in your project's conf/
subdirectory.
When you review that file, you should see information beyond what you see
in the Admin UI. The first part of the file includes the name of the provider,
endpoints, as well as information from the Consumer Key
and Consumer Secret, you'll see them as
clientId
and clientSecret
, respectively,
in the configuration file.
{ "provider" : "twitter", "requestTokenEndpoint" : "https://api.twitter.com/oauth/request_token", "authorizationEndpoint" : "https://api.twitter.com/oauth/authenticate", "tokenEndpoint" : "https://api.twitter.com/oauth/access_token", "userInfoEndpoint" : "https://api.twitter.com/1.1/account/verify_credentials.json", "clientId" : "<Client_ID_Name>", "clientSecret" : { "$crypto" : { "type" : "x-simple-encryption", "value" : { "cipher" : "AES/CBC/PKCS5Padding", "stableId" : "openidm-sym-default", "salt" : "<hashValue>", "data" : "<encryptedValue>", "keySize" : 16, "purpose" : "idm.config.encryption", "iv" : "<encryptedValue>", "mac" : "<hashValue>" } } },
You should also see UI settings related to the social identity provider icon (badge) and the sign-in button, described in "Social Identity Provider Button and Badge Properties".
You'll see links related to the authenticationIdKey
,
redirectUri
, and configClass
.
The next part of the file includes schema
information,
which includes properties for each social identity account, as collected by
IDM, as well as the order in which it appears in the Admin UI.
When you've registered a user with a Twitter social identity, you can
verify this by selecting Manage > Twitter, and then selecting a user.
Another part of the file includes a propertyMap
, which
maps user information entries between the source
(social identity provider) and the target
(IDM).
If you need more information about the properties in this file, refer to the following appendix: "Twitter Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
12.14.3. Configuring User Registration to Link to Twitter
Once you've configured the Twitter social identity provider, you can activate it through User Registration. To do so in the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration, and activate that feature. Under the Social tab that appears, enable Social Registration. For more information on IDM user self-service features, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
When you enable Social Registration, you're allowing users to register on IDM through all active social identity providers.
12.15. Set Up Apple as an IDM Social Identity Provider
To configure "Sign in with Apple", you'll need an Apple developer account.
You need a client ID and client secret for your application. In the Apple developer portal, the
client ID is called a Services ID
.
Log into the Apple Developer Portal.
Select Certificates, Identifiers and Profiles > Identifiers.
On the Identifiers page, select Register a New Identifier, then select Services IDs.
Enter a Description and Identifier for this Services ID, and make sure that Sign in With Apple is enabled.
Important
The Identifier you specify here will be your OAuth Client ID.
Click Configure.
On the Web Authentication Configuration screen, enter the Web Domain on which IDM runs, and specify the redirect URL used during the OAuth flow (Return URLs).
The redirect URL must have the following format:
https://idm.example.com?redirect=apple
Note
You must use a real domain (FQDN) here. Apple does not allow
localhost
URLs. If you enter an IP address such as127.0.0.1
, it will fail later in the OAuth flow.Click Save > Continue > Register.
Generate the client secret.
Instead of using simple strings as OAuth client secrets, Apple uses a public/private key pair, where the client secret is a signed JWT. To register the private key with Apple:
Select Certificates, Identifiers and Profiles > Keys, then click the
+
icon to register a new key.Enter a Key Name and enable Sign In with Apple.
Click Configure, then select the primary App ID that you created previously.
Apple generates a new private key, in a
.p8
file.Caution
You can only download this key once. Ensure that you save this file, because you will not be able to download it again.
Rename the file to
key.txt
, then locate the Key ID in that file.Use this private key to generate a client secret JWT. Sign the JWT with your private key, using an ES256 algorithm.
To configure an Apple social identity provider, log into the Admin UI and select Configure > Social ID Providers.
Enable the Apple social identity provider.
In the Apple Provider window, enter the Redirect URI that you set up in "Configure Apple Login".
Enter your Client ID and Client Secret.
When you have configured the Apple social identity provider, you can activate it through User Registration.
In the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration> Enable User Registration.
On the Social tab, enable Social Registration.
For more information, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
12.16. Setting Up a Custom Social Identity Provider
As suggested in the introduction to this chapter, you'll need to take four basic steps to configure a custom social identity provider:
Note
These instructions require the social identity provider to be fully compliant with The OAuth 2.0 Authorization Framework or the OpenID Connect standards.
12.16.1. Preparing IDM
While IDM includes provisions to work with OpenID Connect 1.0 and OAuth 2.0 social identity providers, connections to those providers are not supported, other than those specifically listed in this chapter.
To set up another social provider, first add a code block
to the identityProviders.json
file, such as:
{ "provider" : "<providerName>", "authorizationEndpoint" : "", "tokenEndpoint" : "", "userInfoEndpoint" : "", "wellKnownEndpoint" : "", "clientId" : "", "clientSecret" : "", "uiConfig" : { "iconBackground" : "", "iconClass" : "", "iconFontColor" : "", "buttonImage" : "", "buttonClass" : "", "buttonCustomStyle" : "", "buttonCustomStyleHover" : "", "buttonDisplayName" : "" }, "scope" : [ ], "authenticationIdKey" : "", "schema" : { "id" : "urn:jsonschema:org:forgerock:openidm:identityProviders:api:<providerName>", "viewable" : true, "type" : "object", "$schema" : "http://json-schema.org/draft-03/schema", "properties" : { "id" : { "title" : "ID", "viewable" : true, "type" : "string", "searchable" : true }, "name" : { "title" : "Name", "viewable" : true, "type" : "string", "searchable" : true }, "first_name" : { "title" : "First Name", "viewable" : true, "type" : "string", "searchable" : true }, "last_name" : { "title" : "Last Name", "viewable" : true, "type" : "string", "searchable" : true }, "email" : { "title" : "Email Address", "viewable" : true, "type" : "string", "searchable" : true }, "locale" : { "title" : "Locale Code", "viewable" : true, "type" : "string", "searchable" : true } }, "order" : [ "id", "name", "first_name", "last_name", "email", "locale" ], "required" : [ ] }, "propertyMap" : [ { "source" : "id", "target" : "id" }, { "source" : "name", "target" : "displayName" }, { "source" : "first_name", "target" : "givenName" }, { "source" : "last_name", "target" : "familyName" }, { "source" : "email", "target" : "email" }, { "source" : "email", "target" : "username" }, { "source" : "locale", "target" : "locale" } ], "redirectUri" : "http://openidm.example.com:8080/", "configClass" : "org.forgerock.oauth.clients.oidc.OpenIDConnectClientConfiguration", "basicAuth" : false, "enabled" : true },
Modify this code block for your selected social provider. Some of these
properties may appear under other names. For example, some providers
specify an App ID
that you'd include as a
clientId
.
Additional changes may be required, especially depending on how the provider implements the OAuth2 or OpenID Connect standards.
In the propertyMap
code block, you should substitute the
properties from the selected social identity provider for various values of
source
. Make sure to trace the property mapping through
selfservice.propertymap.json
to the Managed User
property shown in managed.json
. For more information on
this multi-step mapping, see "Many Social Identity Providers, One Schema".
As shown in "OpenID Connect Authorization Code Flow", user provisioning information goes through the User Info Endpoint. Some providers, such as LinkedIn and Facebook, may require a list of properties with the endpoint. Consult the documentation for your provider for details.
For more information on the uiConfig
code block, see
"Social Identity Provider Button and Badge Properties".
Both files, identityProviders.json
and
identityProvider-custom.json
, should include the same
information for the new custom
identity provider.
For property details, see "Custom Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
Once you've included information from your selected social identity provider, proceed with the configuration process. You'll use the same basic steps described for other specified social providers.
12.16.2. Setting Up a Custom Social Identity Provider
Every social identity provider should be able to provide the information you need to specify properties in the code block shown in "Preparing IDM".
In general, you'll need an authorizationEndpoint
,
a tokenEndpoint
and a userInfoEndpoint
.
To link to the custom provider, you'll also have to copy the
clientId
and clientSecret
that you
created with that provider. In some cases, you'll get this information in
a slightly different format, such as an App ID
and
App Secret
.
For the propertyMap
, check the source
properties. You may need to revise these properties to match those available
from your custom provider.
For examples, refer to the specific social identity providers documented in this chapter.
12.16.3. Configuring a Custom Social Identity Provider
To configure a custom social identity provider, log into the Admin UI and navigate to Configure > Social ID Providers.
Enable the custom social identity provider. The name you see is based on the
name
property in the relevant code block in theidentityProviders.json
file.If you haven't already done so, include the values provided by your social identity provider for the properties shown. For more information, see the following appendix: "Custom Social Identity Provider Configuration Details".
12.16.4. Configuring User Registration to Link to a Custom Provider
Once you've configured a custom social identity provider, you can activate it through User Registration. To do so in the Admin UI, select Configure > User Registration, and under the Social tab, enable the option associated with Social Registration. For more information about user self-service features, see "Configuring User Self-Service".
When you enable social identity providers, you're allowing users to register on IDM through all active social identity providers.
12.17. Configuring the Social Providers Authentication Module
The SOCIAL_PROVIDERS
authentication module incorporates
the requirements from social identity providers who rely on either the OAuth2 or
the OpenID Connect standards. The Social Providers authentication module is
turned on by default. To configure or disable this module in the Admin UI,
select Configure > Authentication, choose the Modules tab, then select Social
Providers from the list of modules.
Authentication settings can be configured from the Admin UI, or by making
changes directly in the authentication.json
file for
your project. IDM includes the following code block in the
authentication.json
file for your project:
{ "name" : "SOCIAL_PROVIDERS", "properties" : { "defaultUserRoles" : [ "internal/role/openidm-authorized" ], "augmentSecurityContext" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "globals" : { }, "file" : "auth/populateAsManagedUserFromRelationship.js" }, "propertyMapping" : { "userRoles" : "authzRoles" } }, "enabled" : true }
For more information on these options, see "Common Module Properties".
12.18. Managing Social Identity Providers Over REST
You can identify the current status of configured social identity providers with the following REST call:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ http://localhost:8080/openidm/authentication
The output that you see includes JSON information from each configured
social identity provider, as described in the
identityProvider-provider
file in your project's conf/
subdirectory.
One key line from this output specifies whether the social identity provider is enabled:
"enabled" : true
If the SOCIAL_PROVIDERS
authentication module is disabled,
you'll see the following output from that REST call:
{ "providers" : [ ] }
For more information, see "Configuring the Social Providers Authentication Module".
If the SOCIAL_PROVIDERS
module is disabled, you can still
review the standard configuration of each social provider (enabled or not) by
running the same REST call on a different endpoint (do not forget the
s
at the end of identityProviders
):
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ http://localhost:8080/openidm/identityProviders
Note
If you have not configured a social identity provider, you'll see the following
output from the REST call on the openidm/identityProviders
endpoint:
{ "providers" : [ ] }
You can still get information about the available configuration for social identity providers on a slightly different endpoint:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/identityProviders
The config
in the endpoint refers to the configuration,
starting with the identityProviders.json
configuration
file. Note how it matches the corresponding term in the endpoint.
You can review information for a specific provider by including the name with the endpoint. For example, if you've configured LinkedIn as described in "Setting Up LinkedIn as a Social Identity Provider", run the following command:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/identityProvider/linkedIn
The above command differs in subtle ways. The config
in
the endpoint points to configuration data. The identityProvider
at the end of the endpoint is singular, which matches the corresponding
configuration file, identityProvider-linkedIn.json
.
And linkedIn
includes a capital I
in
the middle of the word.
In a similar fashion, you can delete a specific provider:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request DELETE \ http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/identityProvider/linkedIn
If you have the information needed to set up a provider, such as the output from the previous two REST calls, you can use the following command to add a provider:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-type: application/json" \ --request PUT \ --data '{ <Include content from an identityProvider-linkedIn.json file> }' \ http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/identityProvider/linkedIn
IDM incorporates the given information in a file named for the
provider, in this case, identityProvider-linkedIn.json
.
You can even disable a social identity provider with a PATCH
REST
call, as shown:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-type: application/json" \ --request PATCH \ --data '[ { "operation":"replace", "field" : "enabled", "value" : false } ]' \ http://localhost:8080/openidm/config/identityProvider/linkedIn
You can reverse the process by substituting true
for
false
in the previous PATCH
REST call.
You can manage the social identity providers associated with individual users over REST, as described in "Managing Social Identity Providers Over REST".
12.19. Testing Social Identity Providers
In all cases, once configuration is complete, you should test the social identity provider. To do so, go through the steps in the following procedure:
Navigate to the login screen for the End User UI,
https://openidm.example.com:8443
.Select the
Register
link (after the "Don't have an account?" question) on the login page.You should see a link to sign in with your selected social identity provider. Select that link.
Note
If you do not see a link to sign in with any social identity provider, you probably did not enable the option associated with Social Registration. To make sure, access the Admin UI, and select Configure > User Registration.
Warning
If you see a redirect URI error from a social identity provider, check the configuration for your web application in the social identity provider developer console. There may be a mistake in the redirect URI or redirect URL.
Follow the prompts from your social identity provider to log into your account.
Note
If there is a problem with the interface to the social identity provider, you might see a Register Your Account screen with information acquired from that provider.
Because security questions are enabled by default, you must add at least one security question and answer to proceed. For more information, see "Configuring Security Questions".
When the Social ID registration process is complete, you are redirected to the End User UI at
https://openidm.example.com:8443
.You should now be able to use the sign in link for your social identity provider to log into IDM.
12.20. Scenarios When Registering With a Social ID
When users connect to IDM with a social identity provider, it could be the first time they're connecting to your system. They could already have an regular IDM account. They could already have registered with a different social identity provider. This section describes what happens during the self-registration process. The process varies depending on whether there's an existing account in the IDM managed user store.
The following list describes each item in the flow shown in the adjacent figure:
From the IDM End User UI, the user selects the
Register
linkThe self-registration Interface returns a
Register Your Account
page athttp://localhost:8080/#/registration
with a list of configured providers.The user then selects one configured social identity provider.
IDM connects to the selected social identity provider.
The social identity provider requests end user authentication.
The end user authenticates with the social identity provider.
The social identity provider prompts the user to accept sharing selected account information.
The user accepts the conditions presented by the social identity provider.
The social identity provider notifies IDM of the user registration request.
IDM passes responsibility to the administrative interface.
IDM uses the email address from the social identity provider, and compares it with email addresses of existing managed users.
If the email address is found, IDM links the social identity information to that account (and skips to step 16).
IDM returns to the self-registration (Self-Service) interface.
The self-registration interface prompts the user for additional information, such as security questions, and reCAPTCHA, if configured per "Configuring Google reCAPTCHA".
The user responds appropriately.
IDM creates a new managed user. If the user has already been created, IDM reviews data from the social identity provider, and updates the user data for the managed/provider to conform. In this case, the provider is a social identity provider such as Google.
The user is redirected to the
Success URL
.
12.21. Social Identity Widgets
The Admin UI includes widgets that can help you measure the success of your social identity efforts. To add these widgets, take the following steps:
Log into the Admin UI.
Select Dashboards, and choose the dashboard to which you want to add the widget.
For more information about managing dashboards in the UI, see "Managing Dashboards".
Select Add Widget.
In the Add Widget window, scroll down to the Social item which includes the following graphical widgets:
Social Registration (year)
Daily Social Registration
Daily Social Logins
Select the widget you want to add and select Settings to configure the widget.
Optionally, select Preview to see what the widget will look like with the configuration you have applied. Your IDM system must contain some social data to display the preview.
The following example shows daily social registrations, in pie chart form:
Chapter 13. Using Policies to Validate Data
IDM provides an extensible policy service that lets you apply specific validation requirements to various components and properties. This chapter describes the policy service, and provides instructions on configuring policies for managed objects.
The policy service provides a REST interface for reading policy requirements and validating the properties of components against configured policies. Objects and properties are validated automatically when they are created, updated, or patched. Policies are generally applied to user passwords, but can also be applied to any managed or system object, and to internal user objects.
The policy service lets you accomplish the following tasks:
Read the configured policy requirements of a specific component.
Read the configured policy requirements of all components.
Validate a component object against the configured policies.
Validate the properties of a component against the configured policies.
The router service limits policy application to managed, system, and internal
user objects. To apply policies to additional objects, such as the audit
service, you must modify your project's conf/router.json
file. For more information about the router service, see
"Router Service Reference".
A default policy applies to all managed objects. You can configure this default policy to suit your requirements, or you can extend the policy service by supplying your own scripted policies.
13.1. Configuring the Default Policy for Managed Objects
Policies applied to managed objects are configured in two files:
A policy script file (
openidm/bin/defaults/script/policy.js
) that defines each policy and specifies how policy validation is performed. For more information, see "Understanding the Policy Script File".A managed object policy configuration element, defined in your project's
conf/managed.json
file, that specifies which policies are applicable to each managed resource. For more information, see "Understanding the Policy Configuration Element".Note
The configuration for determining which policies apply to resources other than managed objects is defined in your project's
conf/policy.json
file. The defaultpolicy.json
file includes policies that are applied to internal user objects, but you can extend the configuration in this file to apply policies to system objects.
13.1.1. Understanding the Policy Script File
The policy script file (openidm/bin/defaults/script/policy.js
)
separates policy configuration into two parts:
A policy configuration object, which defines each element of the policy. For more information, see "Policy Configuration Objects".
A policy implementation function, which describes the requirements that are enforced by that policy.
Together, the configuration object and the implementation function determine whether an object is valid in terms of the applied policy. The following excerpt of a policy script file configures a policy that specifies that the value of a property must contain a certain number of capital letters:
... { "policyId" : "at-least-X-capitals", "policyExec" : "atLeastXCapitalLetters", "clientValidation": true, "validateOnlyIfPresent":true, "policyRequirements" : ["AT_LEAST_X_CAPITAL_LETTERS"] }, ... policyFunctions.atLeastXCapitalLetters = function(fullObject, value, params, property) { var isRequired = _.find(this.failedPolicyRequirements, function (fpr) { return fpr.policyRequirement === "REQUIRED"; }), isNonEmptyString = (typeof(value) === "string" && value.length), valuePassesRegexp = (function (v) { var test = isNonEmptyString ? v.match(/[(A-Z)]/g) : null; return test !== null && test.length >= params.numCaps; }(value)); if ((isRequired || isNonEmptyString) && !valuePassesRegexp) { return [ { "policyRequirement" : "AT_LEAST_X_CAPITAL_LETTERS", "params" : {"numCaps": params.numCaps} } ]; } return []; } ...
To enforce user passwords that contain at least one capital letter, the
policyId
from the preceding example is applied to the
appropriate resource (managed/user/*
). The required
number of capital letters is defined in the policy configuration element of
the managed object configuration file (see "Understanding the Policy Configuration Element".
13.1.1.1. Policy Configuration Objects
Each element of the policy is defined in a policy configuration object. The structure of a policy configuration object is as follows:
{ "policyId" : "minimum-length", "policyExec" : "minLength", "clientValidation": true, "validateOnlyIfPresent": true, "policyRequirements" : ["MIN_LENGTH"] }
policyId
- a unique ID that enables the policy to be referenced by component objects.policyExec
- the name of the function that contains the policy implementation. For more information, see "Policy Implementation Functions".clientValidation
- indicates whether the policy decision can be made on the client. When"clientValidation": true
, the source code for the policy decision function is returned when the client requests the requirements for a property.validateOnlyIfPresent
- notes that the policy is to be validated only if it exists.policyRequirements
- an array containing the policy requirement ID of each requirement that is associated with the policy. Typically, a policy will validate only one requirement, but it can validate more than one.
13.1.1.2. Policy Implementation Functions
Each policy ID has a corresponding policy implementation function that performs the validation. Implementation functions take the following form:
function <name>(fullObject, value, params, propName) { <implementation_logic> }
fullObject
is the full resource object that is supplied with the request.value
is the value of the property that is being validated.params
refers to theparams
array that is specified in the property's policy configuration.propName
is the name of the property that is being validated.
The following example shows the implementation function for the
required
policy:
function required(fullObject, value, params, propName) { if (value === undefined) { return [ { "policyRequirement" : "REQUIRED" } ]; } return []; }
13.1.2. Understanding the Policy Configuration Element
The configuration of a managed object property (in the
managed.json
file) can include a policies
element that specifies how policy validation should be applied to that
property. The following excerpt of the default
managed.json
file shows how policy validation is
applied to the password
and _id
properties of a managed/user object:
{ "objects" : [ { "name" : "user", ... "schema" : { "id" : "http://jsonschema.net", ... "properties" : { "_id" : { "description" : "User ID", "type" : "string", "viewable" : false, "searchable" : false, "userEditable" : false, "usageDescription" : "", "isPersonal" : false, "policies" : [ { "policyId" : "cannot-contain-characters", "params" : { "forbiddenChars" : [ "/" ] } } ] }, "password" : { "title" : "Password", "description" : "Password", "type" : "string", "viewable" : false, "searchable" : false, "minLength" : 8, "userEditable" : true, "encryption" : { "purpose" : "idm.password.encryption" }, "scope" : "private", "isProtected": true, "usageDescription" : "", "isPersonal" : false, "policies" : [ { "policyId" : "at-least-X-capitals", "params" : { "numCaps" : 1 } }, { "policyId" : "at-least-X-numbers", "params" : { "numNums" : 1 } }, { "policyId" : "cannot-contain-others", "params" : { "disallowedFields" : [ "userName", "givenName", "sn" ] } } ] } ... }
Note that the policy for the _id
property references
the function cannot-contain-characters
, that is defined
in the policy.js
file. The policy for the
password
property references the functions
at-least-X-capitals
, at-least-X-numbers
,
and cannot-contain-others
, that are defined in the
policy.js
file. The parameters that are passed to these
functions (number of capitals required, and so forth) are specified in the
same element.
13.1.3. Validation of Managed Object Data Types
The type
property of a managed object specifies the
data type of that property, for example, array
,
boolean
, integer
,
number
, null
,
object
, or string
. For more
information about data types, see the JSON
Schema Primitive Types section of the JSON Schema standard.
The type
property is subject to policy validation when a
managed object is created or updated. Validation fails if data does not
match the specified type
, such as when the data is an
array
instead of a string
.
The valid-type
policy in the default
policy.js
file enforces the match between property
values and the type
defined in the
managed.json
file.
IDM supports multiple valid property types. For example, you
might have a scenario where a managed user can have more than one telephone
number, or a null telephone number (when the user
entry is first created and the telephone number is not yet known). In such a
case, you could specify the accepted property type as follows in your
managed.json
file:
"telephoneNumber" : { "description" : "", "title" : "Telephone Number", "viewable" : true, "searchable" : false, "userEditable" : true, "policies" : [ ], "returnByDefault" : false, "minLength" : null, "pattern" : "^\\+?([0-9\\- \\(\\)])*$", "type" : [ "string", "null" ] },
In this case, the valid-type
policy from the
policy.js
file checks the telephone number for an
accepted type
and pattern
, either
for a real telephone number or a null
entry.
13.1.4. Configuring Policy Validation in the UI
The Admin UI provides rudimentary support for applying policy validation to
managed object properties. To configure policy validation for a managed
object type update the configuration of the object type in the UI. For
example, to specify validation policies for specific properties of managed
user objects, select Configure > Managed Objects then click on the User
object. Scroll down to the bottom of the Managed Object configuration, then
update, or add, a validation policy. The Policy
field
here refers to a function that has been defined in the policy script file.
For more information, see "Understanding the Policy Script File". You cannot
define additional policy functions by using the UI.
Note
Take care with Validation Policies. If it relates to an array of
relationships, such as between a user and multiple devices, "Return by
Default" should always be set to false. You can verify this in the
managed.json
file for your project, with the
"returnByDefault" : false
entry for the applicable
managed object, whenever there are items
of
"type" : "relationship"
.
13.2. Extending the Policy Service
You can extend the policy service by adding custom scripted policies, and by adding policies that are applied only under certain conditions.
13.2.1. Adding Custom Scripted Policies
If your deployment requires additional validation functionality that is not
supplied by the default policies, you can add your own policy scripts to
your project's script
directory, and reference them
from your project's conf/policy.json
file.
Do not modify the default policy script file
(openidm/bin/defaults/script/policy.js
) as doing so might
result in interoperability issues in a future release. To reference
additional policy scripts, set the additionalFiles
property conf/policy.json
.
The following example creates a custom policy that rejects properties with
null values. The policy is defined in a script named
mypolicy.js
:
var policy = { "policyId" : "notNull", "policyExec" : "notNull", "policyRequirements" : ["NOT_NULL"] } addPolicy(policy); function notNull(fullObject, value, params, property) { if (value == null) { var requireNotNull = [ {"policyRequirement": "NOT_NULL"} ]; return requireNotNull; } return []; }
The mypolicy.js
policy is referenced in the
policy.json
configuration file as follows:
{ "type" : "text/javascript", "file" : "policy.js", "additionalFiles" : ["script/mypolicy.js"], "resources" : [ { ...
Note
In cases where you are using the Admin UI, both
policy.js
and mypolicy.js
will
be run within the client, and then again by the the server. When creating
new policies, be aware that these policies may be run in both contexts.
13.2.2. Adding Conditional Policy Definitions
You can extend the policy service to support policies that are applied only
under specific conditions. To apply a conditional policy to managed objects,
add the policy to your project's managed.json
file. To
apply a conditional policy to other objects, add it to your project's
policy.json
file.
The following excerpt of a managed.json
file shows a
sample conditional policy configuration for the "password"
property of managed user objects. The policy indicates that sys-admin users
have a more lenient password policy than regular employees:
{ "objects" : [ { "name" : "user", ... "properties" : { ... "password" : { "title" : "Password", "type" : "string", ... "conditionalPolicies" : [ { "condition" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "source" : "(fullObject.org === 'sys-admin')" }, "dependencies" : [ "org" ], "policies" : [ { "policyId" : "max-age", "params" : { "maxDays" : ["90"] } } ] }, { "condition" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "source" : "(fullObject.org === 'employees')" }, "dependencies" : [ "org" ], "policies" : [ { "policyId" : "max-age", "params" : { "maxDays" : ["30"] } } ] } ], "fallbackPolicies" : [ { "policyId" : "max-age", "params" : { "maxDays" : ["7"] } } ] }
To understand how a conditional policy is defined, examine the components of this sample policy. For more information on the policy function, see "Policy Implementation Functions".
There are two distinct scripted conditions (defined in the
condition
elements). The first condition asserts that
the user object, contained in the fullObject
argument, is
a member of the sys-admin
org. If that assertion is true,
the max-age
policy is applied to the
password
attribute of the user object, and the maximum
number of days that a password may remain unchanged is set to 90
.
The second condition asserts that the user object is a member of the
employees
org. If that assertion is true, the
max-age
policy is applied to the
password
attribute of the user object, and the maximum
number of days that a password may remain unchanged is set to
30
.
In the event that neither condition is met (the user object is not a member
of the sys-admin
org or the employees
org), an optional fallback policy can be applied. In this example, the
fallback policy also references the max-age
policy and
specifies that for such users, their password must be changed after 7 days.
The dependencies
field prevents the condition scripts
from being run at all, if the user object does not include an
org
attribute.
Note
This example assumes that a custom max-age
policy
validation function has been defined, as described in
"Adding Custom Scripted Policies".
Tip
These scripted conditions do not apply to progressive profiling. For more information, see "Custom Progressive Profile Conditions".
13.3. Disabling Policy Enforcement
Policy enforcement is the automatic validation of data when it is created, updated, or patched. In certain situations you might want to disable policy enforcement temporarily. You might, for example, want to import existing data that does not meet the validation requirements with the intention of cleaning up this data at a later stage.
You can disable policy enforcement by setting
openidm.policy.enforcement.enabled
to
false
in your
resolver/boot.properties
file. This setting disables
policy enforcement in the back-end only, and has no impact on direct policy
validation calls to the Policy Service (which the UI makes to validate input
fields). So, with policy enforcement disabled, data added directly over REST
is not subject to validation, but data added with the UI is still subject to
validation.
You should not disable policy enforcement permanently, in a production environment.
13.4. Managing Policies Over REST
You can manage the policy service over the REST interface, by calling the
REST endpoint https://localhost:8443/openidm/policy
, as
shown in the following examples.
13.4.1. Listing the Defined Policies
The following REST call displays a list of all the policies defined in
policy.json
(policies for objects other than managed
objects). The policy objects are returned in JSON format, with one object for
each defined policy ID:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/policy" { "_id": "", "resources": [ ... { "resource": "internal/user/*", "properties": [ { "name": "_id", "policies": [ { "policyId": "cannot-contain-characters", "params": { "forbiddenChars": [ "/" ] }, "policyFunction": "\nfunction (fullObject, value, params, property) {\n ...", "policyRequirements": [ "CANNOT_CONTAIN_CHARACTERS" ] } ], "policyRequirements": [ "CANNOT_CONTAIN_CHARACTERS" ] } ... ] ... } ] }
To display the policies that apply to a specific resource, include the resource name in the URL. For example, the following REST call displays the policies that apply to managed users:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request GET \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/policy/managed/user/*" { "_id": "*", "resource": "managed/user/*", "properties": [ { "policyRequirements": [ "VALID_TYPE", "CANNOT_CONTAIN_CHARACTERS" ], "fallbackPolicies": null, "name": "_id", "policies": [ { "policyRequirements": [ "VALID_TYPE" ], "policyId": "valid-type", "params": { "types": [ "string" ] } }, { "policyId": "cannot-contain-characters", "params": { "forbiddenChars": [ "/" ] }, "policyFunction": "...", "policyRequirements": [ "CANNOT_CONTAIN_CHARACTERS" ] } ], "conditionalPolicies": null } ... ] }
13.4.2. Validating Objects and Properties Over REST
To verify that an object adheres to the requirements of all applied policies,
include the validateObject
action in the request.
The following example verifies that a new managed user object is acceptable,
in terms of the policy requirements. Note that the ID in the URL
(test
in this example) is ignored—the action simply
validates the object in the JSON payload:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request POST \ --data '{ "sn":"Jones", "givenName":"Bob", "telephoneNumber":"0827878921", "passPhrase":null, "mail":"bjones@example.com", "accountStatus":"active", "userName":"bjones@example.com", "password":"123" }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/policy/managed/user/test?_action=validateObject" { "result": false, "failedPolicyRequirements": [ { "policyRequirements": [ { "policyRequirement": "MIN_LENGTH", "params": { "minLength": 8 } } ], "property": "password" }, { "policyRequirements": [ { "policyRequirement": "AT_LEAST_X_CAPITAL_LETTERS", "params": { "numCaps": 1 } } ], "property": "password" } ] }
The result (false
) indicates that the object is not
valid. The unfulfilled policy requirements are provided as part of the
response - in this case, the user password does not meet the validation
requirements.
Use the validateProperty
action to verify that a specific
property adheres to the requirements of a policy.
The following example checks whether a user's new password
(12345
) is acceptable:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request POST \ --data '{ "password" : "12345" }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/policy/managed/user/9dce06d4-2fc1-4830-a92b-bd35c2f6bcbb?_action=validateProperty" { "result": false, "failedPolicyRequirements": [ { "policyRequirements": [ { "policyRequirement": "MIN_LENGTH", "params": { "minLength": 8 } } ], "property": "password" }, { "policyRequirements": [ { "policyRequirement": "AT_LEAST_X_CAPITAL_LETTERS", "params": { "numCaps": 1 } } ], "property": "password" } ] }
The result (false
) indicates that the password is not
valid. The unfulfilled policy requirements are provided as part of the
response - in this case, the minimum length and the minimum number of
capital letters.
Validating a property that fulfills the policy requirements returns a true
result, for example:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request POST \ --data '{ "password" : "1NewPassword" }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/policy/managed/user/9dce06d4-2fc1-4830-a92b-bd35c2f6bcbb?_action=validateProperty" { "result": true, "failedPolicyRequirements": [] }
13.4.2.1. Validate Field Removal
To validate field removal, specify the fields to remove when calling the policy validateProperty
action. You cannot remove fields that:
Are required in the
required
schema array.Have a
required
policy.Have a default value.
The following example validates the removal of the fields description
and
givenName
:
curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Accept-API-Version: resource=1.0" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request POST \ --data '{ "_remove": [ "description", "givenName" ] }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/policy/managed/user/ca5a3196-2ed3-4a76-8881-30403dee70e9?_action=validateProperty" { "result": false, "failedPolicyRequirements": [ { "policyRequirements": [ { "policyRequirement": "REQUIRED" } ], "property": "givenName" } ] }
13.4.2.2. Validate Properties to Unknown Resource Paths
To perform a validateProperty
action to a path that is unknown
(*
), such as managed/user/*
or
managed/user/userDoesntExistYet
, the payload must include:
An
object
field that contains the object details.A
properties
field that contains the properties to be evaluated.
A common use case for validating properties for unknown resources is prior to object creation, such as during pre-registration.
Always pass the object and properties content in the POST body because IDM has no object to look up.
Use any placeholder id in the request URL, as
*
has no special meaning in the API.
This example uses a conditional policy for any object with the description test1
:
"password" : { ... "conditionalPolicies" : [ { "condition" : { "type" : "text/javascript", "source" : "(fullObject.description === 'test1')" }, "dependencies" : [ "description" ], "policies" : [ { "policyId" : "at-least-X-capitals", "params" : { "numCaps" : 1 } } ] } ],
Using the above conditional policy, you could perform a validateProperty
action to
managed/user/*
with the request:
curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Accept-API-Version: resource=1.0" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request POST \ --data '{ "object": { "description": "test1" }, "properties": { "password": "passw0rd" } }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/policy/managed/user/*?_action=validateProperty" { "result": false, "failedPolicyRequirements": [ { "policyRequirements": [ { "params": { "numCaps": 1 }, "policyRequirement": "AT_LEAST_X_CAPITAL_LETTERS" } ], "property": "password" } ] }
Chapter 14. Configuring Server Logs
In this chapter, you will learn about server logging, that is, the messages that IDM logs related to server activity.
Server logging is separate from auditing. Auditing logs
activity on the IDM system, such as access and synchronization.
For information about audit logging, see "Setting Up Audit Logging". To
configure server logging, edit the logging.properties
file in your project-dir/conf
directory.
Important
When you change the logging settings you must restart the server for those changes to take effect. Alternatively, you can use JMX via jconsole to change the logging settings, in which case changes take effect without restarting the server.
14.1. Specify Where Messages Are Logged
The way in which messages are logged is set in the handlers
property in the logging.properties
file. This property
has the following value by default:
handlers=java.util.logging.FileHandler, java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler
Two handlers are listed by default:
FileHandler
writes formatted log records to a single file or to a set of rotating log files. By default, log files are written tologs/openidm*.log
files.ConsoleHandler
writes formatted logs toSystem.err
.
Additional log message handlers are listed in the
logging.properties
file.
14.2. Set the Log Message Format
IDM supports the two default log formatters included with Java. These are set in the
conf/logging.properties
file:
java.util.logging.SimpleFormatter.format
outputs a text log file that is human-readable. This formatter is used by default.java.util.logging.XMLFormatter
outputs logs as XML, for use in logging software that can read XML logs.
IDM extends the Java SimpleFormatter
with the following formatting
options:
org.forgerock.openidm.logger.SanitizedThreadIdLogFormatter
This is the default formatter for console and file logging. It extends the
SimpleFormatter
to include the thread ID of the thread that generated each message. The thread ID helps with debugging when reviewing the logs.In the following example log excerpt, the thread ID is
[19]
:[19] May 23, 2018 10:30:26.959 AM org.forgerock.openidm.repo.opendj.impl.Activator start INFO: Registered bootstrap repository service [19] May 23, 2018 10:30:26.960 AM org.forgerock.openidm.repo.opendj.impl.Activator start INFO: DS bundle started
The
SanitizedThreadIdLogFormatter
also encodes all control characters (such as newline characters) using URL-encoding, to protect against log forgery. Control characters in stack traces are not encoded.org.forgerock.openidm.logger.ThreadIdLogFormatter
Similar to the
SanitizedThreadIdLogFormatter
, but does not encode control characters. If you do not want to encode control characters in file and console log messages, change the file and console handlers inconf/logging.properties
as follows:java.util.logging.FileHandler.formatter = org.forgerock.openidm.logger.ThreadIdLogFormatter
java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler.formatter = org.forgerock.openidm.logger.ThreadIdLogFormatter
The SimpleFormatter
(and, by extension, the SanitizedThreadIdLogFormatter
and ThreadIdLogFormatter
) lets you customize what information to include in
log messages, and how this information is laid out. By default, log messages include the date,
time (down to the millisecond), log level, source of the message, and the message sent (including
exceptions). To change the defaults, adjust the value of java.util.logging.SimpleFormatter.format
in your conf/logging.properties
file. For more information on how to
customize the log message format, see the related Java documentation.
14.3. Set the Logging Level
By default, IDM logs messages at the INFO
level.
This logging level is specified with the following global property in
conf/logging.properties
:
.level=INFO
You can specify different separate logging levels for individual server features which override the global logging level. Set the log level, per package to one of the following:
SEVERE (highest value) WARNING INFO CONFIG FINE FINER FINEST (lowest value)
For example, the following setting decreases the messages logged by the embedded PostgreSQL database:
# reduce the logging of embedded postgres since it is very verbose ru.yandex.qatools.embed.postgresql.level = SEVERE
Set the log level to OFF
to disable logging completely
(see in "Disable Logs"), or to ALL
to
capture all possible log messages.
If you use logger
functions in your JavaScript scripts,
set the log level for the scripts as follows:
org.forgerock.openidm.script.javascript.JavaScript.level=level
You can override the log level settings, per script, with the following setting:
org.forgerock.openidm.script.javascript.JavaScript.script-name.level
For more information about using logger
functions in
scripts, see "Logging Functions".
Important
It is strongly recommended that you do not log messages
at the FINE
or FINEST
levels in a
production environment. Although these levels are useful for debugging
issues in a test environment, they can result in accidental exposure of
sensitive data. For example, a password change patch request can expose the
updated password in the Jetty logs.
14.4. Disable Logs
If required, you can also disable logs. For example, to disable
ConsoleHandler
logging, make the following changes in your
project's conf/logging.properties
file before you start
IDM.
Set java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler.level = OFF
,
and comment out other references to ConsoleHandler
,
as shown in the following excerpt:
# ConsoleHandler: A simple handler for writing formatted records to System.err #handlers=java.util.logging.FileHandler, java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler handlers=java.util.logging.FileHandler ... # --- ConsoleHandler --- # Default: java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler.level = INFO java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler.level = OFF #java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler.formatter = ... #java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler.filter=...
Chapter 15. Connecting to External Resources
This chapter describes how to connect to external resources such as LDAP, Active Directory, flat files, and others. Configurations shown here are simplified to show essential aspects. Not all resources support all IDM operations; however, the resources shown here support most of the CRUD operations, and also reconciliation and liveSync.
Resources refer to external systems, databases, directory servers, and other sources of identity data that are managed and audited by the identity management system. To connect to resources, IDM loads the ForgeRock Open Identity Connector Framework (OpenICF). ICF avoids the need to install agents to access resources, instead using the resources' native protocols. For example, ICF connects to database resources using the database's Java connection libraries or JDBC driver. It connects to directory servers over LDAP. It connects to UNIX systems by using ssh.
IDM provides several connectors by default, in the
path/to/openidm/connectors
directory. You can download
additional connectors from the
ForgeRock BackStage download site.
For details about all connectors supported for use with IDM, see Connector Reference.
15.1. The ForgeRock Identity Connector Framework (ICF)
ICF provides a common interface to allow identity services access to the resources that contain user information. IDM loads the ICF API as one of its OSGi modules. ICF uses connectors to separate the IDM implementation from the dependencies of the resource to which IDM is connecting. A specific connector is required for each remote resource. Connectors can run locally (on the IDM host) or remotely.
Local connectors are loaded by ICF as regular bundles in the OSGi container. Most connectors run locally. Remote connectors must be executed on a remote connector server. If a resource requires access libraries that cannot be included as part of the IDM process, you must use a connector server. For example, ICF connects to Microsoft Active Directory through a remote connector server that is implemented as a .NET service.
Connections to remote connector servers are configured in a single
connector info provider configuration file, located in
your project's conf/
directory.
Connectors themselves are configured through
provisioner files. One provisioner file must exist for
each connector. Provisioner files are named
provisioner.openicf-name
where
name corresponds to the name of the connector,
and are also located in the conf/
directory.
A number of sample connector configurations are available in the
openidm/samples/example-configurations/provisioners
directory. To use these connectors, edit the configuration files as required,
and copy them to your project's conf/
directory.
The following figure shows how IDM connects to resources by using connectors and remote connector servers. The figure shows one local connector (LDAP) and two remote connectors (Scripted SQL and PowerShell). In this example, the remote Scripted SQL connector uses a remote Java connector server. The remote PowerShell connector always requires a remote .NET connector server.
Tip
Connectors that use the .NET framework must run remotely. Java connectors can be run locally or remotely. You might run a Java connector remotely for security reasons (firewall constraints), for geographical reasons, or if the JVM version that is required by the connector conflicts with the JVM version that is required by IDM.
15.2. Configuring Connectors
Connectors are configured through the ICF provisioner service. Each
connector configuration is stored in a file in your project's
conf/
directory, and accessible over REST at the
openidm/conf
endpoint. Connector configuration files are
named
project-dir/conf/provisioner.openicf-name
where name corresponds to the name of the
connector.
If you are creating your own connector configuration files, do
not include additional dash characters ( -
) in the
connector name, as this might cause
problems with the OSGi parser. For example, the name
provisioner.openicf-hrdb.json
is fine. The name
provisioner.openicf-hr-db.json
is not.
You can create a connector configuration in the following ways:
Start with the sample provisioner files in the
/path/to/openidm/samples/example-configurations/provisioners
directory. For more information, see "Using the Sample Provisioner Files".Set up connectors with the help of the Admin UI. Log in to the Admin UI at
https://localhost:8443/admin
, then continue with the process described in "Creating Connector Configurations With the Admin UI".Use the service that IDM exposes through the REST interface to create basic connector configuration files. For more information, see "Creating Connector Configurations Over REST".
Use the cli.sh or cli.bat scripts to generate a basic connector configuration. For more information, see "Using the configureconnector Subcommand".
15.2.1. Using the Sample Provisioner Files
A number of sample connector configurations are available in the
openidm/samples/example-configurations/provisioners
directory. To use these connector configurations, edit the configuration
files as required, and copy them to your project's conf
directory.
The following example shows a high-level connector configuration. The individual configuration objects are described in detail later in this section:
{ "connectorRef" : connector-ref-object, "producerBufferSize" : integer, "connectorPoolingSupported" : boolean, true/false, "poolConfigOption" : pool-config-option-object, "operationTimeout" : operation-timeout-object, "configurationProperties" : configuration-properties-object, "syncFailureHandler" : sync-failure-handler-object, "resultsHandlerConfig" : results-handler-config-object, "objectTypes" : object-types-object, "operationOptions" : operation-options-object }
15.2.2. Creating Connector Configurations With the Admin UI
To configure connectors in the Admin UI, select Configure > Connector. If your project has an existing connector configuration (for example, if you have started IDM with one of the sample configurations) click on that connector to edit it. If you're starting with a new project, click New Connector to configure a new connector.
The connectors displayed on the Connectors page reflect the provisioner
files that are in your project's conf/
directory. To
add a new connector configuration, you can also copy a provisioner file from
the /path/to/openidm/samples/example-configurations/provisioners
directory, then edit it to fit your deployment.
When you add a new connector, the Connector Type dropdown list reflects the
actual connector JARs that are in the /path/to/openidm/connectors
directory. You can have more than one connector configuration for a specific
connector type. For example, you might use the LDAP connector to set up two
connector configurations - one to an Active Directory server and one to a
ForgeRock Directory Services (DS) instance. The Connector Types listed
here do not include all supported connectors - only those that are bundled
with IDM. You can download additional connectors from the
ForgeRock BackStage download site
and place them in the /path/to/openidm/connectors
directory. For information on all supported connectors and how to configure
them, see the Connector Reference.
The tabs on the connector configuration screens correspond to the objects and properties described in the remaining sections of this chapter.
When a connector configuration is complete, and IDM is able to establish the connection to the remote resource, the Data tab displays the objects in that remote resource. For example, the following image shows the contents of a connected LDAP resource:
You can search through these objects with either the Basic Filter shown in each column, or the Advanced Filter option, which allows you to build many of the queries shown in "Defining and Calling Queries".
15.2.3. Creating Connector Configurations Over REST
You create a new connector configuration over REST in three stages:
List the available connectors.
Generate the core configuration.
Connect to the target system and generate the final configuration.
List the available connectors by using the following command:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request POST \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/system?_action=availableConnectors"
Available connectors are installed in openidm/connectors
.
IDM bundles the connectors described in
"Supported Connector Versions" in the Release Notes.
The preceding command therefore returns the following output:
{ "connectorRef": [ { "displayName": "Workday Connector", "bundleVersion": "1.5.20.8", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.workday-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.workday.WorkdayConnector" }, { "displayName": "SSH Connector", "bundleVersion": "1.5.20.8", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.ssh-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.ssh.SSHConnector" }, { "displayName": "ServiceNow Connector", "bundleVersion": "1.5.20.8", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.servicenow-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.servicenow.ServiceNowConnector" }, { "displayName": "Scripted SQL Connector", "bundleVersion": "1.5.20.8", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.scriptedsql-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.scriptedsql.ScriptedSQLConnector" }, { "displayName": "Scripted REST Connector", "bundleVersion": "1.5.20.8", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.scriptedrest-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.scriptedrest.ScriptedRESTConnector" }, { "displayName": "Scim Connector", "bundleVersion": "1.5.20.8", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.scim-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.scim.ScimConnector" }, { "displayName":"Salesforce Connector", "bundleVersion":"1.5.20.8", "systemType":"provisioner.openicf", "bundleName":"org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.salesforce-connector", "connectorName":"org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.salesforce.SalesforceConnector" }, { "displayName": "MongoDB Connector", "bundleVersion": "1.5.20.8", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.mongodb-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.mongodb.MongoDBConnector" }, { "displayName": "Marketo Connector", "bundleVersion": "1.5.20.8", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.marketo-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.marketo.MarketoConnector" }, { "displayName": "LDAP Connector", "bundleVersion": "1.5.20.8", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.ldap-connector", "connectorName": "org.identityconnectors.ldap.LdapConnector" }, { "displayName": "Kerberos Connector", "bundleVersion": "1.5.20.8", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.kerberos-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.kerberos.KerberosConnector" }, { "displayName": "Scripted Poolable Groovy Connector", "bundleVersion": "${scriptedPoolableConnectorVersion}", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.groovy-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.groovy.ScriptedPoolableConnector" }, { "displayName": "Scripted Groovy Connector", "bundleVersion": "1.5.20.8", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.groovy-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.groovy.ScriptedConnector" }, { "displayName": "GoogleApps Connector", "bundleVersion": "1.5.20.8", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.googleapps-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.googleapps.GoogleAppsConnector" }, { "displayName": "Database Table Connector", "bundleVersion": "1.5.20.8", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.databasetable-connector", "connectorName": "org.identityconnectors.databasetable.DatabaseTableConnector" }, { "displayName": "CSV File Connector", "bundleVersion": "1.5.20.8", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.csvfile-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.csvfile.CSVFileConnector" }, { "displayName": "Adobe Marketing Cloud Connector", "bundleVersion": "1.5.20.8", "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.adobecm-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.acm.ACMConnector" } ] }
To generate the core configuration, choose one of the available connectors by copying one of the JSON objects from the generated list into the body of the REST command, as shown in the following command for the CSV file connector:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request POST \ --data '{"connectorRef": { "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.csvfile-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.csvfile.CSVFileConnector", "displayName": "CSV File Connector", "bundleVersion": "[1.5.19.0,1.6.0.0)" } }' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/system?_action=createCoreConfig"
This command returns a core connector configuration, similar to the following:
{ "connectorRef": { "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.csvfile-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.csvfile.CSVFileConnector", "displayName": "CSV File Connector", "bundleVersion": "[1.5.19.0,1.6.0.0)" }, "poolConfigOption": { "maxObjects": 10, "maxIdle": 10, "maxWait": 150000, "minEvictableIdleTimeMillis": 120000, "minIdle": 1 }, "resultsHandlerConfig": { "enableNormalizingResultsHandler": false, "enableFilteredResultsHandler": false, "enableCaseInsensitiveFilter": false, "enableAttributesToGetSearchResultsHandler": true }, "operationTimeout": { "CREATE": -1, "UPDATE": -1, "DELETE": -1, "TEST": -1, "SCRIPT_ON_CONNECTOR": -1, "SCRIPT_ON_RESOURCE": -1, "GET": -1, "RESOLVEUSERNAME": -1, "AUTHENTICATE": -1, "SEARCH": -1, "VALIDATE": -1, "SYNC": -1, "SCHEMA": -1 }, "configurationProperties": { "headerPassword": "password", "spaceReplacementString": "_", "csvFile": null, "newlineString": "\n", "headerUid": "uid", "quoteCharacter": "\"", "fieldDelimiter": ",", "syncFileRetentionCount": 3 } }
The configuration that is returned is not yet functional. It does not
contain the required system-specific configurationProperties
,
such as the host name and port for an external system, or the
csvFile
for the CSV file connector. In addition, the
configuration does not include the complete list of
objectTypes
and operationOptions
.
To generate the final configuration, add values for the required
configurationProperties
to the core configuration, and
use the updated configuration as the body for the next command:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --header "Content-Type: application/json" \ --request POST \ --data '{ "configurationProperties": { "headerPassword": "password", "spaceReplacementString": "_", "csvFile": "&{idm.instance.dir}/data/csvConnectorData.csv", "newlineString": "\n", "headerUid": "uid", "quoteCharacter": "\"", "fieldDelimiter": ",", "syncFileRetentionCount": 3 }, "connectorRef": { "systemType": "provisioner.openicf", "bundleName": "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.csvfile-connector", "connectorName": "org.forgerock.openicf.csvfile.CSVFileConnector", "displayName": "CSV File Connector", "bundleVersion": "[1.5.19.0,1.6.0.0)" }, "poolConfigOption": { "maxObjects": 10, "maxIdle": 10, "maxWait": 150000, "minEvictableIdleTimeMillis": 120000, "minIdle": 1 }, "resultsHandlerConfig": { "enableNormalizingResultsHandler": true, "enableFilteredResultsHandler": true, "enableCaseInsensitiveFilter": false, "enableAttributesToGetSearchResultsHandler": true }, "operationTimeout": { "CREATE": -1, "UPDATE": -1, "DELETE": -1, "TEST": -1, "SCRIPT_ON_CONNECTOR": -1, "SCRIPT_ON_RESOURCE": -1, "GET": -1, "RESOLVEUSERNAME": -1, "AUTHENTICATE": -1, "SEARCH": -1, "VALIDATE": -1, "SYNC": -1, "SCHEMA": -1 } } ' \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/system?_action=createFullConfig"
Note
Notice the single quotes around the argument to the --data
option in the preceding command. For most UNIX shells, single quotes around
a string prevent the shell from executing the command when encountering a
new line in the content. You can therefore pass the
--data '...'
option on a single line, or including line
feeds.
IDM attempts to read the schema, if available, from the external
resource in order to generate output. IDM then iterates through
schema objects and attributes, creating JSON representations for
objectTypes
and operationOptions
for
supported objects and operations.
The output includes the basic --data
input, along with
operationOptions
and objectTypes
.
Because IDM produces a full property set for all attributes and
all object types in the schema from the external resource, the resulting
configuration can be large. For an LDAP server, IDM can generate
a configuration containing several tens of thousands of lines, for example.
You might therefore want to reduce the schema to a minimum on the external
resource before you run the createFullConfig
command.
When you have the complete connector configuration, save that configuration
in a file named provisioner.openicf-name.json
(where name corresponds to the name of the connector) and place it in the
conf
directory of your project.
15.2.4. Setting the Connector Reference Properties
The following example shows a connector reference object:
"connectorRef" : { "bundleName" : "org.forgerock.openicf.connectors.csvfile-connector", "bundleVersion" : "[1.5.19.0,1.6.0.0)", "connectorName" : "org.forgerock.openicf.csvfile.CSVFileConnector", "connectorHostRef" : "csv" },
bundleName
string, required
The
ConnectorBundle-Name
of the ICF connector.bundleVersion
string, required
The
ConnectorBundle-Version
of the ICF connector. The value can be a single version (such as1.4.0.0
) or a range of versions, which lets you support multiple connector versions in a single project.You can specify a range of versions as follows:
[1.1.0.0,1.4.0.0]
indicates that all connector versions from 1.1 to 1.4, inclusive, are supported.[1.1.0.0,1.4.0.0)
indicates that all connector versions from 1.1 to 1.4, including 1.1 but excluding 1.4, are supported.(1.1.0.0,1.4.0.0]
indicates that all connector versions from 1.1 to 1.4, excluding 1.1 but including 1.4, are supported.(1.1.0.0,1.4.0.0)
indicates that all connector versions from 1.1 to 1.4, exclusive, are supported.
When a range of versions is specified, IDM uses the latest connector that is available within that range. If your project requires a specific connector version, you must explicitly state the version in your connector configuration file, or constrain the range to address only the version that you need.
connectorName
string, required
The connector implementation class name.
connectorHostRef
string, optional
If the connector runs remotely, the value of this field must match the
name
field of theRemoteConnectorServers
object in the connector server configuration file (provisioner.openicf.connectorinfoprovider.json
). For example:... "remoteConnectorServers" : [ { "name" : "dotnet", ...
If the connector runs locally, the value of this field can be one of the following:
If the connector .jar is installed in
openidm/connectors/
, the value must be"#LOCAL"
. This is currently the default, and recommended location.If the connector .jar is installed in
openidm/bundle/
(not recommended), the value must be"osgi:service/org.forgerock.openicf.framework.api.osgi.ConnectorManager"
.
15.2.5. Setting the Pool Configuration
The poolConfigOption
specifies the pool configuration
for poolable connectors only (connectors that have
"connectorPoolingSupported" : true
). Non-poolable
connectors ignore this parameter.
The following example shows a pool configuration option object for a poolable connector:
{ "maxObjects" : 10, "maxIdle" : 10, "maxWait" : 150000, "minEvictableIdleTimeMillis" : 120000, "minIdle" : 1 }
maxObjects
The maximum number of idle and active instances of the connector.
maxIdle
The maximum number of idle instances of the connector.
maxWait
The maximum time, in milliseconds, that the pool waits for an object before timing out. A value of
0
means that there is no timeout.minEvictableIdleTimeMillis
The maximum time, in milliseconds, that an object can be idle before it is removed. A value of
0
means that there is no idle timeout.minIdle
The minimum number of idle instances of the connector.
15.2.6. Setting the Operation Timeouts
The operation timeout property lets you configure timeout values per operation type. By default, no timeout is configured for any operation type. A sample configuration follows:
{ "CREATE" : -1, "TEST" : -1, "AUTHENTICATE" : -1, "SEARCH" : -1, "VALIDATE" : -1, "GET" : -1, "UPDATE" : -1, "DELETE" : -1, "SCRIPT_ON_CONNECTOR" : -1, "SCRIPT_ON_RESOURCE" : -1, "SYNC" : -1, "SCHEMA" : -1 }
- operation-name
Timeout in milliseconds
A value of
-1
disables the timeout.
15.2.7. Setting the Connection Configuration
The configurationProperties
object specifies the
configuration for the connection between the connector and the resource,
and is therefore resource-specific.
The following example shows a configuration properties object for the default CSV sample resource connector:
"configurationProperties" : { "csvFile" : "&{idm.instance.dir}/data/csvConnectorData.csv" },
- property
Individual properties depend on the type of connector.
15.2.8. Setting the Synchronization Failure Configuration
The syncFailureHandler
object specifies what should
happen if a liveSync operation reports a failure for an operation. The
following example shows a synchronization failure configuration:
{ "maxRetries" : 5, "postRetryAction" : "logged-ignore" }
maxRetries
positive integer or
-1
, requiredThe number of attempts that IDM should make to process a failed modification. A value of zero indicates that failed modifications should not be reattempted. In this case, the post retry action is executed immediately when a liveSync operation fails. A value of -1 (or omitting the
maxRetries
property, or the entiresyncFailureHandler
object) indicates that failed modifications should be retried an infinite number of times. In this case, no post retry action is executed.postRetryAction
string, required
The action that should be taken if the synchronization operation fails after the specified number of attempts. The post retry action can be one of the following:
logged-ignore
- IDM ignores the failed modification, and logs its occurrence.dead-letter-queue
- IDM saves the details of the failed modification in a table in the repository (accessible over REST atrepo/synchronisation/deadLetterQueue/provisioner-name
).script
specifies a custom script that should be executed when the maximum number of retries has been reached.
For more information, see "Configuring the LiveSync Retry Policy".
15.2.9. Configuring How Results Are Handled
The resultsHandlerConfig
object specifies how OpenICF
returns results. These configuration properties do not apply to all
connectors and depend on the interfaces that are implemented by each
connector. For information about the interfaces that connectors support, see
the Connector Reference.
The following example shows a results handler configuration object:
"resultsHandlerConfig" : { "enableNormalizingResultsHandler" : true, "enableFilteredResultsHandler" : false, "enableCaseInsensitiveFilter" : false, "enableAttributesToGetSearchResultsHandler" : false }
enableNormalizingResultsHandler
boolean, false by default
When this property is enabled, ICF normalizes returned attributes to ensure that they are filtered consistently. If the connector implements the attribute normalizer interface, enable the interface by setting this property to
true
. If the connector does not implement the attribute normalizer interface, the value of this property has no effect.enableFilteredResultsHandler
boolean, false by default
Most connectors use the filtering and search capabilities of the remote connected system. In these cases, you can leave this property set to
false
. If the connector does not use the remote system's filtering and search capabilities, you must set this property totrue
.All the non-scripted connectors, apart from the CSV connector use the filtering mechanism of the remote system. In the case of the CSV connector, the remote resource has no filtering mechanism, so you must set
enableFilteredResultsHandler
totrue
. For the scripted connectors, the setting will depend on how you have implemented the connector.enableCaseInsensitiveFilter
boolean, false by default
This property applies only if
enableFilteredResultsHandler
is set totrue
. The filtered results handler is case-sensitive by default. For example, a search forlastName = "Jensen"
will not match a stored user withlastName : jensen
. When the filtered results handler is enabled, you can use this property to enable case-insensitive filtering. If you leave this property set tofalse
, searches on that resource will be case-sensitive.enableAttributesToGetSearchResultsHandler
boolean, false by default
By default, IDM determines which attributes should be retrieved in a search. If you set this property to
true
, the ICF framework removes all attributes from the READ/QUERY response, except for those that are specifically requested. For performance reasons, you should set this property tofalse
for local connectors and totrue
for remote connectors.
15.2.10. Specifying the Supported Object Types
The objectTypes
configuration specifies the object types
(user, group, account, and so on) that are supported by the connector. The
object names that you define here determine how the object is accessed in
the URI. For example:
system/systemName/objectType
This configuration is based on the JSON Schema with the extensions described in the following section.
Attribute names that start or end with __
are regarded as
special attributes by OpenICF. The purpose of the
special attributes in ICF is to enable someone who is developing a
new connector to create a contract regarding how
a property can be referenced, regardless of the application that is using
the connector. In this way, the connector can map specific object
information between an arbitrary application and the resource, without
knowing how that information is referenced in the application.
These attributes have no specific meaning in the context of IDM,
although some of the connectors that are bundled with IDM use
these attributes. The generic LDAP connector, for example, can be used with
ForgeRock Directory Services (DS), Active Directory, OpenLDAP, and
other LDAP directories. Each of these directories might use a different
attribute name to represent the same type of information. For example,
Active Directory uses unicodePassword
and DS
uses userPassword
to represent the same thing, a user's
password. The LDAP connector uses the special OpenICF
__PASSWORD__
attribute to abstract that difference. In
the same way, the LDAP connector maps the __NAME__
attribute to an LDAP dn
.
The ICF __UID__
is a special case. The
__UID__
must not be included in the
IDM configuration or in any update or create operation. This
attribute denotes the unique identity attribute of an object and
IDM always maps it to the _id
of the object.
The following excerpt shows the configuration of an
account
object type:
{ "account" : { "$schema" : "http://json-schema.org/draft-03/schema", "id" : "__ACCOUNT__", "type" : "object", "nativeType" : "__ACCOUNT__", "absentIfEmpty" : false, "absentIfNull" : true, "properties" : { "name" : { "type" : "string", "nativeName" : "__NAME__", "nativeType" : "JAVA_TYPE_PRIMITIVE_LONG", "flags" : [ "NOT_CREATABLE", "NOT_UPDATEABLE", "NOT_READABLE", "NOT_RETURNED_BY_DEFAULT" ] }, "groups" : { "type" : "array", "items" : { "type" : "string", "nativeType" : "string" }, "nativeName" : "__GROUPS__", "nativeType" : "string", "flags" : [ "NOT_RETURNED_BY_DEFAULT" ] }, "givenName" : { "type" : "string", "nativeName" : "givenName", "nativeType" : "string" }, } } }
ICF supports an __ALL__
object type that ensures
that objects of every type are included in a synchronization operation. The
primary purpose of this object type is to prevent synchronization errors
when multiple changes affect more than one object type.
For example, imagine a deployment synchronizing two external systems. On
system A, the administrator creates a user, jdoe
, then
adds the user to a group, engineers
. When these changes
are synchronized to system B, if the __GROUPS__
object
type is synchronized first, the synchronization will fail, because the group
contains a user that does not yet exist on system B. Synchronizing the
__ALL__
object type ensures that user
jdoe
is created on the external system before he is added
to the group engineers
.
The __ALL__
object type is assumed by default - you do
not need to declare it in your provisioner configuration file. If it is not
declared, the object type is named __ALL__
. If you want
to map a different name for this object type, declare it in your provisioner
configuration. The following excerpt from a sample provisioner configuration
uses the name allobjects
:
"objectTypes": { "allobjects": { "$schema": "http://json-schema.org/draft-03/schema", "id": "__ALL__", "type": "object", "nativeType": "__ALL__" }, ...
A liveSync operation invoked with no object type assumes an object type of
__ALL__
. For example, the following call invokes a
liveSync operation on all defined object types in an LDAP system:
$ curl \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Username: openidm-admin" \ --header "X-OpenIDM-Password: openidm-admin" \ --request POST \ "http://localhost:8080/openidm/system/ldap?_action=liveSync"
Note
Using the __ALL__
object type requires a mechanism
to ensure the order in which synchronization changes are processed. Servers
that use the cn=changelog
mechanism to order sync
changes, such as ForgeRock Directory Services (DS), Oracle DSEE, and
the legacy Sun Directory Server, cannot use the __ALL__
object type by default. Such servers must be forced to use time stamps to
order their sync changes. For these LDAP server types, set
useTimestampsForSync
to true
in the
provisioner configuration.
LDAP servers that use timestamps by default (such as Active Directory GCs
and OpenLDAP) can use the __ALL__
object type without
any additional configuration. Active Directory and Active Directory LDS,
which use Update Sequence Numbers, can also use the
__ALL__
object type without additional configuration.
15.2.10.1. Adding Objects and Properties Using the UI
To add object types and properties to a connector configuration by using the Admin UI, select Configure > Connectors. Select the connector that you want to change, then select the Object Types tab.
In the case of the LDAP connector, the connector reads the schema from the remote resource to determine the object types and properties that can be added to its configuration. When you select one of these object types, you can think of it as a template. Edit the basic object type, as required, to suit your deployment.
To add a property to an object type, select the Edit icon next to the object type, then select Add Property.
15.2.10.2. Extending the Object Type Configuration
nativeType
string, optional
The native ICF object type.
The list of supported native object types is dependent on the resource, or on the connector. For example, an LDAP connector might have object types such as
__ACCOUNT__
and__GROUP__
.
15.2.10.3. Specifying the Behavior For Empty Attributes
The absentIfEmpty
and absentIfNull
object class properties enable you to specify how attributes are handled
during synchronization if their values are null (for single-valued
attributes) or empty (for multi-valued attributes). You can set these
properties per object type.
By default, these properties are set as follows:
"absentIfEmpty" : false
Multi-valued attributes whose values are empty are included in the resource response during synchronization.
"absentIfNull" : true
Single-valued attributes whose values are null are removed from the resource response during synchronization.
15.2.10.4. Extending the Property Type Configuration
nativeType
string, optional
The native ICF attribute type.
The following native types are supported:
JAVA_TYPE_BIGDECIMAL JAVA_TYPE_BIGINTEGER JAVA_TYPE_BYTE JAVA_TYPE_BYTE_ARRAY JAVA_TYPE_CHAR JAVA_TYPE_CHARACTER JAVA_TYPE_DATE JAVA_TYPE_DOUBLE JAVA_TYPE_FILE JAVA_TYPE_FLOAT JAVA_TYPE_GUARDEDBYTEARRAY JAVA_TYPE_GUARDEDSTRING JAVA_TYPE_INT JAVA_TYPE_INTEGER JAVA_TYPE_LONG JAVA_TYPE_OBJECT JAVA_TYPE_PRIMITIVE_BOOLEAN JAVA_TYPE_PRIMITIVE_BYTE JAVA_TYPE_PRIMITIVE_DOUBLE JAVA_TYPE_PRIMITIVE_FLOAT JAVA_TYPE_PRIMITIVE_LONG JAVA_TYPE_STRING
Note
The
JAVA_TYPE_DATE
property is deprecated. Functionality may be removed in a future release. This property-level extension is an alias forstring
. Any dates assigned to this extension should be formatted per ISO 8601.nativeName
string, optional
The native ICF attribute name.
flags
string, optional
The native ICF attribute flags. ICF supports the following attribute flags:
MULTIVALUED
- specifies that the property can be multivalued.For multi-valued properties, if the property value type is anything other than a
string
, you must include anitems
property that declares the data type.The following example shows the
entries
property of theauthentication
object in a provisioner file. Theentries
property is multi-valued, and its elements are of typeobject
:"authentication" : { ... "properties" : { ... "entries" : { "type" : "object", "required" : false, "nativeName" : "entries", "nativeType" : "object", "items" : { "type" : "object" }, "flags" : [ "MULTIVALUED" ] }, ...
NOT_CREATABLE
,NOT_READABLE
,NOT_UPDATEABLE
In some cases, the connector might not support manipulating an attribute because the attribute can only be changed directly on the remote system. For example, if the
name
attribute of an account can only be created by Active Directory, and never changed by IDM, you would addNOT_CREATABLE
andNOT_UPDATEABLE
to the provisioner configuration for that attribute.NOT_RETURNED_BY_DEFAULT
Certain attributes such as LDAP groups or other calculated attributes might be expensive to read. To avoid returning these attributes in a default read of the object, unless they are explicitly requested, add the
NOT_RETURNED_BY_DEFAULT
flag to the provisioner configuration for that attribute.You can also use this flag to prevent properties from being read by default during a synchronization operation. To synchronize changes to a target object, IDM performs an UPDATE rather than a PATCH. This causes all attributes that are mapped from the source to the target to be modified when the synchronization is processed (rather than only those attributes that have changed). Although the value of a property might not change, the property still registers an update. This behavior can be problematic for properties such as the
password
, which might have restrictions on updating with a similar value. To prevent such properties from being updated during synchronization, set theNOT_RETURNED_BY_DEFAULT
flag, which effectively prevents the property from being read from the source during the synchronization. For example:"__PASSWORD__" : { "type" : "string", "nativeName" : "__PASSWORD__", "nativeType" : "JAVA_TYPE_GUARDEDSTRING", "flags" : [ "NOT_RETURNED_BY_DEFAULT" ], "runAsUser" : true },
REQUIRED
- specifies that the property is required in create operations. This flag sets therequired
property of an attribute as follows:"required" : true
You can configure connectors to enable provisioning of any arbitrary
property. For example, the following property definitions would enable you
to provision image files, used as avatars, to account
objects in a system resource. The first definition would work for a single
photo encoded as a base64 string. The second definition would work for
multiple photos encoded in the same way:
"attributeByteArray" : { "type" : "string", "nativeName" : "attributeByteArray", "nativeType" : "JAVA_TYPE_BYTE_ARRAY" },
"attributeByteArrayMultivalue": { "type": "array", "items": { "type": "string", "nativeType": "JAVA_TYPE_BYTE_ARRAY" }, "nativeName": "attributeByteArrayMultivalue" },
Note
Do not use the dash character ( -
) in property names,
like last-name
. Dashes in names make JavaScript syntax
more complex. If you cannot avoid the dash, write
source['last-name']
instead of
source.last-name
in your JavaScript scripts.
15.2.11. Configuring the Operation Options
The operationOptions
object lets you deny specific
operations on a resource. For example, you can use this configuration object
to deny CREATE
and DELETE
operations
on a read-only resource to avoid IDM accidentally updating the
resource during a synchronization operation.
The following example defines the options for the "SYNC"
operation:
"operationOptions" : { { "SYNC" : { "denied" : true, "onDeny" : "DO_NOTHING", "objectFeatures" : { "__ACCOUNT__" : { "denied" : true, "onDeny" : "THROW_EXCEPTION", "operationOptionInfo" : { "$schema" : "http://json-schema.org/draft-03/schema", "type" : "object", "properties" : { "_OperationOption-float" : { "type" : "number", "nativeType" : "JAVA_TYPE_PRIMITIVE_FLOAT" } } } }, "__GROUP__" : { "denied" : false, "onDeny" : "DO_NOTHING" } } } } ...
The ICF Framework supports the following operations:
AUTHENTICATE
CREATE
DELETE
GET
RESOLVEUSERNAME
SCHEMA
SCRIPT_ON_CONNECTOR
SCRIPT_ON_RESOURCE
SEARCH
SYNC
TEST
UPDATE
VALIDATE
For detailed information on these operations, see the ICF API documentation.
The operationOptions
object has the following
configurable properties:
denied
boolean, optional
This property prevents operation execution if the value is
true
.onDeny
string, optional
If
denied
istrue
, then the service uses this value. Default value:DO_NOTHING
.DO_NOTHING
: On operation the service does nothing.THROW_EXCEPTION
: On operation the service throws aForbiddenException
exception.
15.3. Accessing Remote Connectors
When you configure a remote connector, you use the connector info
provider service to connect through a remote connector server.
To configure a connector info provider service, you'll need to set up a
5.7. Account Claiming: Links Between Accounts and Social Identity Providers
If your users have one or more social identity providers, they can link them to the same IDM user account. This section assumes that you have configured one or more of the social identity providers described in "Configuring Social Identity Providers".
Conversely, you should not be able to link more than one IDM account with a single social identity provider account.
When social accounts are associated with an IDM account, IDM creates a managed record, which uses the name of the social identity provider name as the managed object type, and the subject is used as the
_id
. This combination has a unique constraint; if you try to associate a second IDM account with the same social account, IDM detects a conflict, which prevents the association.The default process uses the email address associated with the account. Once you've configured social identity providers, you can see this filter in the
selfservice-socialUserClaim.json
file:You can modify the
claimQueryFilter
to a different property such astelephoneNumber
. Make sure that property is:Set to "required" in the
managed.json
file; the default list for managed users is shown here:Unique; for example, if multiple users have the same telephone number, IDM responds with error messages shown in "When Multiple Users have the Same Email Address".
Based on the
claimQueryFilter
, what IDM does depends on the following scenarios:"When the Email Address is New"
"When One User has the Same Email Address"
"When Multiple Users have the Same Email Address"
5.7.1. When the Email Address is New
When you register with a social identity provider, IDM checks the email address of that account against the managed user data store.
If that email address doesn't exist for any IDM managed user, IDM takes available identifying information, and pre-populates the self-registration screen. If all required information is included, IDM proceeds to other screens, depending on what you've activated in this section: "Common Steps: User Self-Registration, Password Reset, Forgotten Username".
5.7.2. When One User has the Same Email Address
When you register with a social identity provider, IDM checks the email address of that account against the managed user data store.
If that email address exists for one IDM managed user, IDM gives you a chance to link to that account, with the following message:
In the text box, users are expected to enter their IDM account password.
5.7.3. When Multiple Users have the Same Email Address
When you register with a social identity provider, IDM checks the email address of that account against the managed user data store.
If that email address exists for multiple IDM managed users, IDM denies the login attempt, with the following error message:
IDM denies further attempts to login with that account with the following message:
5.7.4. The Process for End Users
When your users register with a social identity provider, as defined in "Configuring Social Identity Providers", they create an account in the IDM managed user data store. As an end user, you can link additional social identity providers to that data store, from the End User UI, using the following steps:
Navigate to the End User UI, at an URL such as
http://IDM.example.com:8080
.Log into the account, either as an IDM user, or with a social identity provider.
Navigate to Profile () > Social Sign-in. You should see a list of configured social identity providers.
Connect to the social identity providers of your choice. Unless you've already signed in with that social provider, you should be prompted to log into that provider.
To test the result, log out and log back in, using the link for the newly linked social identity provider.
5.7.5. Reviewing Linked Accounts as an Administrator
You can review social identity accounts linked to an IDM account, from the Admin UI and from the command line. You can disable or delete social identity provider information for a specific user from the command line, as described in "Reviewing Linked Accounts Over REST".
When you activate a social identity provider, IDM creates a new managed object for that provider. You can review that managed object in the
managed.json
file, as well as in the Admin UI, by selecting Configure > Managed Objects.The information shown is reflected in the schema in the
identityProvider-providername.json
file for the selected provider.Note
Do not edit social identity provider profile information through IDM. Any changes that you make won't be synchronized with that provider.
5.7.5.1. Reviewing Linked Accounts Over REST
To identify linked social identity provider accounts for a user, you must specifically add the
idps
field to your user query. For example, the following query shows bjensen's linked social identity information:For more information about a specific social identity provider, query the identity relationship using the referred resource ID. The following example shows the information collected from the Google provider for bjensen:
When a user disables logins through one specific social identity provider in the End User UI, that sets
"enabled" : false
in the data for that provider. However, that user's social identity information is preserved.Alternatively, you can use a REST call to disable logins to a specific social identity provider. The following REST call removes a user's ability to log in through Google:
In this case, the REST call deletes all Google social identity provider information for that user.
5.7.5.2. Reviewing Linked Accounts From the Admin UI
When you configure a social identity provider, IDM includes two features in the Admin UI.
The ability to review the social identity accounts linked to specific users. To see how this works, log into the Admin UI, and select Manage > User, and select a user. Under the Identity Providers tab, you can review the social identity providers associated with a specific account.
A managed object for each provider. For example, if you've enabled Google as a social identity provider, select Manage > Google. In the screen that appears, you can select the ID for any Google social identity account that has been used or linked to an existing IDM account, and review the profile information shared from that provider.